10 Social Textbook Combo

Government of Karnataka
SOCIAL SCIENCE
(Revised Textbook - 2024)
ED
H
IS
10
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
Tenth Standard
TO
Part - 1
T
O
N
English Medium
Karnataka Textbook Society (R.)

6th Cross, Malleshwaram,
Bengaluru - 560 003
PREFACE
The Textbook Society, Karnataka has been engaged in producing new textbooks
according to the new syllabi which in turn are designed on NCF – 2005 since June
2010. Textbooks are prepared in 12 languages; seven of them serve as the media of
instruction. From standard 1 to 4 there is the EVS, mathematics and 5th to 10th there
are three core subjects namely mathematics, science and social science.
NCF – 2005 has a number of special features and they are:
• connecting knowledge to life activities.
• learning to shift from rote methods.
• enriching the curriculum beyond textbooks.
• learning experiences for the construction of knowledge.
• making examinations flexible and integrating them with classroom
experiences.
• caring concerns within the democratic policy of the country.
ED
• making education relevant to the present and future needs.
• softening the subject boundaries- integrated knowledge and the joy of
H
learning.
IS
• the child is the constructor of knowledge.
BL
EP S
The new books are produced based on three fundamental approaches namely
R TB
Constructive approach, Spiral Approach and Integrated approach. The learner

U
is encouraged to think, engage in activities, master skills and competencies. The

BE @K
materials presented in these books are integrated with values. The new books are not
examination oriented in their nature. On the other hand they help the learner in the
all round development of his/her personality, thus help him/her become a healthy
member of a healthy society and a productive citizen of this great country, India.
In Social science especially in standard 5 the first chapter deals with the historical,
TO
geographical, cultural and local study of the division in which learners live. Chapters
on sociology, business studies and commerce are introduced in standard VIII as per
T
the guidelines of NCF-2005. A lot of additional information is given through box

O
items. Learners are encouraged to work towards construction of knowledge through

N
assignments and projects. Learning load of memorizing dates has been reduced to
the minimum. Life values have been integrated with content of each chapter.
The Textbook Society expresses grateful thanks to the chairpersons, writers,
scrutinisers, artists, staff of DIETs and CTEs and the members of the Editorial Board
and printers in helping the Text Book Society in producing these textbooks.
Prof. G. S. Mudambadithaya Nagendra Kumar

Coordinator, Curriculum Revision Managing Director
and Textbook Preparation Karnataka Textbook SocietyÀ
Karnataka Textbook Society Bengaluru, Karnataka
Bengaluru, Karnataka
ii
Chairpersons’ Note
A demand for the change of curriculum, syllabi and textbooks has

been heard from parents at an internal of five years. The Government
of Karnataka has accepted the demand favourably and revised its
Curriculum (KCF 2007) and syllabi in all subjects. As a result of it
textbooks are being prepared in various subjects and the result is this
Social Science book for standard X. It has been designed and prepared
according to the changed situations in various curricular areas to
enable the students to construct knowledge through activities. There
are six subject areas namely, History, Political Science, Geography,
Economics, Sociology and Business Studies.
The textbook has been prepared keeping in mind the changing
ED
situations in rural and urban scenario and at the same time providing
opportunities for creativity among learners. A large number of activities
H
IS
and project works have been designed for the purpose. These are
BL
designed based on the fact that we live in a world of competition where
EP S
R TB
acquiring knowledge has become the need of the day. The matter has
U
been presented in a simple style and all technical words used have
BE @K
been glossed. That does not mean that we have succeeded fully in our
endeavour, though we have followed the basic principles enunciated in
NCF 2005.
TO
We express our grateful thanks to all those who gave us concrete

suggestions at every stage of preparation of the book. We are grateful
T
to the writers, the scrutiny committee members and translators.

O
N
We are especially grateful to the chief coordinator

Prof. G S Mudambadithaya who has been striving hard in planning
and bringing out textbooks of very high standard in all subjects. We
express our sincere thanks to the Managing Director, Deputy Director
and the coordinator of Social Science book. I also place on record my
indebtedness to the Vice Chancellor, Registrar and other colleagues of
the University of Tumakuru for their encouragement and guidance.
Dr. M. Shashidhar
Dr. P. Ananthkrishna Bhat
Chairpersons
iii
Text Book Committee
Chair Persons :
Dr. M. Shashidhar, Associate Professor, Department of History, Bangalore University, Bangalore-56.
Dr.Ananthakrishna Bhat , Retd. Professor, Department of Political science, Canara college,
Mangalore.
Members :
Sri Ramprasad, Retd. Principal, Sri ARS PU College, Hariharapura, Chikkamagalore District.
Sri N. Sathyaprakash, Retd. Head Master, Vidyavardhaka Sangha High School, Ist Block, Rajajinagar,
Bangalore-10.
Smt. Saraswathi Hegde, Asst. Teacher, Government High School, Peenya, Bangalore-10
Sri B. H. Hanumathaiah, Assistant Professor, Department of Sociology, Govt. First Grade college,
Udayapura, channarayapatna Tq.
Dr. Mallikarjuna. S. Bagewadi, Professor & Head, Department of Geography, A .G.College of Arts and
commerece, Munavalli, Soudatti Tq.
Sri G.N. Kempaiah, Lecturer, Govt. Pre-University College, Maskal, Tumkur Tq., Tumkur Dist.
ED
Sri A.S. Dikshit, Retd. Principal, Vani Education Centre, Basaveswaranagar, Bangalore-79.
Prof. Dorai Raj. S.N Principal, Sheshadripuram Institute of Commerce and Management, Bangalore.
H
Sri. P.Prasad. Drawing Teacher, Sri Byraveshwara High School, Sadshivanagar, Tumkur.
IS
Scrutinizers :
BL
Dr. Vijay Poonacha Thambanda, Professor, Department of History, Kannada University, Hampi, Vidy-
EP S
aranya, Bellery.
R TB
U
Prof. T.D. Devegowda, Professor, Deparment of Political Science , Dean (study centers) K S O U, Mysore.
BE @K
C.N.Shankar Rao, Retd. Lecturer, Canara P.U college, Mangalore.

Dr. Ranganatha, Professor and Head, PG center of Geography , Maharani’s woman Arts & Commerce
College, Mysore.
Dr.S.R. Keshav, Associate Professor, Department of Economics, Bangalore University, Bangalore-56.
Dr.Noora Afza , Professor, Department of Commerce and Business studies, Tumkur University, Tumkur.
Editorial Board :
TO
Dr. M. V. Srinivas, Retd. Professor, Department of History, Mysore University, Mysore.

Dr. R. L. M. Patil, Retd. Professor, Department of Political Science, Bangalore University, Bangalore-56.
T
Dr. Eshwarappa, Professor, Department of Geography, Bangalore University, Bangalore-56.

O
Translators :
N
Smt Geetha Srinivasan, ELT Expert, 329/1, I Cross, 23rd Main Sarakkikere village, 5th Phase.
J.P. Nagar, Bengaluru - 78
Dr.Ananthakrishna Bhat , Retd. Professor, Department of Political science, Canara college,
Mangalore.
Sri A.S. Dikshit, Retd. Principal, Vani Education Centre, Basaveswaranagar, Bangalore-79.
Chief Co ordinator :
Dr .G.S.Mudambadithaya, Coordinator, Syllabus Revision and Text Book preparation committee,
Karnataka Text Book Society, Bangalore.
Chief Advisor :
Sri Y. T Gurumurthy, Managing Director, Karnataka Text Book Society, Bangalore- 85.
Sri Bella shetty, Joint Director, Karnataka Text Book Society, Bangalore-85.
Programme Co ordinator :
Sri A. T. Rangadasappa, Senior Asst. Director, Karnataka Text Book Society, Bangalore -85.
iv
About the Revision of Textbooks
Honourable Chief Minister Sri Siddaramaiah who is also the Finance
Minister of Karnataka, in his response to the public opinion about the
new textbooks from standard I to X, announced, in his 2014-15 budget
speech of constituting an expert-committee, to look into the matter.
He also spoke of the basic expectations therein, which the textbook
experts should follow: “ The textbooks should aim at inculcating social
equality, moral values, development of personality, scientific temper,
critical acumen, secularism and the sense of national commitment”,
he said.
Later, for the revision of the textbooks from class I to X, the
Department of Education constituted twenty seven committees and
passed an order on 24-11-2014. The committees so constituted were
ED
subject and class-wise and were in accordance with the standards
H
prescribed. Teachers who are experts in matters of subjects and
IS
syllabi were in the committees. BL
EP S
There were already many complaints, and analyses about the

R TB
U
textbooks. So, a freehand was given in the order dated 24-11-2014
BE @K
to the responsible committees to examine and review to text and

even to prepare new text and revise if necessary. Eventually, a new
order was passed on 19-9-2015 which also gave freedom even to re-
write the textbooks if necessary. In the same order, it was said that
TO
the completely revised textbooks could be put to force from 2017-18

instead of 2016-17.
T
Many self inspired individuals and institutions, listing out the

O
N
wrong information and mistakes that were in the texts, had sent them
to the Education Minister and to the Textbook Society. They were
rectified. Before rectification we had exchanged ideas by arranging
debates. Discussions had taken place with Primary and Secondary
Education Teachers’ Associations. Questionnaires were administered
among teachers to pool up opinions. Separate meetings were held
with teachers, subject inspectors and DIET Principals. Analytical
opinions had been collected. To the subject experts of science, social
science, mathematics and languages, textbooks were sent in advance
and later meetings were held for discussions. Women associations
and science-related organistations were also invited for discussions.
v
Thus, on the basis of all the inputs received from various sources, the
textbooks have been revised whereever necessary.
Another very important aspect has to be shared here. We constituted
three expert committees. They were constituted to make suggestions
after making a comparative study of the texts of science, mathematics
and social science subjects of central schools (NCERT), along with the
state textbooks. Thus, the state textbooks have been enriched based
on the comparative analysis and suggestions made by the experts. The
state textbooks have been guarded not to go lower in standards than
the textbooks of central schools. Besides, these textbooks have been
examined along side with the textbooks of Andhra Pradesh, Kerala,
Tamil Nadu and Maharashtra states.
Another clarification has to be given here. Whatever we have done
in the committees is only revision, it is not the total preparation of the
ED
textbooks. Therefore, the structures of the already prepared textbooks
H
have in no way been affected or distorted. They have only been revised
IS
in the background of gender equality, regional representation, national
BL
EP S
integrity, equality and social harmony. While doing so, the curriculum
R TB
frames of both central and state have not been transgressed. Besides,
U
the aspirations of the constitution are incorporated carefully. Further,

BE @K
the reviews of the committees were once given to higher expert

committees for examination and their opinions have been inculcated
into the textbooks.
TO
Finally, we express our grateful thanks to those who strived in all

those 27 committees with complete dedication and also to those who
T
served in higher committees and experts of revised textbooks also. At

O
the same time, we thank all the supervising officers of the Textbook
N
Society who sincerely worked hard in forming the committees and

managed to see the task reach its logical completion. We thank all
the members of the staff who co-operated in this venture. Our thanks
are also due to the subject experts and to the associations who gave
valuable suggestions.
Veeranna S. Jatti Prof. Baraguru Ramachandrappa

Managing Director Chairman-in-Chief
Karnataka Textbook Society (R) State Textbook Revision Committees
Bengaluru. Karnataka Textbook Society (R)
Bengaluru.
vi
Text Book Revision Committee
CHAIRMAN IN CHIEF
Prof. Baraguru Ramachandrappa, Chairman, State Textbook Revision Committee,
K.T.B.S. Bengaluru.
CHAIRPERSON
Dr. Aswathanarayana, Professor, Department of History, University of Mysore, Mysuru.
MEMBERS
Dr. Aswathanarayana, Professor, Department of History, Bangalore University,
Bengaluru-56.
Dr. J. Somashekar, Professor, Department of Political Science, Vijayanagar
Sri Krishnadevaraya University, Ballari.
Dr. H.D. Prashant, Professor, Department of Developmental Studies, Kannada
University, Hampi, Vidyaranya.
Dr. S.T. Bagalkoti, Professor, Department of Studies in Economics, Karnatak
ED
University, Dharwad.
H
Prof. P. Mallappa, Professor (Retd.), Department of Geography, J.S.S. College, Mysuru.
IS
Dr. B. Shekhar, Professor, Department of Studies and Research in Commerce, Tumkur
University, Tumakuru.
BL
EP S
Sri A.S. Dikshit, Principal (Retd.), Vani Education Centre, Basaveswaranagar,

R TB
U
Bengaluru-79.
BE @K
Sri Iaranna M. Ambi, Asst. Teacher, G.H.S. Tadakodu, Dharwad Taluk and District.
Sri D.N. Venkatesh, Drawing Teacher, G.H.S. Uramarkasalagere, Mandya Taluk and
District.
SCRUTINIZERS
Sri Ashok V.Shettar, Associate Professor, Deparment of History and Archaeology,
TO
Karnatak Univesity, Dharwad.

Dr. M.S. Talawar, Professor (Retd.), Deparment of Studies in Education, Bangalore
T
University, Bengaluru.
O
Dr. Dhasharath Naik, Professor, Department of Economics, Gulbarga University,

N
Kalaburagi.
Dr. Haseen Taj, Professor, Deparment of Studies in Education, Bangalore University,
Bengaluru.
TRANSLATORS
Sri Sadanand .R, Lecturer, G.P.U.C for Girls, Hunsuru Tq. Mysuru District.
CHIEF ADVISOR
Sri Veeranna S. Jatti, Managing Director, Karnataka Text Book Society, Bengaluru- 85.
Sri Kodandaramaiah. N, Deputy Director, Karnataka Text Book Society, Bengaluru -85.
PROGRAMME COORDINATOR
Smt. N.S. Sowmya, Senior Asst. Director, Karnataka Text Book Society, Bengaluru -85.
vii
Foreword
On review of text books
The textbooks published in the year 2014 went under revision the same
year for political reasons. The revised textbooks reached the students only
in 2017-18 school year. The changes made in revised textbooks came under
wide scrutiny and criticism. Since there was an all-round objection that such
a textbook revision was done with an objective of propagation of a certain
ideology that benefitted self-interests, side-lining education’s core intention,
the honourable Karnataka Government in 2021 formed a committee mandat-
ing to re-review such textbooks. The committee has reviewed in depth, such
textbooks which had attracted objections, and has recommended certain
ED
changes. Today’s children are tomorrow’s nation, they say. The future of our
society depends on what we teach the children of today in schools. The text-
H
books that students study must have healthy thoughts and concepts. It must
IS
not be spreading mutual distrust, hatred, neglect amongst the different class
BL
EP S
and communities of the society; should incite nationalism and patriotism. The
R TB
U
textbooks should provide objective information about the past events of state
BE @K
and nation. They must introduce local culture, language and traditions to the
students. Overall, the textbooks must make the students fine, responsible,
conscious, open minded and honourable citizens. The textbook revision had to
be made by bearing this responsibility in mind. We had to build a framework
TO
for ourselves for reviewing and revising the textbooks. Primarily, our intention
was to ensure that the social science textbook
T
(1) contained no content that was disrespectful towards any caste, reli-
O
N
gion, philosophy, community or individual

(2) subjects to be presented in a systematic, chronological order
(3) had to be made knowledge-bank instead of an information dump of
unnecessary matters
(4) had to be made bereft of any self-interest ideology
(5) had to be devoid of half-truths, falsehoods, exaggerations, judgemental
information and instead must present facts which have authoritative
basis
(6) had to contain all subjects with deserving representation
viii
(7) had to include historically neglected facts, based on their importance
(8) had to be corrected for the errors, as far as possible.
At every stage of revision, we were cautious that social science textbooks

have to make our students conscientious citizens who will have love, pride
about our nation, not create a community that has negligence and repulsion
for a few castes, communities, languages and religions of this nation.
The ‘best textbook’ is an ideal state. Our intention is to walk towards such
an ideal state. However, to create such a thing in exact sense is not possible.
With this humbleness, we have completed re-reviewing the textbooks and
present you the revised version. This is only a review, not a comprehensive
recreation. The intent and form of the already created textbooks (2014) remain
intact. The entire revision has happened following the state syllabus framework
which itself is based on the national curriculum framework. In addition, the
ED
intent of the Constitution has been upheld. I am grateful to all my colleagues
of the review committee who have finished this job in the best possible way.
H
IS
Also, thankful to all the officers and staff of the textbook association who co-
operated in the smooth conducting of the committee’s functions. This revision,
BL
EP S
R TB
we believe, will reflect the intent of the new National Education Policy and also
U
become the starting point for the comprehensive revision of textbooks to come.
BE @K
TO
Veeranna S. Jatti Rohith Chakrathirtha

Managing Director Chairman
T
Karnataka Textbook Society (R) Karnataka textbooks review committee

O
Bengaluru.
N
ix
Text Book Revision Committee
CHAIRPERSON
Sri Rohith Chakrathirtha, Member, Kannada Development Authority,
Vidhana Soudha, Bengaluru.
MEMBERS
Dr. Rajaram Hegde, Chairman (Retd.), Department of History & Archaeology,
Kuvempu University, Shivamogga.
Dr. N. Sathya Prakash, Retd. Head Master, VVS High school, Bengaluru.
Sri Ranganath, Principal, Rastrothana Vidyakendra, Hagari Bommanahalli,
Ballary Dist.
ED
Sri B.K. Vasuki, Teacher, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan’s BBMP Public School,
Bengaluru.
H
Dr. Anantha Krishna Bhat, Kodiyalaguttu, Dwaraka, Kodiyal Bail, 2nd Cross,
IS
Mangaluru. BL
EP S
Dr. Vithal Potdar, Senior Research Associate, The Mythic Society, Bengaluru.
R TB
U
Sri K.R. Manjunath, Asst. Teacher, National High School, Bengaluru.

BE @K
Smt P. Radha, Senior Asst. Director, DSERT, Banashankari 3rd stage,

Bengaluru.
Sri Sandeep Kumara P.L., GPT, GMPS Siddanahosahalli, Bengaluru North-1.
TO
ADVISORS
Sri Veeranna S. Jatti, Managing Director, Karnataka Text Book Society,
T
O
Bengaluru.
N
Sri Kodandaramaiah. N, Deputy Director, Karnataka Text Book Society,

Bengaluru.
Smt. N.S. Sowmya, Senior Asst. Director, Karnataka Text Book Society,
Bengaluru.
x
ªÀÄÄ£ÀÄßr
2023-24£ÉÃ ¸Á°£À°è eÁjAiÀÄ°ègÀÄªÀ MAzÀjAzÀ ºÀvÀÛ£ÉÃ vÀgÀUÀwAiÀÄ ªÀgÉV£À PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁμÁ
¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ DgÀjAzÀ ºÀvÀÛ£ÉÃ vÀgÀUÀwAiÀÄªÀgÉV£À ¸ÀªÀiÁd «eÁÕ£À ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¥ÀjμÀÌj¸ÀÄªÀÅzÀPÁÌV
«μÀAiÀÄ vÀdÕgÀÄ, ¥ÁæxÀ«ÄPÀ ºÁUÀÆ ¥ËæqsÀ±Á¯Á ²PÀëPÀgÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ G£ÀßvÀ ²PÀët ¸ÀA¸ÉÜUÀ¼À°è ¨ÉÆÃ¢ü¸ÀÄªÀªÀgÀÄ
¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÁVzÀÝ LzÀÄ ¸À«ÄwUÀ¼À£ÀÄß gÀa¹, ¸ÀPÁðgÀªÀÅ DzÉÃ±ÀªÀ£ÀÄß ºÉÆgÀr¹vÀÄ. F ¸À«ÄwUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄÆgÀÄ
wAUÀ½UÀÆ ºÉZÀÄÑ PÁ® ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉAiÀÄ PÁAiÀÄðªÀ£ÀÄß £ÉgÀªÉÃj¹zÉ. ¥Àæ¸ÀÄÛvÀ ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉUÉ ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀAvÉ F
PÉ¼ÀV£À CA±ÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¸ÀàμÀÖ¥Àr¸À®Ä §AiÀÄ¸ÀÄvÉÛÃªÉ.
1. gÁ¶ÖæÃAiÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ gÁdå ¥ÀoÀåPÀæªÀÄ ZËPÀlÄÖUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀA«zsÁ£ÀzÀ D±ÀAiÀÄUÀ½UÉ ªÀåwjPÀÛªÁUÀzÀAvÉ,
¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉUÉ M¼À¥ÀlÖ ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀUÀ¼À ªÀÄÆ® ¸ÀégÀÆ¥À §zÀ¯ÁUÀzÀAvÉ, «zÁåyðUÀ¼À ±ÉÊPÀëtÂPÀ »vÁ¸ÀQÛAiÀÄ£ÀßμÉÖÃ
UÀªÀÄ£ÀzÀ°èj¹PÉÆAqÀÄ F ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß £ÀqÉ¸À¯ÁVzÉ.
2. ¥Àæ¸ÀÄÛvÀ ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀt ¸À«ÄwUÉ ¥ÀÇªÀðzÀ°èAiÉÄÃ ±Á¯Á ²PÀët E¯ÁSÉAiÀÄÄ ºÉÆgÀr¹zÀÝ ``2023-24£ÉÃ
¸Á°£À ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀUÀ¼À wzÉÆÝÃ¯É’’ AiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¸À«ÄwAiÀÄÄ C¼ÀªÀr¹PÉÆArzÉ.
3. ««zsÀ ¸ÀAWÀl£ÉUÀ¼ÀÄ, ªÀåQÛUÀ¼ÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ E¯ÁSÉUÀ¼ÀÄ ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀzÀ°è ¤¢ðμÀÖ «μÀAiÀiÁA±ÀªÀ£ÀÄß
ED
C¼ÀªÀr¸ÀÄªÀ/PÉÊ©qÀÄªÀ/¥ÀjμÀÌj¸ÀÄªÀ PÀÄjvÀÄ ªÀiÁrzÀ J¯Áè ªÀÄ£À«UÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¥Àj²Ã°¹ ¸ÀÆPÀÛªÉ¤¹zÀ
¸À®ºÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß C¼ÀªÀr¹PÉÆ¼Àî¯ÁVzÉ.
H
4. ««zsÀ ªÀåQÛUÀ¼ÀÄ, ¸ÀAWÀl£ÉUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÀéAiÀÄA ¥ÉæÃgÀuÉ¬ÄAzÀ C¥ÁgÀ ±ÀæªÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ ªÀåªÀzsÁ£À¢AzÀ
IS
¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀUÀ¼À°ègÀÄªÀ «¸ÀAUÀw, D±ÀAiÀÄ zÉÆÃμÀ ºÁUÀÆ C¥ÀPÀ®à£ÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß eÁ®vÁtUÀ¼À°è ºÁUÀÆ
BL
EP S
¥ÀwæPÉUÀ¼À°è ªÁå¥ÀPÀªÁV ZÀað¹zÀÝªÀÅ. F §ºÀÄvÉÃPÀ J¯Áè §gÀºÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß UÀªÀÄ¤¹, ZÀað¹ ¸ÀÆPÀÛ
R TB
¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ªÀiÁqÀ¯ÁVzÉ.
U
BE @K
5. ¤¢ðμÀÖ ¥ÀoÀåUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¨ÉÆÃ¢ü¸ÀÄªÀ ²PÀëPÀjAzÀ ¥ÀqÉzÀÄPÉÆAqÀ C©ü¥ÁæAiÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÀºÀ ¥Àæ¸ÀÄÛvÀ ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉAiÀÄ°è

C¥ÁgÀ £ÉgÀªÀÅ ¤ÃrªÉ.
«μÀAiÀiÁA±ÀUÀ½UÉ ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀ ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉAiÉÆA¢UÉ ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀUÀ¼À°ègÀÄªÀ J¯Áè §UÉAiÀÄ CAQ
CA±ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ, ªÀiÁ»wUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ £ÀPÉëUÀ¼À£ÀÄß F ¥ÀjPÀëgÀuÉAiÀÄ ºÉÆwÛUÉ ®¨sÀå«gÀÄªÀ ªÀiÁ»wUÀ¼À£ÀÄß M¼ÀUÉÆ¼ÀÄîªÀAvÉ
£À«ÃPÀj¸À¯ÁVzÉ.
TO
ªÀÄPÀÌ¼À ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀzÀ ºÉÆgÉ PÀrªÉÄ ªÀiÁqÀÄªÀ ¤nÖ£À°è J¯Áè ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¥Àæ¸ÀÄÛvÀ ±ÉÊPÀëtÂPÀ
ªÀμÀð¢AzÀ JgÀqÀÄ ¸ÀA¥ÀÅlUÀ¼ÁV «¨sÁV¸ÀÄªÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ ¤tðAiÀÄPÉÌ C£ÀÄ¸ÁgÀªÁV, JgÀqÀÆ ¸ÀA¥ÀÅlUÀ¼À°è£À
T
PÀ°PÁA±ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ/¥ÁoÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÀgÀ¼ÀvÉ¬ÄAzÀ ¸ÀAQÃtðvÉAiÉÄqÉUÉ ¸ÁUÀÄªÀAvÉ ªÀåªÀ¹ÜvÀªÁV C¼ÀªÀr¸À¯ÁVzÉ.

O
N
F ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÁ PÁAiÀÄðzÀ°è vÀªÀÄä£ÀÄß vÉÆqÀV¹PÉÆAqÀÄ PÀÄè¥ÀÛªÁV PÁAiÀÄð¤ªÀð»¹zÀ LzÀÆ ¸À«ÄwUÀ¼À

CzsÀåPÀëgÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß CzÀgÀ®Æè ¥ÀoÀå ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ vÀªÀÄä C£ÀÄ¨sÀªÀªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉAiÀÄ°è zsÁgÉAiÉÄgÉzÀ
¥ÁæxÀ«ÄPÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ËæqsÀ±Á¯Á ²PÀëPÀgÀ£ÀÄß PÀÈvÀdÕvÉ¬ÄAzÀ £É£ÉAiÀÄÄvÉÛÃªÉ. ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀUÀ¼À PÀÄjvÀÄ vÀÄA§ PÀ¼ÀPÀ½¬ÄAzÀ
UÀA©üÃgÀ CzsÀåAiÀÄ£À £ÀqÉ¹ §gÀºÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¥ÀæPÀn¹zÀ ªÀåQÛUÀ¼ÀÄ, ¸ÀAWÀl£ÉUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀiÁrzÀ ±ÉÆÃzsÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ¥Àæ¸ÀÄÛvÀ
¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉAiÀÄ PÁAiÀÄðPÉÌ vÀÄA¨Á ¸ÀºÁAiÀÄ ªÀiÁrªÉ. CAvÀºÀ J¯Áè ¸ÀàAzÀ£ÉUÀ½UÀÆ £ÁªÀÅ PÀÈvÀdÕgÁVzÉÝÃªÉ.
¸À«ÄwUÀ¼À PÉ®¸À ¸ÀÄUÀªÀÄªÁV £ÀqÉAiÀÄÄªÀAvÉ ªÀåªÀ¸ÉÜ ªÀiÁrzÀ E¯ÁSÁ C¢üPÁjUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀ
¸ÀAWÀzÀ J¯Áè C¢üPÁjUÀ½UÀÆ, ¹§âA¢UÀ½UÀÆ ªÀAzÀ£ÉUÀ¼ÀÄ.
J£ï. ªÀÄAdÄ²æÃ . ¨sÁD¸ÉÃ qÁ JA. f. ºÉUÀqÉ

ªÀåªÀ¸ÁÜ¥ÀPÀ ¤zÉÃð±ÀPÀgÀÄ ªÀÄÄRå ¸ÀAAiÉÆÃdPÀgÀÄ
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀ ¸ÀAWÀ(j), ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀÅ¸ÀÛPÀ ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÁ ¸À«Äw
¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ
xi
Textbook Revision Committee 2024
CHIEF CO-ORDINATOR
Sri Manjunath G Hegde, ‘Ahalya’, Chitrigi, Kumta, Uttara Kannada Dist.
CHAIRPERSON
Dr. Aswathanarayana, Prof. of History (Rtd.), Bangalore University, Bengaluru.
MEMBERS
Dr. Krishna Hombal, Prof. and Chairman Dos in Political Science and DoS in Public
Administration, University of Mysore, Manasa Gangotri, Mysore.
Dr. B. Shekhar, Prof. of Commerce, Chairman and Dean Dept of Studies and Researcher
in Commerce, Tumkur University, Tumkur.
Dr. A.B. Vaggar, Associate Professor, S.I.S.Y. Government First Grade College & P.G.
Studies Center, Ramdurg, Belagavi Dist.
Dr. Srinivas Yadavani, Associate Professor, Department of Geography, Government first
grade college, Kengeri, Bengaluru.
Dr. Kiran M. Gajanur, Assistant Professor, Department of Public Administration, Central
ED
University of Karnataka, Kalaburgi. (Chairperson for Class 6 & 7 Textbook Revision Committee)
Dr. Gangadhara .P.S, Assistant Professor, Dept of Political Science, P.G. Centre. Govt Arts
H
College, Chitradurga Dist.
IS
Sri Kaginakar .P.M, Karnataka Public School, Chikkanahalli, Sira - TQ, Madhugiri
Educational Dist. BL
EP S
Smt. Tabassum Fathima, Government Urdu High School, Kanakapura Town, Ramangara
R TB
U
Dist.
Smt. Shahina Allapur, Government High School, Baradi Mandigere, Nelaamangala Taluk,
BE @K
Bangalore Rural Dist.

Smt. Mohan Kumari .S, GPT, Govt. Model Primary School, Karithimmanahalli, South-2,
Bengaluru.
RESOURCE TEACHERS
Sri Sudhakarareddy .H, Asst. Teacher, GHS, Kadalaveni, Gauribidanur Taluk,
TO
Chikkaballapur Dist.
Smt. Jayashree Hegde, Asst. Teacher, GHS, Doddabanahalli, South - 4, Bengaluru.
T
Smt. Kavitha .N, Asst. Teacher, GHS, Hombegowda Nagar, South - 3, Bengaluru.
O
TRANSLATORS
N
Sri Srinivasa Prasad .M, Asst. Teacher, St. Joseph’s Indian High School, North-3,
Bengaluru.
Smt. Kavitha .P, Asst. Teacher, Vidya Nagar, North - 4, Bengaluru.
Sri K.R. Manjunath, Rtd. Teacher, The National High School, Basavanagudi, Bengaluru.
Smt. Tabassum Fathima, Government Urdu High School, Kanakapura Town, Ramangara Dist.
Sri Kaginakar .P.M, Karnataka Public School, Chikkanahalli, Sira-TQ, Madhugiri Educational Dist.
Sri Assad ulla baig, Asst. Teacher, GUHS, Hosuru, Channagiri Taluk, Davangere Dist.
ADVISORS
Manjushree .N, IAS, Managing Director, Karnataka Textbook Society, Bengaluru.
Sri Gangannaswamy .H.G, Deputy Director, Karnataka Textbook Society, Bengaluru.
Smt N.S. Sowmya, Senior Asst. Director, Karnataka Textbook Society, Bengaluru.
xii
Content
Chapter
Chapters Page.No
No.
HISTORY
1 THE ADVENT OF EUROPEANS TO INDIA 1
2 THE EXTENSION OF THE BRITISH RULE 13
3 THE IMPACT OF THE BRITISH RULE IN INDIA 19

4 OPPOSITION TO BRITISH RULE IN KARNATAKA AND 33
WODEYARS OF MYSORE
ED
5 SOCIAL AND RELIGIOUS REFORM MOVEMENTS 49
H
POLITICAL SCIENCE
IS
BL
EP S
6 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION - AN INTRODUCTION 58
R TB
U
7 CHALLENGES OF INDIA AND THEIR REMEDIES 68
BE @K
SOCIOLOGY
8 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 79
9 WORK AND ECONOMIC LIFE 83

TO
GEOGRAPHY
10 INDIA - GEOGRAPHICAL POSITION AND
T
O
PHYSICAL FEATURES 89
N
11 INDIA - SEASONS 98
12 INDIA - SOILS 102
13 INDIA - FOREST RESOURCES 106
14 INDIA - WATER RESOURCES 112
ECONOMICS
15 ECONOMY AND GOVERNMENT 120
BUSINESS STUDIES
16 BANK TRANSACTIONS 130
xiii
History
Chapter - 1
THE ADVENT OF EUROPEANS TO INDIA
We learn the following in this chapter.

• The trade and commerce relationship India had with Europeans
• The arrival of Europeans to India for trade
• The Carnatic wars in the backdrop of European political
developments
• Battle of Plassey, Battle of Buxar and Dual-Government system
• The British policy of aggression
ED
There were trade and commerce relations between India and Europe
H
since ancient times. There was great demand for Indian pepper, cumin,
IS
cinnamon, cardamom, ginger and many other spices in Europe. The trade
BL
EP S
R TB
relations between India, Europe and other Asian countries continued even
U
during the Middle Ages. The Arab merchants carried Asian merchandise
BE @K
to Constantinople of Eastern Roman (Byzantium) Empire. The Italian

merchants would buy these goods and then sell them in European
countries. Constantinople was thus the center of international trade
TO
and was considered as the ‘Gateway of European Trade’. While Arab

merchants had gained monopoly over the trade in Asian countries, Italian
T
traders had gained monopoly over trade in Europe. The merchandise from
O
N
Asia brought good profits to Italian merchants.

The fall of Constantinople: The trade and commerce between Asia
and Europe was carried on place through the city of Constantinople.
In 1453, the Ottoman Turks captured the city of Constantinople. As a
result, all the trade routes connecting the city of Constantinople came
under the control of Turks. The Turks started levying too many taxes
on the goods passing through these routes. As a result, trade became
unprofitable. Meanwhile, Spain, Portugal and other European rulers
were attempting to break the monopoly of Italian traders. They started
1
encouraging adventurous sailors to find a new sea route to India. The
invention of compass, astrolabe, and gunpowder provided further impetus
to this venture.
A new sea route to India: Vasco da Gama, a Portuguese sailor left
Lisbon and reached Kappad near Calicut on the West coast of India in
1498. Thus he was successful in discovering a new sea route to India.
This route continued to be the route of trade between India and Europe
for many years. the Portuguese were thus the first to re-establish trade
between India and Europe.
Know this :
In 1869, a huge canal called Suez Canal. was built by digging the
land for the easy movement of ships in Egypt to connect the Red Sea and
ED
the Mediterranean Sea. Until the building of Suez Canal, the sea route
H
discovered by Vasco da Gama was the route used for trade between
IS
India and Europe. The ships had to round the Cape of Good Hope, the
BL
EP S
southernmost tip of Africa.
R TB
U
European Trade Companies
BE @K
With the success of the Portuguese, the Dutch, French and the
English of Europe arrived in India for trade. This development not only
changed the history of colonised India, but also changed the history of
TO
European countries.
The Portuguese : The Portuguese were the first to arrive in India for
T
O
trade and were also the last to leave India by the sea route. After Vasco
N
da Gama, Francisco de Almeida arrived in India as the Viceroy of the

Portuguese. He implemented ‘Blue Water Policy’ in order to establish
the supremacy over the sea instead of supremacy over land. Alfonso de
Albuquerque, who came after Almeida, is considered as the real founder
of Portuguese power in India. He waged a battle against the Sultan of
Bijapur in 1510 and won Goa. Goa became the administrative centre
of the Portuguese administration in India. The Portuguese had absolute
monopoly over trade with India for a century but their power declined
with the arrival of English and French in India.
2
Dakha(B)
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
Golconda (F
R TB
)
U
BE @K
Basruru(D)
TO
KEY
T
P - Portuguese
O
D - Dutch
N
B - British
F - French
The Dutch : The Dutch belongs to Holland or Netherlands. In order to

trade in the Eastern nations, they established Dutch East Indian Company
in 1602 and entered India, Java, Sumatra and Indonesia. In India, they
established factories at Surat, Broach,Cambay, Kochin, Nagapatnam,
Machalipatnam and Chinsore.
3
Marthanda Varma : In the politics of Kerala, the one who lived in the most
important phase and rescued an important principality from the foreigners
was Raja Marthanda Varma of Wynad. He ruled from 1729 to 1758 and
saved from the surrounding rulers as well as foreigners. He made this
as a great Kingdom among all. He stood against the foreigners who were
greedy of pepper and brought many reforms in administration. He shifted
his capital from Padmanabhapura to Thiruvananthapura and made his
Kingdom as 'world Travancore province'.
By this time, the Dutch who were trying to monopolise was defeated by
Marthanda Varma. He controlled the surrounding areas and made them to
oppose the Dutch. The Dutch with help of the provinces like Kayamkulam,
Kochi, Purakkad and Vadakunkur attacked on travancore, Raja Marthanda
defeated them and captured Nedumangada and Kottarakara trading
ED
centres.
H
In 1741 the Dutch declared war on Travancore with Kottarakara
IS
province in the forefront. But Marthanda Varma's army strongly sent it
BL
EP S
back. The Dutch suffered huge losses.

R TB
U
Cochin was recognised as a centre of spice trade during the period

BE @K
of Marthanda Varma Travancore became the richest province. Finally on

15th August 1753 a treaty was signed and the Dutch forces surrendered
its power to the Travancore province. This is how the period of Marthanda
TO
Varma has been recognised as an important phase in the history of India.

The rise of the English in India and the acquisition of the islands of
T
O
South-East Asia by the Dutch were the factors for the decline of the Dutch
N
power in India.
Know this:
The Warehouses were places for storing merchandise. Huge walls
were built around these warehouses to provide protection. Warehouses
were also called factories.
The English : On 31st December 1600, Queen Elizabeth issued a

royal charter authorizing the East India Company to trade with Eastern
countries for fifteen years. The company started the trade formally in 1613.
The Mughal Emperor Jahangir issued a royal permission to English to
4
establish their first warehouse or factory at Surat. In 1617, Sir Thomas Roe
arrived at the court of Jahangir as the royal ambassador from the court
of James I. He sought permission from Jahangir to establish factories in
other places of Mughal Empire. The English established factories at Agra,
Ahmedabad and Broach. In 1639, the English took Madras from the King
of Chandragiri and established a strong fort named St. George Fort. Later,
Charles II, the Prince of England, gave Bombay on an annual rent of ten
pounds to East India Company in 1668. In 1690, the English purchased
three villages namely Sutanauti, Calcutta and Govindapura from the
governor of Bengal on the banks of Hooghly River and built Fort William.
The city of Calcutta grew around this fort. By the end of 17th century, the
English had established Bombay, Madras and Calcutta as the centers of
their Presidencies. By the later part of 18th century, the English made
Calcutta their capital city. They implemented their own civil and criminal
ED
procedure codes in the areas that were under their control.
H
The French : The French East India Company started as a
IS
government owned company in 1664. It started its first factory at Surat
BL
EP S
R TB
in the year 1668. Later they established its factories in Machalipatnam,

U
Chandranagore, Mahe, Karaikal, Cassimbazar, Balasore. In 1674, the

BE @K
French took Valikondapuram from a local Muslim official and developed

it as a major trade center. Later it came to be known as Puduchery or
Pondichery. This became the capital of the French till they left India.
Dupleix, who arrived (1746) in Pondicherry as the Governor General of
TO
the French had the high ambitions of establishing the French as a major
T
power in South India. This ambition led to the Carnatic wars with the
O
English.
N
The Competition between the English and the French

The Portuguese and the Dutch had withdrawn from India unable
to withstand the competition from French and English by the middle
of 18th century. Finally, the French and the English resorted to show
of strength in order to establish their political supremacy over India.
Meanwhile, political instability arose in the regions of Hyderabad and
Carnatic (Eastern part of Tamil Nadu) and both the English and French
tried to exploit the situation in their favour. This led to three Carnatic
Wars.
5
Know this :
Hyderabad Kingdom was established in 1724 by Asaf Jha. His
feudatory Dost Ali who was ruling Carnatic region was not loyal to him.
The Marathas killed Dost Ali in 1740 and looted Carnatic and imprisoned
his son-in-law Chandasaheb in Satara. Asaf Jha named Anwaruddin as
the Nawab of Carnatic.
The First Carnatic War (1746-48) :

On the request of Dupleix, La Bourdonnais, a French military leader
from Mauritius invaded Madras and captured it from the English. This
forced the helpless British to request the help of Anwaruddin, the Nawab
of Carnatic. The army sent by Anwaruddin failed to defeat the French
at Madras. Finally, La Bourdonnais took money from the English and
ED
returned Madras and went back to Mauritius. This enraged Dupleix and
H
he attempted to take Madras but failed. Finally, the war ended with a
IS
treaty in Europe between France and England called ‘Treaty of Aix-la-
BL
EP S
Chapelle’.
R TB
U
BE @K
Know this :
The Nizam of Hyderabad, Asaf Jha died in 1748. A tussle started between
his son Nasir Jung and his daughter’s son Muzaffar Jung for the throne.
On the other hand, a fight had broken out between Chandasaheb(who
TO
was released from the Maratha prison) and Anwaruddin in Carnatic.

The French extended their support to Muzaffar Jung in Hyderbad and
T
Chandasaheb in Carnatic. The English extended their support to Nasir

O
N
Jung and Anwaruddin.

In 1749, the combined forces of French, Chandasaheb and Muzaffar
Jung defeated Anwaruddin and killed him in the battle of Ambur. As a
result Chandsaheb became the ruler of Carnatic. Mahammad Ali, son of
Anwaruddin, stayed at Tiruchanapalli with the help of the English. In
Hyderabad, Muzaffar Jung became the Nizam by killing Nasir Jung with
the help of French and Chandasaheb. He was killed after a few days.
The French made Salabath Jung, another son of Asaf Jha as the Nizam of
Hyderabad.
6
The Second Carnatic War (1749-1754) :
In the changed circumstances, French made Salabath Jung,
another son of Asaf Jha as the Nizam of Hyderabad. An officer named
Bussy was appointed in Hyderabad for his protection by the French.
In the Carnatic, Chandasaheb had become the Nawab with the help of
French. Robert Clive of East India Company attacked Arcot, the capital
city of Carnatic and defeated Chandsaheb. Chandsaheb was imprisoned
and later he was killed in the war. In the place of Chandsaheb, the
English named Mohammad Ali, the son of Anwaruddin, as the Nawab of
Carnatic. The second Carnatic war ended with the Treaty of Pondicherry.
The French recalled Dupleix. This war brought laurels to the English,
while the French suffered a political setback.
The Third Carnatic War (1756-1763) :
Count de Lally of the French attempted to besiege the fort
ED
Wandiwash in 1760. In this decisive battle, Sir Eyre Coote of the English
H
army defeated the French and imprisoned Bussy. Lally escaped and hid
IS
in Pondicherry. Finally, Eyre Coote attacked Pondicherry and Lally had
BL
to surrender unconditionally in 1761.
EP S
R TB
The French lost all their bases in India due to the Carnatic wars.
U
In spite of this, as per the ‘Treaty of Paris’ signed in 1763, Pondicherry

BE @K
was returned to French. With these developments, the French lost their
importance in India. In this way, the English by defeating all their rivals,
started consolidating their power in Southern India.
TO
Know this:
Robert Clive : Robert Clive, who laid the firm foundation of the British
T
O
power in India, had joined the East India Company as clerk. He played
N
a decisive role in the Carnatic wars, particularly in the siege of Arcot

and played a prominent role in the British victory. He was successful in
establishing the British rule over South India and was instrumental in
Bengal victory also. After the Battle of Plassey in 1757, he gained control
over the Nawab of Bengal also. Clive amassed immense wealth in all
these ventures and helped the East India Company to earn more profit.
Clive returned to England with immense wealth and became a Member of
Parliament. With the return of Clive to England, the East India Company
started facing losses in its business. Even though there were many
allegations against Clive, the British government had to resend Clive to
India to save the company and also save the face of the country.
7
The British won the battle of Buxar and earned back its respect. Clive was
successful in securing the Diwani rights for the British over Bengal, Bihar
and Odisha regions. This brought more wealth to Robert Clive and to East
India Company as well. In 1767 Robert Clive returned to England.
Dupleix:
Dupleix was named the Governor General of French regions in India in
1742. He dreamt of achieving French hegemony over India and entered
into treaties with the local kings. Hyder Ali was also trained in the army
of locals raised by Dupleix. The British considered Dupleix as a formidable
challenge to them. Hence, we notice clashes between the French and the
British to gain supremacy over the Carnatic and Deccan Plateau. Dupleix
played an important role in the First Carnatic War in 1746. The rivalry
between the French and the British continued till 1754. Later, the French
government recalled Dupleix as it wanted peace.
ED
H
The British Rule in India
IS
After gaining political control over South India, the British tried
BL
EP S
to gain control over the rich Bengal province in the later part of 18th
R TB
U
century. The Bengal province had achieved tremendous growth in the
BE @K
areas of agriculture, commerce and industry. The East India Company

was making considerable profits from this province. The Dastaks (licence)
issued by the Mughal ruler Faruk Siar were the main reasons for this.
But, these Dastaks that were limited to the company transactions were
TO
misused by the individual officers of the company too. This resulted in

T
huge loss to the Bengal government. Hence, all Nawabs from Murshid Ali
O
Khan to Ali Wardhikhan opposed such misuse. This led to confrontation

N
between the Nawabs and the Company. This resulted in two crucial wars
which charted a decisive course to Indian history. Plassey and Buxar
were those two wars.
Know this:
Dastak - A license that could ensure anyone to import and export without
paying any tax and transport goods anywhere.
Battle of Plassey (1757): Ali Wardi Khan, the Nawab of Bengal died
in 1756. His grandson Siraj-ud-Daula came to the throne. The Battle of
8
Plassey took place between the young Nawab Siraj ud-Daulah and the
British in 1757.
Reasons:
1. Misuse of Dastaks: Siraj ud-Daulah was furious that the Dastaks
were misused by the officials of the company causing losses to the
government treasury.
2. Mending of the fort without permission : The British repaired
the fort of Calcutta and placed canons in them. This further angered
Siraj-ud-Daula and he ordered the removal of the canons from the fort.
The British refused to do so, angering the Nawab further.
3. Black Room Tragedy : Siraj ud-Daulah conquered Fort William
easily and imprisoned some of the British. He imprisoned 146 Englishmen
ED
in a small room in the fort, of which 123 died. This is called the Black
hole Tragedy. This enraged Robert Clive and arrived in Bengal with a
H
IS
huge army.
BL
EP S
Robert Clive attracted rich locals like Manikchand, Nemichand, Jagath

R TB
U
Seth banker of Bengal and others towards him. He was successful in
BE @K
convincing Mir Jaffar, the military head of Siraj-ud-Daula to stay neutral

in the battle by offering him the post of Nawab of Bengal. Encouraged by
these developments, Robert Clive declared a war against Siraj-ud-Daula
on June 23rd, 1757. Everything went according to the plan of Clive.
TO
Siraj-ud-Daula who tried to escape from the battlefield, was captured

T
and killed.
O
N
Outcomes:
1. This war brought out the immorality, lack of unity among the
Indians and the greed of Indian businessmen.
2. Mir Jaffar became the Nawab of Bengal.
3. The company gained exclusive rights to trade in Bengal.
4. Mir Jaffar had to pay Rupees seventeen crores and seventy
lakhs as war indemnity to the British Company for the attack
on the Fort William by Siraj-ud-Daulah.
9
In a nutshell, Mir Jaffar became a victim of the company and its
employees. Eventhough the treasury went bankrupt due to this greedy
nature, the greediness of the company and its officials was never satisfied.
The British projected Mir Jaffar as an inefficient Nawab and brought his
son-in-law Mir Qasim as the new Nawab.
Battle of Buxar (1764) : Mir Qasim was an efficient administrator. In
the beginning he remained loyal to the company. He paid two lakh pounds
to the company and gave away a few places to it. Shortly afterwards,
he declared himself an independent King. After verifying the misuse
of Dastaks, he declared all business was dutyfree in Bengal. Indians
competed against the British in all spheres of business. As a result, the
British trade suffered considerably. This was enough for the British to
ED
oppose the Nawab. They brought in Mir Jaffar again and dethroned Mir
H
Qasim. As Mir Qasim knew the cunningness of the British, he went for
IS
an organized war against them. He was supported by Indian merchants
BL
EP S
and artisans. Mir Qasim entered into agreements with the Mughal ruler
R TB
U
Shah Alam-II and Nawab of Awadh Shuj-ud-daula. The combined forces
BE @K
of Mir Qasim faced the British army led by Hector Munro at Buxar in
1764. Mir Qasim was defeated and ran away from the battlefield. Shah
Alam-II surrendered. The efforts of the combined forces to stop the British
TO
failed miserably.
Outcomes:
T
O
N
1. Shah Alam-II accorded the 'Diwani' rights over Bengal to the

British.
2. Shah Alam-II gave away all the rights over Bengal to the
British for an annual fee of Rupees 26 lakhs.
3. Shuj-ud-daula the Nawab of Awadh had to pay war indemnity
of Rupees 50 lakhs for waging a war against the company.
4. With the death of Mir Jaffar, the company paid pension to
his son and took over the entire administration of Bengal.
10
The battle of Buxar made the British the Know this:
real holders of power over Bihar, Bengal and
Diwani Right: The right to
Odisha provinces. Even Awadh remained collect land taxes
under their control. In 1765, Robert Clive
brought in ‘Dual-government in Bengal’. As per this, the British had the
right to collect land taxes, whereas the Nawab had power over
administrative issues like justice and others. In this way, the British
gained political control over India to protect their business interests.
Know this :
1600 – The English East India Company was established in England.
1602 – Dutch East India Company was established.
ED
1617 – The Mughal emperor Jahangir issued a royal charter allowing
the British to conduct trade in Surat, on the west coast and in
H
Hooghly on the east coast.
IS
1628 – Portuguese East India Company was established.
BL
EP S
R TB
1639 – The English established their first warehouse in Surat .

U
BE @K
1664 – The French East India Company was established.
Please note : B.C.E Refers to Before Common Era. Wherever B.C.E is not
mentioned it should be considered as C.E (Common Era).
TO
EXERCISES
T
O
N
I. Complete the following blanks with suitable answers:

1. In 1453, the Ottoman Turks occupied ……………………...….
2. The sea route between India and Europe was discovered by
…………………..
3. In 1741 Dutch declared war on ..........................
4. The capital of the French in India was …………………….
5. The war broke out between Siraj-ud-daula and Robert Clive in
1757 was ……………………
11
6. The Diwani rights over Bengal were handed over to the British
by …………….
7. The Dual government policy was implemented by ………………
in Bengal.
II. Discuss in groups and answer the following questions:

8. How did trade take place between India and Europe during
Middle Ages?
9. Discuss the causes that resulted in the discovery of a new sea
route to India.
10. List the Europeans who came to India for trade.
11. Explain how Marthanda varma checked the Dutch.
ED
12. Explain the Second Carnatic War.
H
13. Explain the causes and results of the battle of Plassey .
IS
BL
EP S
14. What were the results of the Battle of Buxar?
R TB
U
III. Activity:
BE @K
1. Collect information on the Presidency cities built by the British.

TO

T
O
N
12
Chapter - 2
THE EXTENSION OF THE

BRITISH RULE
• Anglo-Maratha wars
• The consolidation of British power
• No succession rights for adopted children
• Subsidiary alliance
• Anglo-Sikh wars
ED
Through the Carnatic wars, the English made the other European
H
countries not to challenge them in India. They gained complete political
IS
control over Bengal through Plassey and Buxar battles. By 1765, they had
BL
EP S
gained control over most of the eastern parts of India. Since the Marathas
R TB
U
and Mysore states were dominant in southern and western part of
BE @K
India, the hold of the British was restricted to Bengal and Bombay
regions only.
Hyder Ali and Tippu Sultan of Mysore along with Peshwas of Marathas
TO
were the only impediments in the path of expansion for the British. The
others were Sikhs in the North western region. Ranjit Singh who emerged
T
O
in the early part of nineteenth century was a formidable opponent to the

N
British. He was successful in organizing the Sikhs.

The British also waged repeated wars from mid eighteenth century to
mid nineteenth century to extend their empire in India. Apart from this,
they also annexed various kingdoms with cunning policies like ‘Subsidiary
Alliance’ and ‘Doctrine of Lapse’. During this period, the British waged
three Anglo-Maratha wars, four Anglo-Mysore wars and two Anglo-Sikh
wars. The Anglo-Mysore wars are discussed in unit 4, here we shall
understand the wars of the British against the Marathas and Sikhs.
13
Anglo-Maratha Wars
First Anglo-Maratha War (1775-1782) :
The Marathas installed Shah Alam-II back on the throne of Mughal
Empire in Delhi. Shah Alam-II was under the control of the British after
the defeat in Buxar war. Now, the Emperor gave Kara and Allahabad
to Marathas, which he had earlier given to the British. This resulted in
the enemity between the Marathas and the British. During this period,
the death of the Maratha strong man Madhav Rao Peshwa was a major
setback to Marathas. Though his brother Narayanrao came to power, he
was murdered by his uncle Raghobha (Ragunatha Rao). This resulted in
fighting for the Peshwa post. The Maratha federation brought Madhav
Rao II the minor son of Narayana Rao to the post of Peshwa. Upset with
this development, Raghobha approached the British for support. The
British thought of exploiting this situation in their favour. A long war
ED
was waged from 1775 to 1782 between the Marathas and the British.
H
Initially, though the Marathas gained upper hand, finally they lost it. The
IS
Maratha federation was unable to sustain the war with the British and
BL
EP S
finally entered into ‘Salbai Agreement’ and ended the war. Madhav Rao II
R TB
was named as the Peshwa.

U
BE @K
Lord Wellesley (1798-1805) and the Subsidiary Alliance:

The expansion of the British Empire took place at a faster pace after
the arrival of Lord Wellesley as the Governor General of India. By this
time, the powerful states of Marathas and Mysore had become weak and
TO
expansion was easier. Lord Wellesley followed three policies to expand

the British Empire in India. They were: Subsidiary Alliance, Waging war
T
against new states and administering the states directly that were under
O
the control of the British.

N
Subsidiary Alliance: Lord Wellesley brought this policy into effect in

1798 in order to bring the local kings under control. This was basically a
military protection agreement between the East India Company and the
Indian State.
The Conditions of Subsidiary Alliance:
1. The Indian Kings had to keep the British Army in their kingdom.
2. The state concerned had to bear the expenses of the army and
the wages of soldiers, or had to give certain revenue lands for the
same.
14
3. The King had to have a British Resident in his Court.
4. The King could not appoint any other European without the
permission of the British.
5. In order to enter into any agreement or pact with any Indian
state, the permission of the Governor General was mandatory.
6. In return for all these services, the Company would offer
protection to the state from any internal or external aggression.
The British could place the Indian states under their control through
this policy and the maintenance of the army became easy. The Indian
states were subjected to severe economic exploitation. Hyderabad was the
first state to enter into this agreement. Later, Mysore, Awadh, Tanjavur,
Maratha Kingdom, Berar, Arcot, Pune, Gwalior and other states entered
this agreement.
ED
Second Anglo-Maratha War (1803-1805) :
H
IS
The differences among the Maratha Chieftains was the reason for
BL
EP S
this war. There was enemity between Yeshwanth Rao of Holkar family
R TB
U
and Daulath Rao of Scindia family. Both wanted to establish control
BE @K
over the Peshwa Balaji Rao II. In 1802, the army of Holkar defeated
the armies of Scindia and the Peshwa. The Peshwa appealed to the
British for help.Lord Wellesley finally got an opportunity to meddle in
the affairs of the Marathas. The Peshwa entered the Subsidiary Alliance
TO
system by accepting the Treaty of Bassein. Other Maratha families like

Holkar, Gwalior and Bhonsle formed an alliance opposing this treaty.
T
O
Lord Wellesley defeated the armies of various Maratha families from 1803
N
to 1805. But, his battle-thirstiness increased the financial burden on

the Company. On being criticised for this policy, Lord Wellesley resigned
from his post and returned to England. This resulted in temporary peace
in the region.
Third Anglo-Maratha War (1817-1818) :
The Maratha families tried their best to protect their independence
and honour. Even the Peshwa attempted to free himself from the clutches
of the English. In 1817 the Peshwa attacked the British Residency in
Poona and burnt it down. Appa Saheb of Nagpur and Malhar Rao Holkar
15
rebelled against the British and were suppressed ruthlessly. Finally, in
1818 Peshwa Baji Rao II fought against the British at Koregaon and Ashti
and later surrendered to the British. The British abolished the Peshwa
post and granted a pension to Baji Rao II. They installed Pratapa Simha,
the descendant of Shivaji as the ruler of Satara, a mini state, and named
him as the traditional leader of Marathas and suppressed the Maratha
resistance.
The Consolidation of the British Power (1818-1857) :
The British completed their agenda of ruling the entire India from
1818 to 1857. They occupied major states like Punjab, Sindh, Awadh and
many other smaller states.
Anglo-Sikh Wars: A political anarchy broke out in the Punjab after
ED
the death of King Ranjith Singh in 1839. The British attempted to invade
H
Punjab violating the Treaty of friendship of 1809, they had with the
IS
erstwhile King. In December 1845, a war broke out between the British
BL
EP S
R TB
and the Punjab. Sensing the danger from an outside force; the Hindus,
U
BE @K
Sikhs and Muslims got together to defeat the British. Finally, they had to
accept defeat due to few traitor leaders. They signed a humiliating Lahore
Agreement in 1846. With this the British Resident became the de facto
ruler of the Punjab. Thus, Punjab became the dependent state of the
TO
British.
T
In 1848, the Sikh opposed the attempts by the British to rule Punjab
O
directly. The opposition was led by ‘Chattar Singh Attariwala’ in Lahore

N
and ‘Moolraj’ in Multan. Again the people of Punjab were defeated. Finally,
Lord Dalhousie merged the state of Punjab with the British Empire.
Dalhousie and the Doctrine of Lapse: Dalhousie who arrived in
India as the Governor General in 1848 made a final attempt to integrate
Indian princely states with the British Empire. He adopted the Doctrine of
Lapse policy whereby the adopted children of Indian Kings were refused
of their right to throne. According to this policy, “If any Indian ruler died
childless, his adopted male child had no legal right over the throne”.
Such a state was merged with the British Empire. Princely states like,
16
Satara, Nagpur, Sambalpur, Udaipur, Jhansi, Jaipur came under this
policy. As the Governor General knew the conditions of these states, he
used this policy as a political weapon.
With the severe implementation of this policy not only the princely
families, even ordinary people who were sympathetic to these kings
rebelled against the Company. Their love for their Kings and the sense of
loyalty fuelled this rebellion further. This finally resulted in the First war
of Indian Independence of 1857.
Know this:
Ranjit Singh: Ranjit Singh was born in 1780 as the son of Sardar
Maha Singh who headed Sukerchakia misl, one of the twelve Misls of
Punjab. He lost his father at the age of ten. When Shah Zaman of Kabul
ED
invaded India, Ranjith Singh offered his services to him. Shah Zaman
H
IS
made him the governor of Lahore along with the title ‘Raja’. He was
BL
EP S
nineteen years old then. Thereafterwords, he grew up in an amazing way.
R TB
U
He aimed at achieving absolute power over all the Sikhs. He took control
BE @K
over all the Sikh Misls to the West of Sutlej and established his own Sikh
Kingdom. He entered into a Treaty of Friendship with the British in 1809
at Amritsar. He organised his army on the lines of European armies. His
TO
army included Gorkhas, Biharis, Pathans and even Muslims apart from
Sikhs. He established a Foundry (Workshop) at Lahore to manufacture
T
O
Canons. The army of Ranjith Singh was the best among all the Indian
N
rulers of that time. He was secular in temperament and supported both

Hindu and Muslim spiritual leaders. People from all religions held high
offices in his regime. He was successful in protecting his state from
the British by not having any enmity with them. Meanwhile, even the
British wanted a strong Buffer State to protect them from invasions
from the North West of India. In a nutshell, Ranjit Singh founded an
independent Sikh state and ruled it as an independent king till his death
in 1839.
17
EXERCISES
I. Fill in the blanks with suitable answers :

1. At the end of First Anglo-Maratha war, ……………………
agreement was signed between the Marathas and the British.
2. The Subsidiary Alliance system was implemented by
……………………
3. The Governor General who integrated Punjab in to the British
empire was ……………………
4. The Doctrine of Lapse policy was implemented by ………………
II. Discuss in group and then answer the following :
ED
5. Explain the reasons for First Anglo-Maratha War.
H
6. What were the conditions under Subsidiary Alliance? Explain.
IS
7. Explain the Third Anglo-Maratha War.
BL
EP S
R TB
8. How did the Doctrine of Lapse support the expansion of British

U
BE @K
Empire in India?
9. Which were the states that came under the Doctrine of Lapse
policy?
TO
III. Activity :
T
O
1. Analyze the strategies adopted by the British to expand their

N
empire in India and write an essay on the same.

18
Chapter - 3
THE IMPACT OF THE BRITISH
RULE IN INDIA
• Administrative and Judicial System – Civil Services, Judicial
System, Police System, Military System
• Land Tax Policies – Permanent Zamindari System, Mahalwari
System, Ryotwari System
• Modern Education – Lord Macaulay, Wood’s Commission
(1854)
ED
• Acts during British Rule – Regulating Act, Pitts India Act,
Charter Acts
H
IS
The British East India Company fulfilled its commercial needs in
BL
EP S
the beginning as a Trade Company. On observing the fractured political
R TB
landscape of India wherein hundreds of ruling dynasties were competing

U
BE @K
with each other, the British thought of exploiting the situation to

further their political consolidation. They implemented ‘Divide and Rule’
policy among the Indian rulers and slowly dominated all the rulers and
subjugated them. In order to achieve complete domination on India, they
TO
employed ‘War’ and ‘Negotiation’ methods cleverly.

After getting India under control by employing various clever means,
T
O
the British thought of strengthening their hold over India permanently.

N
At that time, India was devoid of ‘One Nation Concept’ and was scattered
into various kingdoms. The British integrated the whole of India under
one administrative and political structure. Education, Judiciary, Land
taxes, Trade and Agriculture and various other areas of activities were
regulated under various laws and administrative system. This brought
in a new structure to India. While implementing all these measures, they
never forgot to protect their financial interests. The British East India
Company implemented various administrative experiments in order to
achieve a new order in India.
19
Administrative and Judicial System
Civil services : Lord Cornwallis introduced the administration
of civil services. The system of appointing employees for the purpose
of trade was done by the East India company from the beginning. The
company also provided permission for private workers to trade. By using
these opportunities employers made money became corrupt through
illegal means. So to control this, in 1773 the government of England
implemented Regulating Act in India. The aim of regulating act was as the
name suggests to enforce control.
In 1800, Lord Cornwallis opened Fort William College in Calcutta to
provide education for the benefit of people aspiring to join Civil Services.
But, this initiation did not find support from the directors of the East India
Company. As a result, all the appointments till 1853 were done by the
ED
directors. From 1853 onwards, the appointments for Civil Services were
done through Competitive Examinations. This did not benefit Indians
H
much. The British continued to suspect the efficiency of the Indians. Lord
IS
Cornwallis argued “All the natives of Hindustan are corrupt”. As a result,
BL
EP S
R TB
only lower grade jobs were given to Indians.

U
The Judicial System :

BE @K
A new Judicial System started finding roots when the British rule
began taking over from the Mughal rule. After the Battle of Buxar in 1764,
the Mughal Emperor Shah Alam handed over the ‘Diwani Rights’, the
TO
authority to collect land taxes to the British. With this, Dual-Administration

came into effect in Bengal region. This is also called as ‘Dual-Governance’.
T
Later on the British thought of bringing more centralized judicial system

O
in India. With the implementation of this system, the British overtook the
N
authority of the Mughal and established their supremacy in India. This

was attained by implementing new Judicial System in India.
According the administrative plan devised by Warren Hastings who
took over the administration as Governor in 1772, two types of courts
were needed to be established in each district: ‘A Diwani Adalat’ as a civil
court and 'Nijamat Adalat' as a criminal court. In these civil courts Hindus
were dispensed justice as per the Hindu scriptures and the Muslims as
per the Shariyat. Slowly, the British legal procedures were introduced
in the criminal courts. Civil courts came under the administration of
European officers. Though the criminal courts were under the control
20
of ‘Qajis’, they were functioning under the supervision of European
officers.
Police System : The Police were in charge of maintaining the internal
law and order situation. Lord Cornwallis implemented the efficient Police
System in India for the first time. He created the new post of Superintendent
of Police (SP). He divided a district into many ‘Stations’ in 1793 and put
every station under a ‘Kotwal’. Similarly he put every village under the
care of ‘Chowkidhar’. ‘Kotwal’ was made accountable for thefts, crimes
and other law violations at village level.
The severe drought of 1770 led to a weak law and order situation.
Hence, the entire police system was brought under the control of the
British Officers. The system of appointing British Magistrates started in
1781. The Police Officers were under the power of the Magistrates. The
Police system underwent continuous changes. In 1861, the Indian Police
ED
Act was implemented. This law became the base of good law and order
as well as administration. But, Indians were not appointed for the post
H
of officers. In 1902, the Police Commission allowed the appointment of
IS
suitable Indians qualified for the post of the police officers. In spite of all
BL
EP S
these measures, the discrimination against the Indians did not end.
R TB
U
Military System : The Military was the base of administration during
BE @K
the British Rule. The British appointed the Indians for the military and
took the entire India under their control with the help of the military. They
protected their supremacy by addressing the challenges posed by outside
as well as inside forces with the help of the military. The officers were again
TO
the British. The Indians could reach the rank of Subedar, the highest post
available to them. Most of the Indians were Coolie Soldiers. The British
T
Government accepted the recommendations of Peel Commission in 1857.

O
Based on these recommendations, the Military System was redesigned.

N
Land Taxes Policies

The East India Company had to pay four lakh pounds to the British
government annually. They kept Bengal province as their center. In order
to fulfill this commitment, the Company had to stabilize its financial
interests in a secured manner. Hence, it implemented many new land tax
policies.
Permanent Zamindar System : Lord Cornwallis implemented a new
land tax policy in Bengal during 1793 in order to generate steady revenue
annually. This was called Permanent Zamindari System. Under this
system, Zamindar became the land owner. The Zamindar was expected
21
to pay the agreed land taxes to the company on a set date every year. He
was free to collect any amount of land taxes from the farmers and could
retain the excess money collected. This benefitted the Zamindar more. If
the Zamindar was unable to collect land taxes due to floods and famine
and pay the Company, the ownership of the lands was taken away by the
Company. Both the Zamindar and the Company were benefitted by this
system, but the farmers were the grave sufferers. This system created
a new social group that aided the British. The farmers, the farming
labourers suffered due to irregular working opportunities in the farming
lands. They were exploited and had to lead a life of insecurity. This system
was extended to Bihar, Odissa, Andhra and Varanasi regions later.
Mahalwari System: The Company government entered into an
agreement at the level of ‘Mahals’ with regard to payment of land tax
in Uttar Pradesh, in many parts of Madhya Pradesh, Punjab and Delhi.
‘Mahal’ means taluk. R.M. Bird and James Thompson implemented this
ED
system. There were differences in the implementation of this system
H
from region to region. The big and small zamindars were part of this
IS
system. Since the company officials fixed more land tax than the expected
BL
EP S
production from the fields; many zamindars had to lose their ownership
R TB
of the lands. The marginal farmers and agricultural labourers who were
U
dependent on these zamindars also suffered due to this.

BE @K
Ryotwari System: The Ryotwari System was first implemented in

Baramahal region by Alexander Reed in 1792. This system was later
implemented in Madras and Mysore region by Thomas Munroe in 1801.
TO
Most of these regions had become part of British Empire by that time.
Under this system, both the farmer and the company were directly linked.
T
O
The tiller of the land was recognized as the owner of the land. The owner
N
had to pay fifty percent of produce as land tax to the company government.
The land tax had thirty years tenure. The tax could be reviewed after this
tenure.
Though the small farmers were given land ownership, they were
subjected to more suffering due to heavy land taxes. The officials took
punitive actions to collect land taxes. The farmers had to borrow from
the money lenders whenever the crops failed. They had to sell their lands
whenever they failed to repay the loans. Though the company government
claimed that the new system benefit the farmers, the irony was that more
farmers had to lose their lands due to its implementation. According to
22
Charles Metcalf, “the Indian farmers were born in debt, lived in debt and
died in debt due to the land tax policies of the British”.
The Impact of British Land Tax system :
1. A new class of Zamindars who exploited the farmers was created.
2. The farmers who were subjected to the exploitation of the
Zamindars, became landless slowly.
3. Land became a commodity. Loans could be raised by mortgaging
the lands.
4. Many Zamindars also had to mortgage their lands in order to pay
the land taxes.
5. The Agriculture sector became commercialized and had to grow
ED
raw materials needed by industries back in England.
H
6. The money lenders became strong.
IS
The Modern Education System
BL
EP S
R TB
U
The traditional education of Indians was in practice continuously. Certain
BE @K
changes occurred in the traditional education system during the rule of Muslim
kings during the middle ages. Later, new changes occurred during the British
rule during 18th century. New schools were started for the children of British
and Europeans living in India. Since these facilities were never extended to the
locals, it was of no use for them. Warren Hastings facilitated the expansion of the
TO
modern education in India. In 1781, he started ‘Calcutta Madrasa’. Jonathan

Duncan, a British citizen started Sanskrit College in Banaras in 1792. But,
T
it was Charles Grant who pressed for the expansion of British education in
O
India.
N
After the beginning of the 19th century, the English system of eduction
got its momentum. The expansion of the British Education India received
special support after the appointment of Lord William Bentinck in 1828
C.E as the Governor General of India. Bentinck appointed Macaulay
as the member of Governor General’s Executive Committee. Macaulay
was also appointed as the Chairperson of the Committee on Education.
The report on Education submitted by him in 1835 became the base
of modern education in India. His policy aimed at the “creation of a
new class of Indians who were Indian by body but British in intelligence,
23
opinion and taste”. The use of English medium in Indian learning system
started after 1830s.
Another important development included the establishment of
Universities in India. The Governor General Lord Dalhousie established
Universities in Calcutta, Bombay and Madras as per the suggestions
of Charles Wood’s Commission (1854). After this, the education was
universalized in India.
The Impact of British Education in India
1. Indians could develop modernity, secularism, democratic attitudes
and rationality along with Nationalistic ideals.
2. Impetus was received for the local literature and languages. This
facilitated unity in thinking process among the educated class.
ED
3. Periodicals started emerging. These scrutinized the policies and
H
IS
working of the government which in turn enabled the Indians to
BL
have critical opinions on various issues.
EP S
R TB
U
4. New social and religious reformation movements emerged.
BE @K
5. The thoughts of thinkers like J.S. Mill, Rousseau and Montesquieu

brought fresh thinking in the mind of educated youth of India.
6. The freedom struggles that were taking place across the globe
TO
influenced the Indians also.

7. Indians could understand and appreciate their rich tradition.
T
O
In this way, the new thinking and cultural perception that emerged
N
due to the British Education System created a new generation of Indians

with progressive attitudes.
Constitutional Development
Along with the British administration, problems also grew in India.
In order to alleviate the problems, reformation in administration became
important. And these reformations needed to address the demands of
Indians. The British attempted to create different rules in the form of law
and tried to implement them. These types of laws helped the evolution
of Constitution in India. We shall study some of the acts in this regard.
24
Laws Implemented during the rule of East India Company
(1773-1858)
Regulating Act - 1773 : After the implementation of Diwani Rights
in 1765, the greedy Company officials misused this provision and became
rich in a corrupt way. Corruption spiralled out. Edmond Burk, a member of
the British Parliament criticized the corruption in the East India Company.
He criticised the tax payment received by the British Government from
the East India Company as ‘Criminal Tax’. He was forced to criticize in
this manner, as the government remained silent to the fact of corruption
among the Company officials. Many Company officials had become super
rich and many in England feared that these people may upset the very
political setup of England. The Regulating Act was implemented in this
background in 1773.
ED
Main features of the Act
H
1. Before the implementation of the act, there were three presidencies
IS
under British rule. They are: Bengal, Madras and Bombay.
BL
EP S
All these three were independent administrative units. Under

R TB
U
Regulating Act, the Bengal Presidency gained control over the
BE @K
other two presidencies.

2. The Governor of Bengal became the Governor General of all the
three presidencies.
3. The Governor General was authorized to direct, exercise control
TO
and to supervise over the other two presidencies.

T
4. The Bombay and Madras presidencies could not declare war on

O
anyone or enter into peace agreements without prior approval

N
of the Governor General of Bengal Presidency and the Board of

Directors of the Company. Only during acute emergencies, they
were entitled to act independently.
5. According to this Act, Supreme Court was established in Calcutta.
In this central court, one Chief Justice and three ordinary judges
were officiating.
Like this, as the name of the Regulating Act suggests, the Act aimed
at regulating the Company affairs and its administration in India under
the control of the British Government.
25
Pitts India Act 1784 :
There were many inconsistencies in the Regulating Act of 1773.
In order to rectify them and also to clearly outline the powers of the
East India Company and the British Government, Pitts India Act was
implemented. The Government of England restricted the powers of the
East India Company.
Another important aspect of this Act was the establishment of the
‘Board of Controllers’ consisting of six Commissioners. The ‘Board of
Controllers’ replaced the ‘Board of Directors’.This Board had powers to
direct and control the issues related to Land taxes, Military and Civil areas.
The Board of Control came into existence in the place of Board of Directors.
This act declared that “the Indians have attained their paramount
power in the name of the British Empire only, but not on their own” and
ED
curtailed the Political Rights of Indians conclusively. It declared that the
H
areas under the possession of the East India Company were the integral
IS
part of the British Empire. Hence, the Government of England was the
BL
EP S
ultimate ruler of India.

R TB
U
Charter Acts
BE @K
The main aim of Charter Acts was to extend the license of the
East India Company. The Charter Acts of 1793, 1813, 1833 and 1853
were implemented to achieve this aim. As and when the Charters were
TO
implemented once in 20 years, the new rules and regulations found fit
by the British Government were included in these Acts. Among these, the
T
Charter Acts of 1813 and 1833 are important for Historic reasons.
O
N
Charter Act of 1813 :

1. This act licensed the East Company to stay for another twenty
years in India. Before the implementation of this act, a demand to
allow any interested person to carry out trade in India was there.
This act allowed this demand and authorized all interested persons
to carry out trade in India. With this act, the free trade era started
in India.
2. A new era of License and permit was started.
26
3. The Board of Directors was vested with the powers to appoint the
Governor General and the Commander-in-Chief.
4. The Churches were allowed to enter India officially. The Christian
Missionaries were directed to enrich the knowledge of Indians and
also enhance the moral and spiritual life of Indians. Many Christian
Missionaries started arriving in India after this act. The expansion
of Christianity and English Education started taking place.
Because of these developments, the Charter of Act of 1813 is a
historic act.
Charter Act 1833
This act aimed at improving the political situation in India. It also
licensed East India Company to remain in India for another 20 years. The
ED
main aspects of this act were :
H
IS
1. The Governor General of Bengal was named as the Governor
General of India.
BL
EP S
R TB
U
2. The Governor General was vested with powers to direct, control
BE @K
and supervising all trades in India.

3. The Central Government of Bengal had the final right to decide
on issues like war, peace and diplomatic relationship with the
princely states of India.
TO
4. The Governor General was mandated to put his difference of

T
opinion with Executive Committee members in writing whenever

O
N
he differed with the majority opinion.

5. The Act barred any discrimination based on religion, birth and
skin colour.
6. The Governor General was mandated to appoint a law professional
as member to his executive committee.
7. All British Companies were allowed to have trade relationship in
India.
27
The Charter Act of 1833 throws more light on the internal situation
of India and also the various political developments present in England
during 1830's.
British Government Acts (1858 - 1947)
‘The Sepoy Mutiny’ took place due to maladministration of the East India
Company and anti-Indian acts in 1857. As a result, the administration of
India was handed over to the British Queen from the East India Company.
During this period India Government Acts of 1858, 1861, 1892, 1909, 1919
and 1935 were implemented. Due to various political developments during
different periods makes these acts historically very important.
Indian Government Act 1858 :
ED
This act needs to be understood in the backdrop of civil and military
H
unrest that took place in 1857. India came under the direct rule of
IS
British government. The Queen of England, Victoria, announced that all
BL
EP S
round development of India would be ensured by the British government

R TB
U
on November 01, 1858. The following were the important features of this
BE @K
act :
1. The license of East India Company was cancelled and India was
brought under the direct administration of the Queen.
TO
2. The post of Governor General was changed into ‘Viceroy’. Lord

T
Canning became the first Viceroy of India.

O
N
3. A new post called ‘Secretary of State for India’ was created in the
British government. The secretary was part of British cabinet and
was responsible for the administration of India.
4. A Council of India was created in order to assist the secretary in
the administration. The council had fifteen members.
Indian Councils Act of 1861:

This is an important act that came into effect after the 1857. With
this act, Indians were allowed to participate in the process of creating
28
laws. In order to understand the aspirations of Indians, representation
was given to Indians. This is called as ‘Policy of Assertion’. The following
are the important features of this act :
1. Indians were nominated to the Council of Viceroy as non-official
members.
2. Viceroy was authorized to proclaim ‘Ordinances’ in case of
emergency.
Indian Councils Act of 1892 :
This act is the continuation of Indian Council Act of 1861. This act
of 1892 further extended the participation of Indians in the legislative
bodies. The critical view expressed by the Congress Organization towards
the British administration led to this expansion of Indian representation
ED
in the governance. The following were the important features of this act:
1. The number of additional members in the regional and central
H
legislative bodies was increased.
IS
BL
EP S
2. The legislative councils’ authority was increased further by allowing
R TB
discussion on budget related issues.

U
BE @K
3. Provision was made to question the government on public issues

by serving six days’ notice in advance.
Indian Councils Act of 1909 :
This act is also called as ‘Minto-Morley Reforms Act’. During the
TO
formulation and implementation of this act, Lord Minto was the viceroy of
T
India and Lord Morley was the Secretary of State for India. This Act was
O
used to divide and rule India. The following were the important features
N
of this Act:
1. The total number of central legislature members were increased
to 60 from 16.
2. The number of council members were also increased in the
provinces.
3. The members for the legislature was allowed through election for
the first time.
29
4. In order to provide separate representation for Muslims, ‘Separate
Electorate College’ was created.
Government of India Act of 1919 :
Since Indians took active part in the First World War, Lord Montague
who was the Secretary of state for India argued in favour of providing
more representations to Indians in the matter of administration. He was
in favour of allowing people’s participation in the formation of government
gradually. Lord Chelmsford, who was the Viceroy then declared various
reformative measures to the British Parliament on 20.08.1917. The Indian
Councils Act of 1919 was formulated by accepting this report. This act
is also called ‘Montague-chelmsford Reforms Act’. The following were the
important features of this act :
1. Act formulated Bi-Cameral legislative body. Lower House and
ED
Upper House were formed.
H
2. Dyarchy was allowed at provincial governments.
IS
3. A high commissioner was appointed for India.
BL
EP S
R TB
4. Promised to improve local self government.

U
BE @K
5. Provincial budget was separated from central budget.

6. ‘Separate Electoral College’ was extended for Muslims, Sikhs,
Anglo-Indians and Europeans.
Government of India Act of 1935
TO
This act acted as the base for the formation of Indian Constitution.
T
The report submitted in 1928 under the leadership of Motilal Nehru was
O
instrumental in the formation of the act. Most the provisions in the Indian
N
Constitution are based on this act. This act allowed the formation of fully
responsible government by Indians. This act was applicable both to the
Indian principalities and also to the British India regions. The following
were the important features of this act:
1. A federal system of Indian Principalities, British governed regions
and dominion states was formed.
2. Reserve Bank of India were established.
3. Dyarchy was established at the centre.
30
4. Dyarchy was abolished at the provincial level and autonomy was
granted.
5. The Federal Court was established.
One should understand the various political developments that
resulted in the formation of various acts that aided the formation of Indian
Constitution. Though these acts serve the purpose of British interest,
they also include the aspirations of Indians for self-governance. These
acts should be understood as the result of struggle led by Indians for
self-rule.
EXERCISES
I. Fill in the following blanks with suitable answers:
ED
1. Diwani Adalat in civil court was introduced by ......................
H
2. The post of Superintendent of Police was created by …………….
IS
BL
EP S
3. The Permanent Zamindari system was introduced in Bengal and
R TB
U
Bihar provinces in ……………………. .
BE @K
4. The Land tax system introduced by Alexander Reed is

……….………
5. The report given by ……………….. became the base of modern
TO
education system.
T
6. The Regulating Act was implemented in the year………………………

O
N
II. Discuss and answer the following questions:

7. Illustrate the judicial system formulated through East India
Company.
8. What were the measures undertaken at the time of the British in
Police system?
9. British landtax system made the Indian farmers to “born in debt,
lived in debt and died in debt”. How?
10. What were the main aspects of Ryotwari system?
31
11. What were the effects of British Land taxes?
12. Make a list of the effects of British Education in India.
13. What were the restrictions imposed in Regulating Act?
14. What were the important features of the Indian government act of
1858?
15. How does the India Government Act of 1935 become the base of
Indian Constitution?
16. What were the important features of 1919 Act?
III. Activities :
1. The British created a friendly environment for themselves by
ED
implementing administrative reforms in India. Organize a debate
competition on this topic.
H
IS
2. Collect information on various other laws implemented by the
BL
EP S
British apart from those discussed in lesson with the help of your
R TB
U
teacher.
BE @K

TO
T
O
N
32
Chapter - 4
OPPOSITION TO BRITISH
RULE IN KARNATAKA AND WODEYARS
OF MYSORE
• Wodeyars of Mysore
• Hyder Ali and Tippu Sultan Anglo-Mysore wars
• Dondiya wagh
• Rebellion of Kittur – Rani Chennamma and Sangolli Rayanna
• Rebellion of Amara Sulya
• Rebellion of Surapura
ED
• Rebellion of Halagali Bedas
H
The present Karnataka was scattered among various principalities
IS
before integration. Apart from establishing political supremacy during the
BL
EP S
later part of 18th century, the British exploited the people in agriculture
R TB
U
and trade in order to protect their own interests. These exploitations
BE @K
created insecurities across Karnataka. The local kings suffered insecurities.

As a result, rebellions against the British broke out in most parts of the
Karnataka. In the beginning, the Zamindars and Kings battled against the
British individually without attaining unity among them.
TO
Wodeyars of Mysore (1399-1947)

T
Mysore state continued the tradition and revived the lost glory of
O
Karnataka after the fall of Vijaya Nagara empire.

N
Hadinadu a Paleyapattu near Mysore town was ruled by Chamaraja

a feudatory of Srirangapattana Mandalika. He died without any sons and
the dalvoy Maranayaka of Karugalli administered it and demanded the
princess in marriage to him. Nobody agreed for it.
At this time Yaduraya with his brother Krishnaraya from Dwaraka of
Gujarath came to Mysore. Voluntarily he came to help the Maharani and
killed Maranayaka. This pleased the Maharani who gave her daughter in
marriage to him. Thus the Wodeyar dynasty was started. This dynasty
was ruled by 25 Wodeyars starting from Yaduraya to Jayachamaraja
Wodeyar. Let us understand some of the important Wodeyars.
33
Raja Wodeyar (1578-1617) : The credit of expanding the small
paleyapattu into a large Mysore goes to him. Srirangapattana was
captured from the representative of Vijayanagara and made it as his
Capital. Further the Surrounding areas were occupied and expanded his
Kingdom.
He revived the temples of Srirangapattana, Mysore and Melukote
“Rajamudi” the crown was offered to lord Cheluvanarayana Swamy. He
started the Navaratri (Dasara) festival of Mysore province in Srirangapatna.
Chikkadevaraja Wodeyar (1673-1704) : He was an efficient soldier
and administator. He checked the invasion of Shivaji at Madurai, Ikkeri and
Bijapur. He captured Magadi, Madhugiri, Koratagere and other places. He
purchased Bangalore from the Mughal military general. He had the titles
like Karnataka 'Kavichakravarthi', 'Aprathima veera', 'Thenkanaraja' and
ED
'Navakoti Narayana'. He started the council of ministers (Athara Kacheri)
to help in administration. The postal system came into being during his
H
time. A dam was constructed across river cauvery and Chikka Devaraja
IS
and Dodda Devaraja Canal were also constructed for irrigation. He had
BL
EP S
R TB
patronised many poets like Thirumalarya, Sanchi Honnamma and so on.

U
The Rule of Commissioners (1831-1881)

BE @K
After the death of Tippu Sultan, Krishnaraja Wodeyar III ascended the
throne with the consent of the British. The British took Mysore state under
their direct control in 1830 due to the rebel at Nagara (Shivamogga District)
The period between 1831 to 1881 is called the rule of commissioners.
TO
During this period, Krishnaraja Wodeyar repeatedly tried to regain

power. Finally, the government of England in 1867. took a decision to
T
O
return Mysore to the Wodeyars family. There was a condition added in

N
this decision. The condition was that only the successor of Krishnaraja
Wodeyar III would be considered for the throne but not Krishnaraja
Wodeyar III. The very next year of this information, Krishnaraja Wodeyar
died in 1868. His Successor Chamaraja the X ascended the throne when
he reached adulthood. Seven commissioners administered the state
between 1831-1881.
The important among them were Mark Cubbon and L.B. Bowring
who ruled for 27 years and 8 years respectively. During the adminstrative
period of Cubbon, English education, Judiciary and many other fields were
modernised. The reforms of two commissioners made a long term impact
34
on Mysore state. The last commissioner James Gorden handed over the
administration to Mysore royal family in 1881.
Chamarajendra Wodeyar X (1881-1894) : As per the promise made
by the British, the Mysore throne was handed over to Chamarajendra X
in 1881. The Commissioners rule came to an end and a British Resident
was appointed. Along with this, C. Rangacharlu was appointed as dewan.
He was an efficient administrator and liberal minded. He established the
Mysore Representative Assembly. Gold mines in Kolar in 1881, Bangalore
- Mysore Railway line in 1882 were also started.
After the death of Rangacharlu in 1883, K. Sheshadri Iyer became
the dewan. As he had a vast experience of having worked in different
positions, he was responsible for many new railway lines. In order to
select the talented youngsters for various administrative positions, he
started the Mysore civil services examinations. Because of his efforts
ED
'Anti Child Marriage Prevention Act' was implemented in 1894. Shimsha
Hydro - Electric Power Project was started.
H
During the period of Chamaraja the X more importance was given to
IS
irrigation. Special importance to girls education was given by establishing
BL
EP S
'Maharani Girls High School'. Chamarajendra Wodeyar gave shelter to

R TB
U
Vivekananda when he came to Mysore and also helped him to participate
BE @K
in the parliament of world religions at Chicago. As he had love towards

Kannada and Sanskrit, he patronised many scholars. Basappa shastry
was important among them who had written many books and was known
as “Abhinava Kalidasa” and has composed the State Anthem of Mysore,
Kayo Sri Gowri.
TO
Krishnaraja Wodeyar IV (1894-1940) : The queen

T
regent Vanivilasa Sannidana Kempa Nanjammanni

O
looked after the administration. She was helped by the

N
dewans and the advisory council which led for

developmental works. Reforms in Gold mines,
establishment of colleges, construction of Marikanive
reservoir, Railways, Hospitals and Hydro electric
project across Cauveri at Shivanasamudra were
started. Electricity was supplied to Kolar Gold mines
and to Bangalore. The first city to be electrified in India
was Bangalore.
Krishnaraja Wodeyar IV assumed power legally in
Krishnaraja
1902. He was lucky to have the illuminary services Wodeyar IV
of the dewans like P.N. Krishnamurthy, V.P. Madhava
35
Rao, Sir M. Visvesvarayya, Kantharaja Urs, Sir Albion Banerjee, Sir Mirja
Ismail and others.
The progressive visionary of Krishna Raja Wodeyar IV had efficient
administration of his Diwans made the Mysore State to become one of
the leading provinces in the nation. He was very much interested in
spreading education among his people. He abolished fees in all primary
schools to develop primary education. He helped girls education. He
started the university of Mysore and also started scholarship to the
students continuing education in foreign countries. In 1909 the Indian
Institute of Science was established at Bangalore with the help of Tata.
Special attention was given to the development of Irrigation. A barrage
was constructed across Cauvery near Belagola. New railway lines were
laid. Many small and large scale industries were started. Among them
the Iron and Steel Factory, Cement Factory, Paper mills at Bhadravathi,
ED
Sugar Factory at Mandya. Sandal oil factory at Mysore, Soap factory
at Bangalore. Chemical and Fertilisers factory at Belagola and so on.
H
Legislative council was formed which was a great step in the Legislative
IS
measures. BL
EP S
Krishnaraja Wodeyar IV was a man of simple mild natured and

R TB
U
efficient administrator. He had a lot of interest towards fine arts and
BE @K
encouraged musicians like Shyama sastry, M. Hiriyanna, Veena

Seshanna, Sambayya, Bidaram Krishnappa, Muttaiah Bhagavatar,
Vasudevacharya, T. Chowdaiah and others. Mysore became a ‘Model
State’ due to his administration. Mahatma Gandhiji called him 'Rajashri'.
TO
Jayachamaraja Wodeyar (1940-1950) : He came to throne after

the death of Krishnaraja Wodeyar. He had his education in general
T
and Special colleges. He toured the world and got good Knowledge. He
O
had the services of Dewan Mirza Ismail, Nyapti Madhava rao and Arcot
N
Ramaswamy Mudaliar.
He was a great scholar, musicologist, orator and a great patron
of literature and fine arts. He had written number of books and also
composed many devotional songs. He became the governor of Mysore
after India became Independent.
Opposition to British Rule in Karnataka
In Indian History the 18th century was considered as “The century
of political problems.” There were many reasons for this. The death of
Aurangzeb, the Mughal emperor in 1707 was the main reason. His death
36
weakened the Mughal empire. As a result the Mughal lost political control
over South India. A lot of political struggles took place in Carnatic region.
In this backdrop, British tightened their political grip over India. India
underwent many political transitions. The native rulers opposed British
in many ways.
Hyder Ali and Tippu Sultan
The death of Chikkadevaraj Wodeyar in 1704 created various political
challenges in Mysuru state. His death created the problems of succession
and administration. All these developments clouded the politics of Mysuru.
Hyder Ali gained prominence in this scenario of uncertainity that clouded
over the Mysuru and carnatic region. Hyder Ali soon became popular in
using arms and experiments. He undertook the invasion of the forces
by active military operations and suppressed Dalvoys. He imprisoned
ED
Krishna Raja Wodeyar II and kept him under house arrest and took over
H
the power. He became famous as Nawab Hyder Ali in a short time. This
IS
situation was timely utilised by both the French and the English for their
BL
EP S
R TB
political power.
U
BE @K
Anglo - Mysore Wars (1767-1799)

First Anglo-Mysore War :
This was started in 1767 and ended in 1769. The
TO
prominence gained by Hyder Ali in the South was not

tolerated by the British, Marathas and the Nizam
T
of Hyderabad. Hence, the British started devising

O
N
cunning plans to defeat Hyder Ali whom they saw as an

impediment for the expansionist ideas. Though, Hyder Ali
suffered political and financial loss due to the Maratha Hyder Ali
aggression, he made attempts to have Marathas and
Nizam of Hyderabad on his sides with a little success.
The British entered into an agreement with the Marathas and the
Nizam of Hyderabad against Hyder Ali. A tripartite alliance emerged. But,
Hyder Ali with manipulative ideas was successful in breaking the alliance.
He also created enemity and distrust among the Marathas, the Nizam of
Hyderabad and the British.
37
Meanwhile, political disturbances emerged in Arcot. In 1767, Hyder Ali
and the Nizam of Hyderabad attacked Arcot. But the King of Arcot had an
alliance with the British. The war started with this incident. The battles
took place in Thiruchanapalli, Thiruvannamalai, Ambur and other places.
Hyder Ali organized lightening attacks in these battles. The British military
captured a few places. Hyder Ali suffered temporary setbacks. The British
Military from Bombay joined the war. Hyder Ali considered the war as a
challenge to his personal power, and continued with the war. His army
reached Madras by 1769 and created panic among the British. Inevitably,
the British entered an agreement with Hyder Ali through the ‘Madras
Treaty’. The first Anglo-Mysore War ended with the signing of the ‘Madras
Treaty in 1769’.
Second Anglo-Mysore War (1780-1784) :
The Madras Treaty had put the political developments in South India
ED
on a temporary hold. The British attempted to break the ‘Madras Treaty’.
When Madhava Rao attacked Srirangapattana with the Maratha army,
H
Hyder Ali expected the British to support him as per the Madras Treaty.
IS
But, the British rejected the request of Hyder Ali and went against the
BL
EP S
Madras Treaty. Mahe, the French colony was under the hold of Hyder Ali.
R TB
U
The British attacked Mahe and captured it. This became the reason for
BE @K
Second Anglo-Mysore War.

The Second Anglo-Mysore war was started in 1780. In the beginning,
Hyder Ali gained upper hand. He captured many forts of the Carnatic
region. Kanchipuram was captured by Hyder Ali. The Mysore army reached
TO
till Coramandal coast. The British officers became worried. Hyder Ali
attacked Arcot and captured it. He also threatened to attack Wandiwash
T
and Vellore. An army was kept in standby by the British and it was led by
O
Sir Eyre coot. He followed Hyder Ali’s army till Pondicherry. The French
N
refused to support Hyder Ali against the British. Hyder Ali changed his
war strategy with this development. He attacked regions under British
control and captured a large booty of arms and wealth.
In 1781 Hyder Ali was defeated in a battle held in Porto Nova by the
British. This increased the confidence of the British and also changed
the direction of the battle. But they suffered financial setbacks in Pulicat
and Solingur. Meanwhile, by entering into the ‘Salbai Agreement’, the
British were successful in winning over the Marathas and the Nizam of
Hyderabad to their side. Hyder Ali died due to illness during the war in
1782. The war was led by his son Tippu Sultan.
38
Tippu Sultan was waging war in Malabar region when Hyder Ali died.
The British tried to take advantage of Hyder Ali’s death by invading
Mangalore and Bidanoor. They also tried to instigate the rulers of Calicut
and Malabar regions against Tippu Sultan. Tippu Sultan thought of all
these developments and decided to protect Mangalore and the coastal
regions. He defeated the British. The ‘Treaty of
Mangalore’ ended the Second Anglo-Mysore War in
1784.
Tippu Sultan
Tippu Sultan felt that the British were the major
obstacle for his policy of expansion. So, he tried to
drive them out seriously. He became the ruler of
Mysore after Hyder Ali’s death. He understood the
cunning policies of the British. He considered it as
ED
his duty to drive the British out of India. He waged
H
war against the British throughout his seventeen
IS
years of rule. He had clearly understood the cunningness, strategies,
BL
EP S
clever manipulations of the British. He knew that hurting the business

R TB
U
interest of the British would weaken the political strength of the British.
BE @K
He tried to organize the enemies of the British into one group. He tried to
break the monopoly of the British over trade with India. These attempts
further angered the British and their enemity with Tippu Sultan grew up.
Know this :
TO
Among all the attempts done during 18th century to stop the British,
T
the efforts of Hyder Ali and Tippu Sultan stand out due to many aspects.
O
They knew that they could not defeat the British with their traditional
N
arms. Hence, they modernized their army. The soldiers of Mysore Army
were capable of using modern weapons and do drills like the European
armies. Hyder Ali and Tippu Sultan used missiles during the war for
the first time in India. Apart from modern weapons, both of them knew
that they needed funds in their treasury for the battles. Hyder Ali had
witnessed many Nawabs going bankrupt while waging war against the
British. So, both of them took measures to strengthen their economic
system by entering into various agreements and trade pacts. They
brought tobacco, sandalwood and others under the state monopoly.
They invited French experts to improve the quality of traditional artifacts
of Mysore in order to gain better market share at international markets.
39
Third Anglo-Mysore War :
The political situation of Travancore was the main reason for this
war. The king of Travancore built a fort in Kochi with the help of the
British and captured Ayacotta and Kanganoor forts from the Dutch. All
these were the clear breach of Mangalore Treaty.
The British captured Karwar, Coimbatore, Dindigul and other regions
under the leadership of General Meadows. Tippu Sultan entered the
region of Baramahal and captured Sathyamangalam. He later attempted
to capture Thiruchanapalli but failed in his attempt. Meanwhile, Lord
Cornwallis took over the leadership of the British Army and this changed
the course of the war.
The British Army captured Kolar and Hosakote and rushed towards
Bangalore under the leadership of Lord Cornwallis. The army captured
ED
Bangalore and destroyed the fort. After capturing Bangalore, Lord
Cornwallis sought the help of Marathas and Nizam of Hyderabad to defeat
H
Tippu Sultan. The war took another conclusive turn with the joining of the
IS
Marathas and Hyderabad forces with the British. The Marathas captured
BL
EP S
Savanoor, Gajendraghad, Lakshmeshwara, Hubballi and other places.

R TB
U
The combined army marched towards Srirangapattana by capturing

BE @K
fort after fort in 1792. The fort was destroyed during night. Disturbed
by these developments, Tippu Sultan tried to enter into an agreement
with the British. It was inevitable for him. He signed the ‘Treaty of
Srirangapatna’ in 1792 which had unfavourable conditions. With this,
TO
Third Anglo-Mysore War came to an end.

The British were successful in inserting unfavourable conditions in
T
O
order to weaken Tippu Sultan. Tippu was forced to part with half of his
N
kingdom, was forced to pay three crore rupees as war damage fee and
had to pledge two of his sons as a guarantee against the payment. He
was also forced to release the prisoners of war. The British withdrew the
combined army from Srirangapatna.
Fourth Anglo-Mysore War :
Tippu Sultan took the defeat in the Third Anglo-Mysore war personally.
He paid off all the dues and got his children released. He also gave away
the territory to the British and its allies as agreed. He claimed his right
over the Malabar regions under the British occupation. But, the British
refused this argument.
40
Lord Wellesley became the Governor General of India in 1798.
The political activities against Tippu Sultan became intensified during
this period. Tippu’s attempt to form an alliance of local rulers and his
closeness with the French angered Lord Wellesley further. Tippu sent an
ambassador to France to seek the alliance of the French. This enraged
the British. They thought that an alliance between France and Tippu
Sultan would threaten the existence of the British in India.s
Another treaty, Subsidiary Alliance containing inhuman and
impractical conditions was forced upon Tippu Sultan. Tippu rejected
this. His refusal started the Fourth Anglo Mysore War.
Mysore after Tippu
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
Mangaluru
TO
T
O
N
Thanjavur
The war started in 1799. The British were able to destroy the strong
fort. Tippu died while fighting the British in 1799. With the death of
Tippu Sultan, the British were happy as if the whole India came under
their rule. Most of the territories under Tippu’s rule was shared among
the British, the Marathas and the Nizam of Hyderabad. A small territory
was handed over to the royal representative of Mysore Wodeyars. This
region came to be known as Mysore Princely State.
41
Dondiya Wagh (1800)
Many rebellions and protests against the British took place in
Karnataka after the death of Tippu Sultan. These were armed rebellions
and took place during the first part of 19th century. Among them, the
rebellion led by Dondiya Wagh is an important rebellion.
Dondiya was born in a Maratha family of Chennagiri. He was called
the Wagh, the tiger, due to his bravery. Wagh means tiger in Marati
language. In 1779 he started his career as a cavalry soldier in Hyder
Ali’s army and grew to the position of a military general. He built his own
private army and fought along with Tippu Sultan. Due to differences with
Tippu, he was imprisoned. The British released him from the prison after
the Fourth Anglo-Mysore War. He built a small army and started his
operations. He organized the army with the unhappy soldiers of Tippu’s
army and the feudatory rulers who had lost power. He captured Bidanoor
ED
and Shivamogga forts and made unsuccessful attempt to capture
Chitradurga fort. Lord Wellesley tried to check this rebellion.
H
IS
An attack was organized on Shivamogga, Honnali, Harihara and
BL
EP S
other places under the control of Dondiya. Dondiya lost his base. After
R TB
the capture of Shikaripura, Dondiya ran away towards Gutti, which was
U
under the control of the Nizam of Hyderabad. When the Nizam’s army
BE @K
attacked Gutti, Dondiya had to run towards the regions of the Marathas.
The Maratha army attacked him and captured most of his horses, camels
and arms. In spite of these, he continued his war fare.
Many unhappy palyegars encouraged Dondiya Wagh. The French at
TO
Mahe of Malabar also extended their support to him. The British army
T
followed him in the vast area that included Harihara, Chitradurga,

O
Shikaripura, Savanuru, Ranebennur, Kittur and Londa. The British who

N
took over Shirhatti killed many followers of Dondiya Wagh.

End of Dondiya Wagh :
Lord Wellesley decided to end the adventures of Dondiya Wagh. The
British requested the help of local rulers. Dondiya had recaptured
Shikaripura fort and he was scattered by the British army again. The
British tried to defeat the army of Dondiya which used to move in the
area between Tungabadhra and Malaprabha. They attacked him from all
the directions. He was followed by them when he left Raichur. When he
was caught in between Maratha Army and Nizam’s army, the British
attacked him near Yapalaperavi and killed him at Konagal. With the death
42
of their leader, the followers of Dondiya scattered. The
British captured a large scale of arms and
ammunitions.
Rebellion of kittur – Brave Queen Chennamma
(1824)
The British brought in many changes in the
administration after defeating the Marathas, Tippu
and Hyder Ali. Denying the right of adopted children
over the throne was one of such rules. Though
Dalhousie introduced 'The Doctrine of lapse' in
1848, even before this, without any legal support, Chennamma
they implemented it. Kittur became victim of this
policy. The rebellion led by Chennamma, the queen of Kittur opposing
this law is a prominent one.
ED
Kittur lies between the Dharwad and Belagavi. After the death of her
husband Mallasarja, Chennamma, the queen of Mallasarja took active
H
IS
interest in the administrative matters. After the death of Mallasarja,
BL
his son Shivalingarudra Sarja took over the reign of Kittur. Due to his
EP S
R TB
failing health, Chennamma had to take care of day to day administration.

U
Shivalinga Sarja supported the British during the Maratha war. As a
BE @K
result, the British entered into an agreement with Kittur and collected
payment from him. This agreement was entered into during the time of
Thomas Munroe.
After the death of ShivalingarudraSarja, Chennamma adopted a boy
TO
named Shivalingappa and started ruling Kittur as a queen regent. Then,

Thackeray was the Collector and political agent of the British in Dharwad.
T
He sent a report to the Governor of Bombay and attempted to take over

O
Kittur Kingdom under the Doctrine of Lapse policy. He attempted to take

N
over the treasury and fort under his control. Chennamma considered
war as inevitable. She prepared for the war. Meanwhile the British also
prepared themselves for the war. In the battle, Thackeray was shot dead.
Many British were taken as the prisoners of war.
The British attacked Kittur again under the leadership of Colonel
Deak. The army fought the battle bravely. Chennamma attempted to
flee from the battle field. But she was captured by the British army.
Chennamma and others were imprisoned at Bylahongala fort. Queen
Chennamma passed away in the prison. She has remained an ideal
person till today.
43
Sangolli Rayanna (1829-30)
The name of Sangolli Rayanna has remained
famous along with the name of Rani Chennamma.
Rayanna was a brave soldier. He fought for the
independence of Kittur and felt it was his duty
to liberate his motherland. He fought against the
British and was imprisoned along with her. He was
later released by the British.
There are many oral histories about Rayanna.
He developed a sense of nationalism and went on
organizing an army. He organized secret meetings Sangolli Rayanna
at sensitive places. He aimed at looting the treasury
and taluk offices of the British. He had an army of five hundred men. He
became furious with the villagers who were assisting the British army. The
ED
British thought that Rayanna was being instigated by Rani Chennamma.
H
Hence, they shifted Chennamma to Kusugal prison from Bylahongala.
IS
The British devised a cunning strategy to capture Rayanna. They
BL
EP S
encouraged Desais who were opposing Rani Chennamma. An Amaldar

R TB
U
named Krishnaraya joined hands with them. Thus, Rayanna was
BE @K
cunningly captured and brought down to Dharwad. Many of his soldiers

surrendered after his arrest. He was declared as a main offender and was
hanged to death at Nandagadh on 26th January in 1831. Many ballads
have kept the life and bravery of Rayanna alive even today.
TO
Rebellion of Amara Sullya

T
This rebellion was basically a farmers’ rebellion. This rebellion

O
needs to be understood in the backdrop of political situations prevalent

N
in coastal Karnataka and Kodagu regions during 1835-37. The British

dethroned the ruler of Kodagu, Chikkaveerarajendra of Haleri dynasty
in 1834. He was later transferred to Vellore through Bangalore and later
to Kashi. This incident created political insatiability in Kodagu. Swami
Aparampara, Kalyanaswamy and Puttabasappa organized a rebellion
against this. All the three declared that they were part of the Haleri
dynasty that ruled Kodagu. Swami Aparampara assumed the leadership
of the rebellion. He was captured in 1834 and shifted to Bangalore.
Similarly Kalayanaswami was captured in 1837 and placed in Mysore
prison.
44
Puttabasappa:
The people of lower Kodagu continued the rebellion after the capture
of Kalyanaswamy. Sullia, Bellare and Puttur, the major places of Canara
region, were part of Amara Sullia. It is interesting to note that a farmer
named Puttabasappa, as Kalyanaswamy. This Puttabasappa later
presented himself as Swami Aparampara. This also notes the fluid nature
of the rebellion. Puttabasappa took over the leadership of the rebellion.
The rebellion started in the hilly region. Puttabasappa organized the
rebels and calmed down the people. He declared that tax on tobacco
and salt will be withdrawn, if the rebel government assumed power.
The rich farmers, land owners and local chieftains were assured of this
move. The capture of the government office in Bellare was the first move
in this rebellion. Puttabasappa killed an Amaldhar who was known for
ED
his brutality. This further increased the popularity of Puttabasappa. This
incident gained more support for the rebellion and the rebellion became
H
more famous.
IS
BL
EP S
The rebels marched towards Mangalore to capture it. The British
R TB
were engaged in fortifying their fort in Mangalore. The rebels marched

U
towards Mangalore through Panemangalore and Bantwal. They looted

BE @K
the treasury and prison of Bantwal.

The British sought the army of Thalacheri, Cannanore and Bombay to
quell this uprising. On hearing this development, Puttabasappa and his
TO
associates fled towards Sullia. The British captured them with the help of
people in Kodagu. Puttabasappa, Lakshmappa, Bangarasa, Kedambadi
T
Ramayiah Gowda and Guddemane Appaiah were hanged to death. Though

O
the rebellion failed, it has an important place in the history of rebellions

N
against the British.

Rebellion of Surapura and Koppal :
Surapura
Surapura is at fifty kilometers from the present day Yadgir district.
This was an important place since the rule of Aurangazeb of Mughuls.
During the reign of the Nizam of Hyderabad and the Marathas it became
a vassal state. Later, most of the territory was lost and Surpura remained
restricted to a smaller territory. During the reign of Venkatappa Nayaka,
it raised a flame of rebellion against the British.
45
Venkatappa Nayaka:
Venkatappa came to the throne after the death of his father Krishna
Nayaka. He was born in 1834 and came to the throne at early age.
His ascendance to throne was opposed by Krishna Nayaka’s brother
Peddanayaka. This resulted in internal struggles. The British interfered
in the affairs of Surapura. In 1842, they appointed Meadows Taylor as
their Resident and gained proxy power over Surapura.
Taylor was a reformist. He developed Surapura princely state.
Peddanayaka was appointed as the Dewan of the state. Taylor conducted
the land survey of the kingdom. The revenue of the state increased due
to the measures implemented by Taylor. He took measures to educate
Venkatappa Nayaka properly. He came to power in 1853.
Rebellion of Surapura
The British government was observing the various developments
ED
of Surapura. In 1857, it came to the notice of government that the
H
representatives of Nana Saheb were present in Surapura. This made the
IS
British suspicious of King’s intentions. The British appointed an officer
BL
EP S
named Campbell to report on the various activities of the King. The officer
R TB
submitted a report to the resident of Hyderabad that the King is involved

U
in maladministration.
BE @K
Venkatappa Nayaka is usually presented as the leader of 1857 revolt

in Karnataka by the historians. The British army captured Surapura
in 1858. The war continued, there is confusion regarding Venkatappa
Nayaka’s end.
TO
Veerappa of Koppal
T
O
Koppal rebellion is an important rebellion in the various armed

N
rebellions against the British. Koppal and the surrounding regions were
under the rule of the Nizam of Hyderabad. There were exploitations. This
enraged a few Zamindars who rebelled against the Nizam. Veerappa was
an important person among the rebels.
Veerappa who was a Zamindar, rebelled against the British and
occupied the fort of Koppal and other forts in the vicinity. Many farmers
and Zamindars supported after realizing his motives. The British contacted
the Nizam and employed their army to defeat Veerappa. Veerappa who
had lesser soldiers died fighting the army of the British. The Birtish
captured back the fort of Koppal. Though, this rebellion was a short-lived
one, Veerappa proved himself to be a good warrior.
46
Rebellion of Bedas of Halagali
Halagali is a small village of Mudhol Know this :
taluk of Bagalkote district. This was part Arms act : Indians were not
of the Mudhol principality. In 1857, the allowed to posses the weapons
British banned the usage of weapons. The without the permission of the
Bedas who always kept guns as part of government.
their customs were good hunters. They
rebelled against the British when they were asked to surrender their
firearms. The Bedas of Manturu, Boodni, Alagundi and neighbouring
villages joined Halagali Bedas. The British army entered Halagali village
to suppress the rebellion. They suppressed the Bedas in an inhuman
way. All the rebels were hanged to death.
EXERCISES
ED
I. Fill in the blanks with suitable answers
H
1. The First Anglo-Mysore war took place between …………………..
IS
and ……………….. BL
EP S
R TB
2. The Second Anglo-Mysore war ended with ……………………treaty.

U
BE @K
3. Raja Wodeyar made ................ as his capital.

4. Kittur Rani Chennamma adopted a boy named ………………….
5. Rayanna of Kittur state belonged to ………………………..village.
TO
6. Surapura is in the present district of ……………………..

7. The Bedas of ………………………..village of Bagalkote district
T
O
rebelled against the British.

N
8. The Amara Sullia rebellion was basically a ……………………….

rebellion.
II. Discuss in groups and answer later
9. What are the achievements of Chikkadevaraja Wodeyar ?
10. How did Hyder Ali come to power?
11. What were the effects of Second Anglo-Mysore war?
12. What were the conditions of Srirangapatanam treaty?
47
13.The Fourth Anglo Mysore strengthened the position of the
British in Mysore. Discuss.
14. What were the achievement of Krishnaraja Wodeyar IV?
15. Explain the method of resisting the British power by
Dondiya Wagh.
16. Explain the method adopted by Rayanna to fight the British.
17. Expalin the contributions of Puttabasappa of Kodagu in the
freedom struggle.
18. Discuss the Surapura rebellion in brief.
III. Activities
ED
1. Read books on Sangolli Rayanna.
H
2. Collect more information on the life history of Rani Chennamma.
IS
BL
EP S
IV. Projects:
R TB
U
1. Organize a study tour to Surapura. Visit the fort and observe the
BE @K
speciality of the guest house built during the British period.

2. Collect information on Mysore Palace.
TO

T
O
N
48
Chapter - 5
SOCIAL AND RELIGIOUS
REFORM MOVEMENTS

• The establishment of the Brahmo Samaj and its reforms
• Yuva Bengal Movement
• The establishment of the Arya Samaj and its reforms
• The reforms of the Prarthana Samaj
• The teachings of the ‘Satyashodhak Samaj’
• Aligarh movement
• The teachings of the Ramakrishna Mission
ED
• Theosophical Society
• Narayana Guru : Dharma Paripalana Yogam
H
IS
• Periyar
BL
EP S
The 19th Century in Indian history is referred to as the period of ‘Indian

R TB
U
Renaissance’. Indians came into contact with Western civilization. As a
BE @K
result, they got the advantage of English education. Rationalism grew

among Indians. It is a well-known fact that
Know this :
this rational attitude stimulated the
The British and Indian
Indians to question superstitions and the
TO
scholars who were influenced by

contradictions in their traditions, and also the Western philosophers, called
T
become aware of their own interests. In the 19th Century period ‘a period
O
order to protect their political and economic of Renaissance’.

N
interest, British administrators supported

reforming movements. They tried to ban the evil practices which are
harmful to society. Western thought introduced the ideas of democracy,
freedom, equality and nationalism to Indians. Many who were enlightened
by Western education, tried to bring in reforms. In this context, Raja Ram
Mohan Roy, Dayanand Saraswati, Mahadev Govinda Ranade, Jyotiba
Phule, Swami Vivekananda, Annie Besant, Syed Ahmed Khan, Narayana
Guru, Periyar and others worked towards social reform.
49
Brahmo Samaj
Ram Mohan Roy was one of the important
person in establishment of Brahmo Samaj. He has
been called ‘The Father of Indian Renaissance’. He
had received excellent education. He was well-versed
in many languages like Sanskrit, Arabic, Persian,
English, French, Greek, Latin and others. He had
studied the culture and principles of religions like
Hinduism, Islam, Sufi, Christianity and Buddhism. Ram Mohan Roy
Raja Ram Mohan Roy studied the Upanishads and
questioned the practice of idol-worship. He argued that modern science
and English education were essential for an Indian revival. He opposed
exploitation of women. He led an organized attack against the practice of
sati and child marriage. Orthodox Hindus condemned him for such acts.
Ram Mohan Roy supported the Prohibition of Sati Act which was introduced
ED
by Lord William Bentinck. He tried to develop rationalism among people
H
through journalism. Towards that end, he started a newspaper in Bengali
IS
called ‘Samvada Kaumudi’. BL
EP S
Brahmo Samaj was in the forefront of the social Activity: Make a list
R TB
and religious reformation in the 19th Century. It of the measures the

U
government has taken

BE @K
attempted to bring in reforms in the traditions and

to eradicate child
customs in Hindu religion. It opposed idol-worship marriage.
and polytheism, and encouraged monotheism. It
condemned performance of yagas and rituals. Since English education
exposed Indians to Western political thought, it enabled the development of
TO
nationalism among Indians.

T
Young Bengal Movement

O
N
The wave of modernization started moving across North India during

the nineteenth century. Calcutta was the Centre of this new thinking.
New movements started arising during the C.E1820s and 1830s. We have
already learnt the contribution of Bramho Samaj. During this period,
another movement called ‘Young Bengal Movement’ took birth. This
movement was started by Henry Louis Vivian Derozio(1809-1831). His
father was a Portuguese and his mother was an Indian. Hence, Derozio
was called Anglo-Indian.
Derozio served as a professor at Hindu College in Calcutta. Many
of his students who were attracted to his teaching became his committed
followers. Derozio was influenced by the various movements of Europe
50
and tried to instil the same spirit of free enquiry in the minds of his
students and colleagues. He also worked towards creating text books to
inculcate new education system. This angered many traditionalists. He
went ahead and started the ‘Academic Association (1828), a free thinking
debate association which created new thinking across Bengal.
The young Bengal movement held discussions and debates on
issues like nature, humanism, God and other various topics. Derozio
worked towards spreading the message that only rational thinking
would liberate people from the clutches of superstitions and social
discrimination. He was an advocate of Women Rights and opposed caste
based discrimination. This grew into a new movement, but the influence
of this movement was limited to Calcutta and a few areas of Bengal.
Arya Samaj
Arya Samaj was established by Dayananda Saraswati.
ED
He travelled throughout the country giving lectures and
H
emphasized that the Vedas were the source of truth and
IS
knowledge. In this context, he advised people to ‘Back
BL
EP S
to the Vedas’. He condemned idol worship and the caste
R TB
system. He advocated that caste should be decided based

U
on the ability and not on the birth of the person. He rejected

BE @K
the innumerable meaningless practices. He encouraged Dayananda Saraswati

widow marriage. He urged people to use swadeshi goods. He propounded
his teachings in a book called ‘Satyartha Prakasha’. ‘Purification Ritual’
was the main activity of Arya Samaj. The Samaj established schools
TO
and colleges in many places. The principles of Swarajya and Swadharma

advocated by Dayananda Saraswati inspired people to take part in the
T
freedom movement. Dayananda Saraswati who was a great patriot,

O
proclaimed that ‘India should be for Indians’.

N
Know this :
Purification Movement
The caste system and rigid beliefs of the Hindu religion had pushed people
towards other religions. In this context, with an intention to integrate the Hindu
society, Dayananda Saraswati reinterpreted the Vedas and advocated caste
and gender equality. He began a Purification Ceremony to bring back to the
Hindu religion all those who had got converted to other religions. Those who
came back underwent the Purification ritual and were accepted by Hinduism.
Thus he strengthened the Hindu religion.
51
Prarthana Samaj
Prarthana Samaj was established by Atmaram Panduranga in Mumbai.
It was founded on the principle that service to mankind is service to God. It
gave priority to spread education. Through the Deccan Education Society,
it aimed to develop the educational field. It encouraged widow marriage,
female literacy, intercaste marriage, eating together by people of all castes,
and opposed child marriage, caste system, idol worship and purdah system.
It maintained that all religions were paths towards the truth and hence
needed to be respected. During the Indian Renaissance, orphanages,
national schools and shelter homes for women were established.
M.G.Ranade popularized Prarthana Samaj. He believed that progress
in the political and economic fields was impossible without reform of the
society. He propagated Hindu-Muslim unity. Ranade was active in the
National Congress party. He started a high school for educating girls.
ED
Satyashodak Samaj
Satyashodak Samaj was established by Jyotiba
H
Phule. He believed that freedom was the basic
IS
necessity of every individual and that no individual
BL
EP S
could express his ideas if he did not have freedom.

R TB
U
Satyashodak Samaj urged for prohibition of liquor.
BE @K
It vehemently opposed gender inequality, denial of

human rights, exploitation of people and practice of
untouchability. It started a movement for social justice.
Mahatma Joytiba
Jyotiba Phule established a primary school for girls. He
Phule
condemned the slavery being forced on shudras and
TO
casteless classes including dalits, and denounced the people responsible

T
for such slavery. He advocated free and compulsory education in order to

O
bring about reform in the social system.

N
Shahu Maharaj who was deeply influenced

Activity: Learn from your
by Satyashodhak Samaj, opened many branches
teacher about the various
of the Samaj and continued its activities. It
schemes of the Karnataka
Government that encour-
began struggles on behalf of farmers. Phule
age women’s education. wrote in detail about exploitation in his book
‘Ghulamagiri’ (‘Slavery’). Phule’s wife, Savitribai
Phule too worked hard through the Satyashodhak Samaj, for women’s
education. Because of their effort a hostel for girls was started. The effort
of Phule's family in establishing a new society on the base of the principles
of equality was an important one. Later, Dr. B.R. Ambedkar was influenced
by Phule’s principles.
52
Aligarh Movement
The Aligarh Movement aimed at promoting harmony
of Eastern and Western ideas through transformation
of the Muslims in their political, social, educational,
religious and philosophical beliefs. The leadership of
this movement was borne by Sir Syed Ahmed Khan.
With an intention to provide modern education to the
Muslim community, he started ‘The Anglo-Oriental
College’. Later on, this college was renamed as ‘Aligarh
Muslim University’. Its main objective was to provide
religious education along with western education, and
Sir Syed Ahmed
to create a modern society through western education. Khan
Sir Syed remained outside the National Congress and
brought the Muslim community together. He supported female literacy
and condemned polygamy and ideas against widow marriage.
ED
Ramakrishna Mission (1897)
H
IS
Ramakrishna Paramahamsa was a priest at the
Dakshineshwar Kali Temple. His thought was source of
BL
EP S
R TB
Indian culture. He considered all religions to be equal.

U
He believed that spiritual realization was more important
BE @K
than any religion or God. He believed in idol-worship. He

was a selfless devout person. Swami Vivekananda was
his favorite disciple.
Swami Vivekananda established Ramakrishna Mission in Ramakrishna
TO
Paramahamsa
order to propagate the ideals of his teacher, Ramakrishna
Paramahamsa. The main objective of this organization was to spread
T
the message of equality of all religions and to put that into practice.
O
Ramakrishna Ashram has many branches all over the world. The mingling
N
of ancient, modern and western thinkers can be seen here.

Swami Vivekananda was a revolutionary monk who
opened the eyes of Indians to the importance of loving life.
He stressed the significance of the individual, his presence
and ability. He maintained that apart from prayer and
practice of yoga, social service was also necessary for
achievement of salvation (moksha). Ramakrishna Mission
is continuing to nurture culture through education and
social service. Vivekananda emphasized that nation and
religion were like the two faces of a coin. Many national Swami
leaders including Gandhiji were inspired by the philosophy Vivekananda
53
of Vivekananda. He tried his best in his lifetime to free India from casteism,
poverty, illiteracy and unawareness. He believed that the desire of
Vivekananda was to educate people. The educated people will bring reforms
in the society. He wanted the formation of legislation and through
legislation, social reforming rules must be implemented. He urged to stop
the blind following of westerns.
In 1893, at the Chicago Conference of World Religions, Swami
Vivekananda upheld the greatness of India by advocating tolerance of all
religions, and maintaining that all religions were true. In this manner, he
introduced Indian culture to the world. He was an inspiration to the youth.
Theosophical Society (Brahma Vidya Samaj)
The founders of Theosophical Society were Madam
Blavatsky and Colonel H.S.Olcott. This society was
ED
founded on the principles of establishment of universal
H
brotherhood, comparative study of ideology, and
IS
exploration of natural principles and the latent energy of
BL
EP S
the individual. Annie Besant
R TB
U
Annie Besant, an Irish lady started the activities of
BE @K
Theosophical Society in India and gave it new vitality. She aroused pride in
Indian culture through her lectures. She attempted to establish equality,
universal brotherhood and harmony in society. Annie Besant gave her full
support to the freedom struggle. She started a newspaper called ‘New India’.
TO
In 1916 C.E, she started Home Rule movement. She was the President
of the Congress Session in 1917. She contributed immensely to Indian
T
philosophy and the Independence struggle.

O
N
know this :
Home Rule
Ireland was under the control of Britain. The Irish people began
the ‘Home Rule Movement’ in order to obtain the right to carry on the
administration of their country themselves. Influenced by this, Annie
Besant started the movement in India too. In 1916, two Home Rule Leagues
came into existence. One began under the leadership of Tilak and had
Pune as its centre. It had its branches in Maharashtra, North Karnataka,
Central provinces and Berar areas. The second League began under
the leadership of Annie Besant and had Madras as its centre. Tilak brought
out the newspapers ‘Maratha’ and ‘Kesari’, while Annie Besant started ‘New
India’ and ‘Commonweal’ propagated their ideas.
54
Sri Narayana Guru
Sri Narayana Guru started the Sree
Narayana Dharma Paripalana Yogam
in 1903. He was born in Chembalanti /
Chembalandi of Kerala. This movement aimed
at strengthening the backward and exploited
communities. Narayana Guru (1854-1928)
and his companions Dr. Palpu and Kumaran
Assan led the movement.
The caste differences were too much in
Kerala and there were many prohibitions in Sri Narayana Guru
place. During that period, all were not allowed
to use facilities like tanks and roads. They were barred from wearing
footwear. Restrictions were there on women’s dress also. They were not
ED
allowed to schools. These communities had to lead a suffocating life without
basic human rights. In order to address this issue, Sri Narayana Guru
H
started Dharma Paripalana Yogam movement. One Caste, One Religion
IS
and One God for human beings was the basic idea of Sri Narayana Guru.
BL
EP S
Education is the only path to achieve this he declared. He built alternate

R TB
U
temples for the backward communities as they were denied entry into
BE @K
temples.
Narayana Guru and his companions started ‘Vaikom Satyagraha
Movement’ in 1924, which demanded entry for lower caste people in
the Shiva temple at Vaikom. Gandhiji and Periyar, the architects of
TO
self-respect movement participated in this. The Satyagraha for entry of

untouchables into Guruvayoor temple was a major incident.
T
Periyar
O
N
By the beginning of twentieth century, a Non-

Brahmin movement started in South India. Majority
non-Brahmins launched agitations demanding
representations in government sector as per
their population. It became a major movement in
Karnataka and many other states later. The non-
Brahminical communities opposed restrictions
against them. This was possible due to the English
Education. The census reports published after
1870s, provided a picture of their population.
The Justice Party started in 1916 continued the
Periyar
movement in Tamil Nadu.
55
The non-Brahmin movement took a new shape under the Justice
Party. This became more radical. ‘Self-Respect Movement’ led by
E.V.Ramaswami Naicker became a new force. Ramaswamy who came
out of Congress in 1925, started Self Respect League in 1926. He was
called Periyar (Senior Person) out of love by people. Periyar was born in
Erode in a rich family. He believed that Congress was in favour of Varna
system and started a new movement based on Dravida Racial Identity. He
said Tamil was the language of Dravidians. He championed equality and
criticized caste and gender-based discrimination. He participated in the
temple entry movement in 1924 held at Vaikom of Kerala. He became the
president of the Justice Party in 1939. He started an association called
'Dravida Kazhagam'. He also started an English magazine under the tittle
‘Revolt’.
Even today, Periyar remains as the ideological symbol in Tamil
Nadu politics. This is more evident in all the political parties of Tamil
ED
Nadu retaining the word ‘Dravida’ with their names. The ideological non-
H
Brahminical movement started by C.Ayothiadas pandit and T.M.Nayar
IS
was turned into a cultural movement by Periyar. His life goal was to
BL
EP S
establish religious harmony where there will be no inequality based on
R TB
caste, religion and gender.

U
BE @K
EXERCISES
I Fill in the blanks with suitable words:

TO
1. The 19th Century is called the period of __________________.

T
2. Raja Ram Mohan Roy started the newspaper _______________.

O
N
3. The founder of Prarthana Samaj was _______________.

4. ____________ propagated that freedom was the basic necessity of
every individual.
5. Swami Vivekananda’s guru was _______________.
6. Young Bengali movement was started by _______________.
II Discuss the following in groups and write the answers:

7. What were the preachings of the Brahmo Samaj?
8. Analyse the call of Dayananda Saraswati to return to the Vedas.
56
9. Explain the reforms propagated by Satyashodhak Samaj.
10. Analyse the objectives of the Aligarh Movement.
11. Explain the vision of Ramakrishna Mission.
12. Which were the reforms brought about by Annie Besant?
13. Explain the contributions of Sri Narayana Guru Dharma
Paripalana Yogam.
14. Listout the highlights of Periyar movement.
15. Which were the principles advocated by Direjio?
16. What are the contributions of Swami Vivekananda to the
Society?
III Activity:
ED
1. Visit Ramakrishna Ashram and collect information about the views
H
IS
of Swami Vivekananda.
BL
EP S
R TB
IV Projects:
U
BE @K
1. Visit libraries and read books of social reforms. With the help of
your teacher, collect information from the internet on the subject.
2. Learn from your teacher about the organizations working towards
social reform.
TO
T

O
N
57
Chapter - 6
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION - AN
INTRODUCTION
In this chapter we will learn the following points.
• Meaning Scope and importance of Public Administration.
• Meaning and methods of recruitment.
• Union Public Service Commission and State Public Service Commissions.
• Karnataka Public Service Commission.
• Law and Order
Public Administration - Meaning and Definition :
ED
As modern society is undergoing complex and rapid changes, public
H
administration occupies an important place. Awareness and importance
IS
of the benefits of public administration to society is increasing day by
BL
EP S
day. Administrative experiments are as old as human society itself. But

R TB
U
the development of the study of public administration began especially in
BE @K
America. Former President of America Woodrow Wilson has been called

as the “Father of Public Administration”. Presently public administration
is emerging as an important subject in all world nations.
TO
Meaning of Word:
The word Administration is a combination of two Latin words Ad-and
T
O
ministraire. The word ministraire give meaning of “To care”, to look after,
N
to serve and manage the affairs, so administration means serving the

people. It is the process of caring and managing affairs related to people.
Public Administration is definite part of the broad field of Administration.
The word public also refers to ‘Government’ The word public administration
was first used in 1812 by Alexander Hamilton. Later many thinkers defined
public administration in their own way.
Definitions
1) According to Woodrow Wilson public administration is the
comprehensive enforcement of the law.
58
2) According to Piffner Public administration is the combination of
collective effort and coordination to implement Public policy.
3) According to Luther Guillick Public administration is concerned
with the executive branch that carries out the functions of
government.
4) According to FM Marx, Public administration is the systematic
co-ordination of persons things and methods.
Over all, Public administration as a whole is concerned with integrated
functioning of Government which runs the day-to-day affairs of the state.
The importance of Public administration :
The importance of Public administration is increasing as the present
ED
states are changing from police state to welfare states All round development
of human beings and survival of human society depends upon Public
H
IS
administration. It is the heart of the state system. The idea of a state
BL
EP S
without Public administration is impossible. Therefore the modern states
R TB
U
are considered as administrative states. The following aspects indicate the
BE @K
importance of Public administration.

1. Public administration is the pillar of the government: One can
imagine a government without legislature and judiciary in a state, but it
is impossible to imagine a government or state without administration
TO
(executive).
T
2. Striving to protect public interests: The public administration provides

O
N
services to the people from birth to death. Maintenance of law and order,
protection of life and property, providing justice, education, employment,
necessities of life and other services. Its responsible for national defence,
and bringing economic equality.
3. Implementation of the law and policies : Public administration
enforce or implement laws and policies to regulate the activities of people
in society and maintain law and order. If public administration does not
function properly or effectively the policies of government remain mere
declarations on paper.
59
Strength and Social Security : Society consist of people who belong to
various social and economic classes. The welfare of poor and weak in the
society is also the responsibility of States and other state administered
institutions (Government). Social and economic support of government is
essential for the many people like poor, women, children, tribals, disabled,
senior citizens, orphans and destitutes etc. The policies implemented
for the upliftment of these are called social security policies for example
pension schemes for widows, senior citizens, physically disabled people,
providing youth fund to overcome unemployment problem. National food
security mission (NFSM) has started for providing food security to people
below poverty line (BPL) are the examples for social security policies. The
public administration implements above policies to ensure strengthens
social security to the needy people of the society.
ED
Assist the legislature as well as executive: Public administration
H
implements clause enacted by legislature and policies and plans of
IS
executive. The public administration provides the necessary statistical
BL
EP S
R TB
data and information, thus public administration plays an important role

U
in formulation and implementation of public policies. The administration

BE @K
provides necessary details of legislation in drafting the law.

Scope of the Public Administration: There are differences of opinion
among the thinkers about the scope of public administration Woodrow
TO
Wilson, LD White etc. Have advocated and integrated view of public

administration. According to them the study of the three organs of
T
O
government namely the Legislature, executive and judiciary comes in the

N
scope of public administration.

Luther Gullick, Herbert, A. Simon etc., advocated narrow view of public
administration. According to them the scope of public administration is
limited only to the activities of the executive organ of the government.
View of POSDCORB: Luther Gullick has shown the scope of public
administration in the word POSDCORB each letter of the word stands for
a function of public administration.
1) P (Planning): Prepare plan for the task to be performed by the
government missionary and procedure for their implementation
60
2) O (Organising): Creation of administrative system like departments,
corporations, divisions, subdivisions etc., to achieve the prescribed
goal organising and distributing the tasks to be performed by various
departments.
3) S (Staffing) : Recruitment, training and determining the terms of service
of the staff required to perform administrative functions.
4) D (Directing): Issuing orders and directions to various departments
from time to time in carrying out the decisions of government.
5) CO (Coordinating): To eliminate conflicts, differences among different
departments of Government and coordinate their actions.
6) R (Reporting) : subordinates need to give report to the superiors
on documentation, research and the working activities of various
ED
departments also reports to the legislature through investigation.
H
IS
7) B (Budgeting) : Management of finance and planning budget calculation,
BL
EP S
auditing etc.
R TB
U
The above functions shows the scope of public administration.
BE @K
Recruitment : Successful public administration requires efficient staff.

These personnel need to be selected in a systematic manner, so that
recruitment is the process of selecting suitable persons for suitable
TO
posts (placement). Good and efficient public administration depends on

recruitment of good officials when qualified, efficient and honest people
T
are appointed to the administration through proper methods, they will try
O
N
to develop administration by activeness, intelligence and efficient manner.

Recruitment plays a very important role in personnel management O Glenn
Stahl defines “recruitment as the cornerstone of administrative structure”.
Methods of recruitment:
a) Direct recruitment and
b) Indirect recruitment
a) Direct recruitment: Direct recruitment is a scientific and popular
method. The qualified candidates are selected through competitive
examinations in a definite method is referred as direct recruitment. The
61
candidates seeking appointment through direct recruitment must possess
some special and required qualifications. For example recruitment of civil
servants.
b) Indirect recruitment: It is also called as internal recruitment. The
appointment of personal already in government services to higher post
on the basis of their qualification and seniority (service) this is also the
procedure of promotion and giving increment. This method is practiced
generally in all countries of the world. This method is also practiced in
India.
UPSC : Union Public Service Commission is a constitutional body
established according to the Article 315 of the constitution. The commission
consists of one chairman and 10 members. They’re appointed by the
ED
President of India. Their term of office is 6 years or 65 years of age whichever
is earlier. The president of India is having powers to remove them on
H
IS
grounds of misconduct and incompetence. The commission functions
BL
EP S
independently without interference from legislature and executive. The
R TB
U
commission will have a secretary. The union public service commission
BE @K
headquarter is at in New Delhi.

Functions: The UPSC functions according to article 320 of the constitution
are as follows:
TO
1) To conduct competitive examinations for recruitment of group A and

B posts of union government.
T
O
2) Conducting tests personally for direct recruitment.

N
3) To advise the government on guidelines to be followed in promotions

and transfers of various posts .
4) To advise the government to take disciplinary actions against
the inappropriate behaviour of the officials in Central and State
Governments.
5) To advise the government on any matter on the instructions of the
President of India.
62
The commission conducts competitive exams and personality tests for
the Civil services, Engineering service, Medical services and Defence
service at National level. Among these the exams conducted for Indian
Civil Service is the most important. IAS (Indian Administrative service)
IPS (Indian police service) IFOS (Indian Forest service) IFS (Indian
Foreign service) IRS (Indian revenue service) IAAS (Indian audit and
account service) are important civil services.
For recruitment of above services the tests are conducted in three
phases namely 1) Preliminary exams 2) Mains and 3) Personality test
(interview).
State Public service commission: According to Article 315 of the
constitution there is a provision for state Public service commission.
They are constitutional bodies. There is provision for joint Public service
ED
commissions for two or more states (JSPSC). But they are not constitutional
H
bodies, these are statutory bodies.
IS
BL
Karnataka Public Service Commission (KPSC) : According to Article 315
EP S
R TB
of the Indian constitution on 18th May 1951 KPSC has been established.
U
BE @K
The commission presently consists of one chairman and 11 members. They

are appointed by the governor, the term of office is 6 years or 62 years of
age which ever is earlier. The head office of KPSC is in Bengaluru. It has
regional offices in Mysuru, Belgavi, Kalaburagi and Shivamogga etc.
TO
There is a secretary to look after day to day administrative affairs of the

commission and controller of exams to look after examination functions.
T
O
FUNCTIONS:
N
1) Recruitment of Gazzetted Officers to the State Government services

through competitive exams and personality tests and non Gazzetted
Officers through competitive exams as per law. For example Sub
Divisional Officers, Deputy Superintendent of Police, Tahasildar,
Commercial Tax Officers etc.
2) Conducting personality tests for candidates to be appointed to certain
posts.
3) Conducting departmental exams twice a year for government employees.
63
4) To advise the government on disciplinary and promotion cases.
5) To carry out coordination work for various competitive exams
conducted in various State, Centres on behalf of the Union Public
Service Commission.
Law and Order: Law and order is essential for the peace, happiness, unity
and development of the nation.
In today’s fast growing society, maintaining law and order is an
important task.
Law and order are the two sides of same coin. The rule of law is essential
for the protection of all. Law and order is mentioned in the 7th schedule
of the constitution (state list). So maintaining law and order is one of the
main duties of the state. The Central Government has the constitutional
ED
power to direct the states in maintaining the law and order.
H
IS
The Role of Central Government
BL
EP S
The responsibility of maintaining law and order by Central Government

R TB
U
is mentioned in many articles of the constitution. For example, protecting
BE @K
the nation from external aggression is mentioned in the article 355 of the
constitution. In case of failure of constitutional machinery in states the
President of India can declare state emergency according to article 356.
TO
The Union Home Ministry has armed forces to provide security to the
public and through them maintains law and order. Following are the
T
important armed forces.

O
N
1) CRPF (Central Reserve Police Force): The force assist state police in
suppressing riots and maintaining law and order and also undertakes
relief work in any part of the country in case of natural calamities.
2) Border Security Force (BSF) : This force is protecting the borders
of India with Pakistan and Bangladesh and also prevents criminal
activities along these borders.
3) RPF (Railway Protection Force) : It prevents railway crimes and
investigate them. They protect railway passengers and railway assets
like railway tracks, work shops etc.
64
4) CISF (Central Industrial Security Force): It provides security to large
scale industries in public sector, airports, harbours, provides security
to institutions like note and coin minting centers.
The Central Government plays an important role in maintaining law and
order in the country by coordinating and carrying special responsibilities
The government with its powers, expertise service and responsibility through
its relevant departments continuously guides the state governments to
maintain law and order.
Role of State Police system : The primary responsibility of state
government is to maintain law and order to discharge these responsibilities.
The state government has a police administration consist of an executive
class and advisory class. In the states the police department is under Home
ED
Minister. This ministery is responsible to look after police administration.
H
The home secretary is the administrative head of the home department and
IS
he/she is an IAS officer. He/She advises and assists the home minister
BL
EP S
in discharge of his duties. The home department performs the task of

R TB
U
supervision and coordination of police administration.
BE @K
The structure of police administration is as follows.

Home Minister
↓
TO
Home Secretary
↓
T
O
Director General and Inspector General of Police (DG and IGP)

N
(Head of the state police Department)

↓
Director Genral of Police (DGP)
↓
Additional Director Genral of Police (ADGP)
↓
Inspector General of Police (IGP)
↓
65
Deputy Inspector General of Police (DIG)
(Head of Sub Zonal Office)
↓
Superintendent of Police (SP)
(District Police Officer)
↓
Additional Superintendent of Police (ASP)
(Additional District Superintendent of Police)
↓
Deputy Superintendent of Police (DySP)
(Head of Sub Divisional Office)
↓
ED
Circle Police Inspector (CPI)
H
(Head of Circle Office)
IS
BL ↓
EP S
R TB
Subinspector of Police (PSI)

U
BE @K
(Head of the Police Station)

↓
Assistant Subinspector (ASI)
↓
TO
Head Constable (HC)

T
↓
O
N
Police Constable (PC)

The police system is playing a very important role in the maintainance
of law and order.
Know this :
In case of any untoward incident you can file a complaint
at the nearest police station. After filling complaint
FIR(first information report)will be recorded.
(DG and IGP - Director General and Inspector General of Police)
66
Exercise
I. Fill in the blanks in the following incomplete sentences
1) The father of public administration is _____________.
2) The word Public administration was first used by ____________.
3) The members of UPSC are appointed by_____________.
4) _________Article of Indian constitution mentions about state Public
service commission.
II. Discuss in groups and answer the following questions
5) Public administration is very essential at present. Discuss.
6) Public administration functions from birth to death of a person.
ED
Justify the statement.
H
7) Explain about the types of recruitment.
IS
8) What is the role of state in maintaining law and order?
BL
EP S
R TB
U
III. Project
BE @K
1) Make a list of exams conducted by Union Public Service Commission

for various services.
2) Write down the hierarchy of rank of state police administrative
TO
system.
T
IV. Activity
O
N
1) Visit your nearest police station, discuss with a police officer,

prepare a report about the role of police department in maintaining
law and order.
2) Collect information about traffic rules from traffic police officer
and prepare a report.

67
Chapter-7
CHALLENGES OF INDIA AND
THEIR REMEDIES
We learn about the following in this chapter:
• Communalism • Economic inequality
• Regionalism • Population Explosion
• Illitracy • Poverty
• Corruption • Profiteering
• Gender discrimination (Status of Women) • Smuggling
• Gender Minorities
ED
Since 1947 we have been facing a number of problems both internally
H
and externally. Those problems have to be solved through proper planning
IS
and good governance. In our democratic system people have to co-operate
BL
EP S
the Government-at center, state and local levels inorder to find solutions
R TB
U
to these problems.
BE @K
As such, is it our ardent duty to know the problems of our Country?

Of course, we must be aware of those national issues and find out suitable
remedies also. Most of these problems are man made issues and national
hazards. Hence, we have to seek proper humanitarian solutions. Proper
TO
legislative reforms, able administration impartial judicial system and

popular support are essential to find out remedies for these ills. Let us
T
learn about these problems.

O
N
1. Communalism : Communalism is one of the biggest evils of Indian

society. It refers to the split of the whole national community on the basis
of religion and it refers to the strong feeling that their group identities
and interests are opposed to each other. Communalism creates religious
division of society resulting in mutual distrust and threat. In other words, it
manifests itself in social groupism, economic antagonism and even political
rivalry. Communalism in India is a menace which is capable to disrupt
the very unity and integrity of our nation. Communalism propagates hate-
philosophy among religious groups. It leads to social unrest and even the
loss of life and property. Communalism spreads with unwarranted mutual
accusation and physical combat among the religious groups.
68
The ‘Divide and rule policy’ of the British Government has considered
the interests of religious groups above national interests. Communal
forces in the country make effort to promote their respective ideological
interests. There are situations where people promote their own religious
interest and look the other religions with suspicion. This hampers the
unity and the very strength of the nation. Communal harmony is vitiated
due to this philosophy as it spreads hostile atmosphere. The nation should
make efforts to overcome these problems.
So, proper precaution has to be taken to curb communalism they are
as follows. Uniform civil code, equal treatment of all citizens and practice
of secularism in all aspects of public life.
Measures to be taken to control communalism are as follows:
• Strengthening the secular principles in all fields. Developing a secular
ED
nationalism that inspire interfaith equality. Treating all citizens equally.
H
Implementing confirm civil code, Adopting Secular principles in Education.
IS
Enforcing orderly legal system, Developing a strong nationalism spirit.
BL
EP S
Creating awareness among people about communal harmony. Stress

R TB
U
on thoughts of Nationalism, By above measures communalism can be
BE @K
controlled and a harmonious environment can be created in the society.

2. Regionalism : Regionalism means the strong feeling of people in favour
of the local area in which they live. A vast country like India naturally
is having different regional identities. To certain reasonable limit, this
TO
regionalism is considered tolerable. It helps the people to take initiative for

the all-round progress of their local areas. But, many a time this extreme
T
O
regionalism harms national unity and integrity of the nation. The inter-
N
state border disputes and inter-state river water sharing disputes are the
main causes for Regionalism. It is essential that the people of each region
respect other region along with their own regional spirit must also think
about the progress of the country as a whole.
Measures to be taken to control regionalism are as follows.
Realising the problem caused by excessive regionalism the Government
of India has Undertaken many measures to control it.
The Preamble of our Constitution declares “We the people of India”
and thereby stresses Indian nationalism. It emphasizes national Unity
69
and integrity by upholding single national citizenship. But, at the same
time it provides enough space for regional development within the federal
structure.
Our constitution upholds the unity and integrity of the nation by providing
single citizenship in India. It has provided more opportunity for regional
development by implementing the elements of federal system. Our makers
of constitution have designed a quasi-federal system for India which give
out autonomy to the states. The central government coordinates the
activities of the state with a view to uphold the integrity of the nation.
“Ministry of development of North eastern region” has been set up for the
development of North eastern region of India.
Sub Regionalism
Regionalism in different areas within a state can be called Sub-
ED
Regionalism.
H
Regional imbalance is the main reason for such sub Regionalism. The
IS
problem of Regional Imbalance can be seen in Karnataka also. To eliminate
BL
EP S
R TB
the sub regional imbalance in Karnataka special priority has been given to
U
some areas. For this Dr. Nanjundappa committee. Malenadu development
BE @K
board. Kalyana Karnataka development board plain area development

board and coastal development authority are constituted for above purpose
special recognition is given to 7 districts of Kalyana Karnataka under article
371 (J) to redress regional imbalance.
TO
3. Illiteracy : In India illiteracy is a major Do you know this :

problem. We are yet to achieve full literacy “Democracy is only giving the
T
O
opportunity to development
in our Country. Poverty, migration, child
N
of skills in equal”. Dr.

labour, child marriage, assignment of S. Radhakrishna. The 4th
responsibility of baby care to elderly s u s t a i n a b l e d e v e l o p m e n t
children, lack of interests to give education goal of the 17 sustainable
to children are reasons for illiteracy. developments of the United
Nations in 2015 talks about
Education is important for national progress.
quality education.
In democracy every one should understand
one’s duties and responsibilities. So that we can solve the problem of
illiteracy.
There were 12% literates in India at the time of Independence. It has
been enhanced to 66% in 2001. By 2011 it has increased to 74%. Still
70
about 26% are illiterates. Hence Government Activity:
has taken up many steps to eradicate this Discuss and Prepare your
problem in 1988 ‘National Literacy Mission’, plan for eradicating illiteracy
‘Sarva Siksha Abhiyan’ has been launched in the Grama Panchayat area
in 2001 to provide free education for assuming you are the Grama
children of 6-14 years. It provides education Panchayat President.
to girls, physically challenged and Priority
for women awareness. It has also been established by Government of India
to make illiterates literate. ‘Sakshara Bharath’ programme has been
launched to eradicate illiteracy in 2009.
Recently through Article 21A of our Constitution education is made a
fundamental right. Right to Education-2009 (RTE - The Right of Children
to Free and Compulorty Education Act - 2009) has been guaranteed.
Compulsory free education has been implemented for the children between
ED
6 and 14 years.
Do you know this :
H
4. Corruption : Corruption is one of the
IS
major problems of public life of our nation. Lokayukta Institution :
BL
EP S
Practically it is rampant in every walk of In 1980 The state of
R TB
Karnataka enacted Karnataka

U
life and at every level. Corruption means
Lokayukta Act and accordingly
BE @K
an inducement to do wrong by bribery or th Lokayuktha organisation was

other unlawful means. It is going away brought into existence. Lokayukta
from what is right and legally correct. It and Upa-Lokayukta. are the
refers to improper and selfish exercise of heads of this body. complaint to
power and influence attached to our Lokayukta if there is corruption
TO
public life. It is abuse of power for personal in Government work, unnessary

delay or harassment to the public.
gains setting aside all rules and
T
Justice A.D. Kushal was the first

O
regulations. It is like an epidemic of public Lokayukta of Karnataka

N
life.
Causes of corruption : The causes of corruption affecting public are as
follows, casteism, nepotism, lack of good responsibility, lack of strict law,
selfish nature of man, calculation of avoiding risk, lack of strict supervision.
Ineffective anti-corruption agencies and Political interference etc.
Activity:
Web of corruption : Corruption includes crimes
like tax- evasion, hoarding, smuggling, Discuss with the teacher
your suggestions to eradicate
misappropriation, fraud, violation of rules
the scourge of corruption as a
of foreign exchanges, professional citizen of India.
misconduct etc.
71
In 2018 comprehensive education programme was implemented.
NavBharat literacy programme has been started. All these programmes
have been implemented for the development of literacy.
Consequences of corruption : Corruption leads to various negative
consequences they are : corruption is one of the illegal act, it is antisocial
and immoral act. staunch enemy of good administration, it disrupts
transparency and accountability in administration. Political corruption
also leads to organised crimes. It allows for bureaucratic loopholes and
fraud in public service sectors. It weakens the social, economic and political
system of the country.
Measures taken to control corruption : Mere criticizing corruption and
compromise with it cannot control corruption. Therefore the Government
of India has undertaken measures to control the widespread corruption
ED
in administration are as follows. The institution Lokpal has been established
at National level and lokayukta institution Know this :
H
has been established in the states. Central Pandit Jawaharalal Nehru
IS
vigilance commission CVC has also set up
BL said the system of that country
EP S
prevention of corruption Act 1988 has been can be understood by checking

R TB
U
the status of women.
implemented. Right to information act 2005
BE @K
(RTI) has been implemented. CC cameras installed in government offices

schemes like Sakala, Janaspandan, Janasevak etc. have been implemented
complaint (Grievance) boxes or kept in government offices.
What else can be done to eradicate corruption ?
TO
Wide spread corruption can be eradicated through a strong moral

T
base, both personal and societal. As such, in order to eradicate corruption,

O
strong political will as well as public support is essential. In other words,

N
good political leadership, accountable bureaucracy and politically matured

citizens with civic sense have to struggle jointly to control the menace of
corruption. Strong and strict penal system is essential to root out corruption
at all levels.
Activity :
5. Gender Discrimination (Status of
Interview women members
Women) : As ‘The hand that weighs the
of a local organisation near you
cradle can rule the world’. Women can be about the status of women.
seen to have excelled in all fields. In India
achievements of women even in Pre-Independence era. We remember
Jhansi Rani Laxmi Bai, Rani Chennamma, Anne Besent, Kasturba Gandhi,
72
Savithri Bai Phule, Fatima Sheikh etc. In these days women work as
teachers, engineers. doctors, pilots, astronauts, police, politicians, defence
personnel, foreign service, research, cultural and public administration
so on. Still the status of women has to be improved further. Gender
discrimination has to be removed. Social system, poverty, illiteracy are
the reasons for this backwardness. This poses problem to the national
progress also.
Indira Gandhi Prathibha Devisingh Sarojini Naidu Suchetha Krupalani Meirakumar

First women Patil First women First Women First women First women
ED
Prime Minister President Governor Chief Minister Lokasabha Speaker
In India, Indira Gandhi became Prime Minister and Prathibha Devisingh
H
Patil became President. Fathima Beevi, the first women judge of Supreme
IS
court and Smt. V.S. Ramadevi, First Chief Election Commissioner. A
BL
EP S
good number of women discharged duties as Governors, Chief Ministers,

R TB
U
Ambassadors, and occupy many such high positions till day.
BE @K
Measures undertaken to eradicate gender discrimination : Many

measures have been taken to improve the status of Women. The ministry
of women and child welfare have been started at the centre and States
to improve education and development of women. Reservation have been
TO
given to women, in recruitment in Central and state government jobs.

National and State women’s commission have been established. Women
T
development corporation has been set up at state level. Sakhi one stop
O
centre started. Women violence protection domestic Act 2005 was enacted.
N
“Prohibition of sexual harassment of women in working place” Act 2013

has implemented. In Karnataka 50% of seats reserved for women in local
self governments. Helpline number 1091 facility for women provided.
Parliament has passed Nari Shakti Vandana Adiniyam act giving 33%
of reservation to women in Lok sabha and State Legislative assemblies.
According to 128 amendment bill to Indian constitution.
* Manjamma Jogati - Is the first transgender minority person to serve as the
president of the Karnataka Janpada Academy.
* Shabnam Moussi became the first person from the transgender minority
community to be elected as a member of the Legislative Assembly.
73
6. Gender Minorities : Physically and mentally, individuals who had feel
and act opposite to their genitial behaviour are called gender minorities.
Gender discrimination also includes discrimination against gender
minorities in general. Gender minorities are those who have a physical
and social behaviour different from the gender they were born with. It is a
community of individuals with both male and female physical characters.
Being in the midst of a society formed by the social norms of a patriarchal
system they are unable to leave with a certain uniqueness like ordinary
men or women they are confused whether to live like a woman or man.
They are addressed by various special names like Ardhanareeshwara and
transgender in order to hold the personal and community dignity of those
persons. It is appropriate to address them as gender minorities according
to their activist Akkai Padmashali.
ED
The social ostracism and discrimination faced by the gender minorities
are severe and different from the discrimination faced by the oppressed
H
communities. From family, education, neighborhood, health, employment
IS
to the general public, the lack of attitude to accept that they are also
BL
EP S
human beings is evident.

R TB
U
Actions taken for the empowerment of gender minorities:

BE @K
A number of measures have been taken in India to eliminate

discrimination against the gender minorities. In 2014, the Supreme Court
gave a landmark judgment regarding the gender minority. Based on this
TO
judgement the central and state government have taken several initiatives.
They are as follows.
T
O
The Government of India has enacted the Protection of Rights

N
of Transgender Minority Protection Act-2019. It has been declared a

punishable offence that no one can separate trans-gender persons from
their families and force them to leave their homes, communities and
villages. Government of India under the Ministry of Empowerment and
Justice has implemented a sub-project ‘Integrated Rehabilitation for the
Welfare of Gender Minority Persons’. Under ‘SMILE’ (SMILE-Support for
Marginalized Individuals for Livelihood and Enterprise) scheme. A National
Council for Gender Minority Persons have been formed. A National Portal
for Trans gender has been created. Shelter houses named ‘Garima Griha’
are being constructed.
74
It was praised in 2008, Tamil Nadu Government had set up the Gender
Minorities Welfare Development Board. The Government of Karnataka
has implemented the Gender Minority State Policy in 2017. Accordingly
1% reservation has been given in state government posts, besides giving
opportunities for them to get education, to join government jobs and contest
elections.
7. Economic Inequality : Increasing economic inequality has been a point
of growing concern of India. It refers to the widening of the gap between the
poor and the rich sections of the society. Even this inequality phenomenon
is more and more significant between rural and urban societies.
The poor are often disillusioned (disappointed) since the benefits of
Government programmes do not properly reach the doorsteps of the poor
masses. Even the high salary syndrome in the private sectors, the operation
of multinational companies, the increasing segment of white collar jobs,
ED
profiteering, corruption- all have their combined effect to widen the gap
between the ‘haves’ (rich) and ‘haven’t, (poor) in India.
H
IS
It is the primary duty of the Government to take steps for the bridging
BL
EP S
of gaps between the rich and the poor people. Planning in India should be
R TB
inclusive and give proper attention to minimize these disparities. The poor
U
and tribals should be made partners rather than victims of development.

BE @K
Many a time they are displaced from their land and dwelling places for
establishing industries and constructing dams etc. At that time proper care
has to be taken for their suitable rehabilitation and earning opportunities.
TO
Proper economic reforms, careful fiscal policies, healthy taxation

system coupled with small scale and rural based industries should be
T
undertaken to remove economic inequality.

O
N
Growth of large industrial houses, monopolies are to be properly

regulated. So that fruits of national growth can never be unequally
distributed. Land reforms, labour oriented policies, social securities etc.
to have positive role in minimizing this economic gap.
8. Over-Population : India is the second most populous country in the
world. India possesses about 2.4% of the total land
Activity :
area of the world. 17.5% of the world population.
Discuss population is
During the decade of 1991-2001, population grew
both a complement and a
from 84 crores to 102.7 crores. As per 2011 bane for the development
Census the total population of India had reached of the country.
to 121 crores. The growth rate was about 17.70%
75
during the past decade. Increasing birth rate, decreasing death rate, rise
of long live period, decrease of infant mortality rate are the factors leading
towards the over population in India.
Rapid population growth has created problems such as unemployment,
illiteracy, poverty, beggary, housing, health, water scarcity etc.
Methods to solve problems caused by population explosion :
Literacy, technical education, agriculture development, industrial
progress, increasing exports creation of additional employment
opportunities in urban and rural areas are the methods or ways to solve
the problems caused by over population.
Demographic Divident : Indian population is presently a dividend in
Indian context demographic dividend is find as its 62% of total population
ED
is working population this condition of having more working population
is called demographic dividend. The country to take advantage of the
H
IS
population dividend without considering its population as a burden by
BL
providing good health care, education skill and training to them the people
EP S
R TB
of the country can we made a human resource with knowledge, skills and
U
abilities and make them useful strength for the development of the country.
BE @K
9. Poverty : Poverty is also one of the foremost problems of India.

Poverty is inability to get sufficient food, clothing, housing and other basic
necessities of life. Both in rural and urban areas in India poverty still exists.
TO
Measures adopted to Eradicate poverty :

T
Since Independence many programmes have Activity :

O
been launched both by the Central and State List the Schemes under
N
Governments to eradicate poverty. Five year plans taken by the Government

in India are directed to eradicate poverty, Jawahar of Karnataka to eradicate
R o z g a r y o j a n a , M a h a t m a G a n d h i R u r a l poverty.
Employment Guarantee Programe, Pradhan
Mantri Gramodaya Yojanas are some of the schemes undertaken to reduce
poverty. Ours is a country with vast natural as well as human resources.
Proper utilization of these resources on productive lines could reduce
poverty in our country. Through increasing production and proper
distribution of wealth, the equal distribution of national wealth can be
achieved.
76
10. Profiteering : Profiteering means the excess profits earning trend
at the cost of general public or consumers. This refers to the gaining of
huge money by easy method in business. Making more profit with easy
methods in business is one of the evil. Easy profiterring in this way more
likely cause harm to society.
Causes of profiteering :
Monopoly of business houses, spread of multi Activity :
national companies, unhealthy market practices, Dicuss why is onion
hoarding, black marketing, lack of proper price price in some cases
monitoring by commercial authorities are some Rs. 80 and some time
of the factors which lead to profiteering. Profiteering available for 20?
is immoral.
Effects of profiteering :
ED
The ill effects of profiteering follows, profiteering increases economic
crimes in society. It leads to creation of more black money, encourages
H
IS
unethical business transactions and leads to rise in prices. That further
BL
leads to increase in inflation and increases poverty. Most of the income of
EP S
R TB
people goes into the hands of few wealthy merchant class.

U
BE @K
Measure adopted to control profiteering :

Proper governmental regulations, control of price index, expansion of
cooperative marketing sector and proper taxation policy are some of the
remedial measures to check the profiteering.
TO
11. Smuggling : Smuggling is the act of secretly bringing goods from foreign
countries and sending to other countries without paying any import and
T
export duties. The smuggling is dangerous to national interests. It leads to

O
N
undesirable financial activities. The nations industries and market suffer

a lot from smuggling. Checking smuggling has became very essential.
Smuggling can be checked effectively by encouraging import
substitutions. Suitable modulations of domestic market. prices, proper
export-import policy (Exim), strict coastal vigilance service, punitive
measures to economic crimes and inter-state trade agreements are the
main remedies to check smuggling. Proper awareness among the citizens
is to be created that smuggling is an anti-national and economically a
crime. Social boycott of smuggled goods have an great effect on checking
smuggling.
77
We as the citizen of India should not think that it is only the duty and
responsibility of the government to solve these problems facing by India.
But we should know that it is everyone’s responsibility. We all will get a
benefit if we join hands with government in fighting against these problems.
EXERCISES
I. Fill in the blanks with suitable words:
1 Developing deep attachment with the place of living is called ______.
2 The Right to information act was implemented in the year ______.
3 According to 2011 census the literacy rate was _______.
4 __________ was the first woman judge of Supreme Court of India.
II. Discuss in groups and answer.
ED
5 What are the measures that can be undertaken to control
communalism ?
H
IS
6. Mention the steps taken to eradicate illiteracy.
BL
EP S
7. What are the measures undertaken by the government of India to

R TB
U
eliminate Gender discrimination?
BE @K
8. Which are the methods to be undertaken to solve problems due

to the rise of population explosion?
9. Who are Gender Minorities? What initiatives have been taken to
eliminate discrimination of Gender Minorities?
TO
10. Make a list of programmes implemented to eradicate poverty.

T
11. Profiteering results in various negative consequences. Justify the

O
statement.
N
12. What do you mean by smuggling. Give your suggestions to control it.
III. Activities:
1 Visit a nearby trader and understand why prices of the commodities
fluctuate in the shops.
2 Conduct a debate on challenges facing by India which hindering
and affecting its development.

78
SOCIOLOGY
Chapter – 8
SOCIAL STRATIFICATION

• Social stratification
• Differences in people
• Untouchability – a social evil
• Measures to eradicate untouchability
ED
Social stratification refers to the practice of classifying people as
upper class and lower class on the basis of income, education, caste,
H
colour, gender, occupation, intelligence etc. This stratification has been
IS
done by the society. For instance, opportunities for good nutritious food,
BL
EP S
R TB
school, employment are more for children born in rich families. Children
U
in poor families lack such opportunities. Children are not responsible for
BE @K
the segregation of people as rich and poor. But they have to reap the evil
effects of stratification created by society.
Various kinds of social stratification can Activity:
be seen in different periods and in different Collect information about the
TO
countries. For instance, the caste system has projects of the government
undertaken to eradicate
T
been in existence in India from thousands

O
discrimination in society.
of years. This system determines whether
N
the person belongs to the upper caste or

the lower caste. Thus, some people belonging to certain low-castes were
considered shudras and untouchables, and they were deprived of right to
food, employment and even right to life. Governments in India have striven
to provide a constitutional remedy for this injustice.
Stratification can be seen in all societies. The whites in
America treated the blacks as slaves and traded them. Similarly,
discrimination is made everywhere between the haves and the
haven’ts.
79
Social in Equality :
The system of social stratification leads to inequality and differences. It
humiliates the people classified as the low class. For example, the blacks
in America were not permitted to attend the schools of the whites. In India,
untouchables were not allowed to take water
from public wells or lakes. Do you know this?
Positive prejudice or bias:
Prejudice created due to discrimination:
Usually we consider ‘our
The great Kannada poet, Pampa declared: people’ as ‘good’. This feeling
‘Truly, the whole mankind is one’. (ªÀiÁ£ÀªÀ PÀÄ® helps us to live in harmony.
However, if it becomes
vÁ£ÉÆAzÉÃ ªÀ®A) This denotes that all human
intense, it can be detrimental.
beings are one. In spite of this, people practice
various kinds of discrimination based on
caste, gender, region, rich and poor, which create many prejudices in the
ED
minds of people. Prejudice is the opinion a person forms about another
H
person or community even before he gets to know them. This kind of opinion
IS
may be positive or negative. However, prejudices created by discrimination
BL
EP S
lead to development of feelings like impatience, contempt, disrespect and

R TB
U
hatred. As a result, social inequality develops leading to social conflicts.
BE @K
Untouchability- a social evil:

The stratification in India can be seen in the caste system. People in
India are spread among innumerable castes. Some castes among these
TO
are considered to be high whereas the others are considered to be low.

Untouchables had been considered to be at the lowest rung in society in
T
this caste stratification.

O
N
Untouchability is an inhuman practice of our society. Mahatma

Gandhi called it a ‘stigma’ on the Hindu society. Due to the practice of
untouchability, people victimized by it were deprived of social, cultural,
religious, educational and political facilities and opportunities. This
condition continued for some centuries. However, the situation has changed
now. At present, the constitution guarantees the provision of all facilities to
people of all classes and castes. People belonging to backward castes and
classes are getting special facilities. The practice of untouchability is dying
down as a result of the gradual increase in literacy. This is a heartening
development, and has helped to promote social harmony.
80
Measures to eradicate untouchability:
Jyotiba Phule, Swami Vivekananda, Dr.B.R.Ambedkar and others
made immense efforts to wipe out the
stigma of untouchability. In spite of their Do you know this?
attempts, it has not been eradicated • Sections 15, 16, 17, 38 and
completely. Many laws have been 46 of the Constitution stipulate
brought into force to control it. that there should be no
discrimination among Indian
Section 17 of the Constitution
citizens.
prohibits the practice of untouchability.
The ‘Untouchability Crime Act’ was • Sections 16 (4) and 320 (4)
implemented in 1955. Some lacunae guarantee reservation in the
of this Act were rectified and the Act employment sector to scheduled
was amended as ‘Citizens’ Rights castes and tribes.
Protection Act’ in 1976. According to • Sections 330, 332 and 334
guarantee reservation in the
ED
this Act, practice of untouchability is a
punishable offence. Besides, universal political field to scheduled
H
suffrage and right to equality have castes and tribes.
IS
been guaranteed in the constitution to • Section 30 guarantees the
BL
EP S
all citizens of the country. All people right to religious and linguistic
R TB
U
belonging to backward castes, especially minorities to establish their own
BE @K
the scheduled castes, have been eductional institutions.

provided reservation in educational, • Section 25 guarantees free
political, economic and employment entry to all people to social and
opportunities. The Regulation of 1989 religious places.
confers special responsibilities to
TO
the state governments with regard to

eradication of untouchability. In this manner, independent India has been
T
O
striving to provide equal opportunities to all its citizens by showing great

N
interest in curbing the evil practice of untouchability.
EXERCISES
1. ‘Truly the whole mankind is one’ is declared by __________.
2. ‘Untouchability is a stigma on Hindu religion’. This was told by

_________
81
3. Section _________ of the Constitution declares that practice of
untouchability is a punishable offence.
II Discuss the following in groups and write the answers:
4. What is meant by social stratification?
5. How has social stratification been created?
6. What is meant by prejudices?
7. What are the constitutional and legal measures undertaken to

eradicate untouchability? Explain.
8. What are the suggestions to stop the social evil of untouchability?
ED
III Activity:
H
IS
1. Read the biographies of social reformers who strived to eradicate
BL
EP S
untouchability.
R TB
U
IV Project:
BE @K
1. Write down your suggestions for eradication of untouchability and

discuss with your teacher.

TO
T
O
N
82
Chapter - 9
WORK AND ECONOMIC LIFE

• Division of Labour and classes
• Discrimination in labour
• Unemployment – types, reasons, consequences and solutions.
• Organized and unorganized labourers
Labour is an act performed to achieve a particular goal. If an individual

is able, through the exercise of his energy or effort, to get economic benefit
or any other benefit in material form, it is called labour.
ED
Labour is an integral part of our economic life. It is essential to lead
H
one’s life. Labour is related to the external purpose of material benefit and
IS
involves effort. In addition to this, there is also the factor of fulfillment of
BL
EP S
basic requirements of life. Depending upon the economic life, the work
R TB
U
assumes various forms and varies from society to society. It also varies
BE @K
from time to time.

Division of Labour and classes:
Division of labour means work being
done by people depending on their interests,
TO
tastes, abilities, age, expertise, skills and

gender. For ex: the cloth that we wear is
T
manufactured by the collective effort of

O
agriculturists, weavers, dyers, traders and

N
tailors who work at different places.

Division of labour leads to
specialization. Specialization means achieving sufficient expertise, training
and skill in any particular field. Division of labour has helped people to work
in various fields and earn economic profit. This has led to the creation of
economic strata and class system has been created by Division of Labour.
In modern days class system was created by industrialization.
In today’s industrialized society, specialization has become very
important. With specialization developing in every field, industries have
grown in number. Trade and commerce have expanded.
83
Paid work and unpaid work:
Work that provides wages, salary or any other material benefit is called
‘paid work’. Engaging in various activities like ploughing in fields, working
in factories, teaching in schools, constructing buildings, repairing vehicles
etc. has become inevitable in today’s complex society.
All human activities cannot be called work. Any activity undertaken
for self-satisfaction cannot be called work. It is an activity without material
benefit. Activities indulged in without any definite purpose, but which give
mental satisfaction are called unpaid work. Ex: an artist painting a picture
for his own satisfaction. etc., But in the caste and race system black and
lower caste people were forcefully working without pay.
Labour Discrimination
ED
Inequality at work and in wages is called labour discrimination.
Although both men and women are engaged in work, their jobs may not be
H
IS
the same. In most countries of the world including India, men are offered
BL
better jobs. Similarly, higher responsibilities and remuneration are also
EP S
R TB
extended. Women get lesser responsibilities and remuneration. However,

U
in the governmental sector, discrimination is rare. It is found more in

BE @K
unorganized sector.
There is another form of discrimination as regards work of men and
women. Nowadays, women are taking up employment in huge numbers.
TO
However, there is discrimination in the remuneration given to them. Though

they do exactly the same kind of work as men, the fact that they are being
T
paid less is nothing but exploitation. To put an end to this problem, the
O
Central Government has enacted Equal Wages Act in 1976. In the organized
N
sectors of major cities, this sort of discrimination is coming down.

Even the agricultural sector practices discrimination based on gender,
age and ability. Here too, there is inequality in the payment of wages. As
literacy is slowly improving, this kind of discrimination is coming down.
Unemployment
One of the major problems that is haunting the country’s economic
development and social structure is unemployment. Backward and
developing countries are already in its stranglehold. In India, this has
84
become a serious problem. Unemployment means inability to get work in
spite of proper age, ability and interest. Those who are willing to work but
are denied an opportunity to do so, are called unemployed.
Over-population, mechanization, too much of division of labour,
Social inequality, insufficient capital and illiteracy are the causes for
unemployment.
Unemployment leads to poverty, ill-health, crimes, corruption, family
disintegration, cheating, deception, robbery, prostitution etc. This is a
serious social malady.
Remedies for unemployment:
To tackle the problem of unemployment,
Discuss :
the government has planned many
programs. They are: population control, Unemployment is not a
ED
encouragement to cottage industries, problem. Though there are
agricultural development, industrial opportunities for employment,
H
development, educational reforms, five- we create unemployment by
IS
year plans, encouragement to vocational not utilizing those opportunities.
BL
EP S
education, rural development, employment-
R TB
U
guarantee programs etc. In recent years, information technology has made
BE @K
significant progress in the country resulting in innumerable employment

opportunities in the service sector.
Do you know this?

TO
Today rural areas are witnessing a shortage of qualified, employable

youth rather than lack of employment opportunities. The reason for this
T
phenomenon is that the rural youth are migrating to the cities in search
O
of better employment opportunities, thereby creating an acute shortage of

N
hands in the agricultural sector. Similarly, in the cities, there is a shortage

of skilled people.
Organised And Unorganised Workers

Organised Workers : Those who are working in specific fields which are
governed by legal rules and regulations are called Organized workers. In
the organized sector, every employee’s work is subject to specific terms
and conditions.
85
In the organized sector, there is organizational hierarchy. The workers
enjoy facilities of specialization, training, talent, experience and educational
qualifications. These employees’ day to day transactions are recorded in
written form. They get fixed wages, allowances, paid leave and pension
facilities. In addition, they get medical facility too. They have specific hours
of work.
The workers in insurance companies, educational institutions, banks
armed forces, private companies, government departments are identified
as organised workers.
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
TO
T
O
N
Unorganised Workers : People who work in areas which are not governed
by specific rules and regulations or unions, and lead their lives by earning
daily wages or material benefit in any other form, are called unorganized
workers. Since unorganized sector is very vast, it is not under government
control. For ex: domestic servants, construction workers, agricultural
labours, footpath hawkers, vehicle repairers, push-cart vegetable vendors
etc., also come under this group.
86
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
Problems of Unorganized workers : The work of unorganized workers is

not bound by any rules or regulations. They get only wages for their work
without any additional facilities or medical help. They are denied of job
TO
security, fixed wages and allowances. Sometimes unorganized workers

were harassed by entrepreneurs.
T
O
N
EXERCISES
I Fill in the blanks with suitable words :
1. Division of labour leads to __________.
2. Workers without special training are called _________.
3. Workers who have special training and expertise are called _______.
87
II Answer the following in one sentence each:
4. What is ‘Division of labour’?
5. What is ‘paid work’?
6. What is the meaning of ‘Unemployment’?
7. What are the reasons for unemployment ?
8. What are the effects of unemployment?
III Discuss the following in groups and answer them:

9. Explain the nature of discrimination in labour.
10. What are the measures for removal of unemployment?
11. What are the differences between organized and unorganized
workers?
ED
H
IV Activity :
IS
1. Make a list of organised and unorganised labourers in your area.
BL
EP S
R TB
U
V Project :
BE @K
1. Conduct an Interview with unorganised labourers and prepare a

report about their problems.
TO

T
O
N
88
GEOGRAPHY
CHAPTER – 10
INDIA - GEOGRAPHICAL POSITION
AND PHYSICAL FEATURES
We learn about the following in this chapter :

• Heritage of our country
• The origin and background of the word ‘Bharat’
• India’s geographical location, extent, land and water
boundaries and the neighbouring countries.
• India - Salient features of the physical divisions.
• India - physical divisions.
• Mountains, Plains and Coastal regions
ED
India exhibits unity in diversity, from ancient times. This variety
H
is unique to our country in the entire world, and as such, has given a
IS
rich heritage. When we observe a diverse of physical features, climatic
BL
EP S
conditions, natural vegetation and people, we feel this country can be
R TB
called a sub-continent.
U
BE @K
India’s position in the world: India is a peninsular located in South-East

Asia. It is also called ‘India’ and ‘Hindustan’. The name ‘India’ has been
derived from river Indus. It has been named ‘Bharat’ after the ancient
Indian king Bharata. The country is entirely in the Northern hemisphere.
It is wide in the North, tapering to form a triangle in the south, ending in
TO
the Indian Ocean.

T
Arcatic
O
N
Location of India in the world

89
N
O
T
TO
INDIA
BE @K
90
R TB
EP S
U
BL
IS
H
ED
Myanmar
Size: India is 32,87,263 square kilometers in area (32.87 lakh). It is the
seventh largest country in the world. It occupies about 2.4% of the world’s
total area. There are 28 States and 8 Union Territories. New Delhi is also
known as the ‘National Capital Territory’ (NCT). As per the 2011 Census,
India has a total population of 121 crores. It has about 17.50% of the
world’s population. India is the second largest country as far as population
is concerned and ranks behind China. Geographically India lies inbetween
Northern and Eastern hemispheres. This is an important peninsular in
the South Asia.
Facts / Files
Indian states / Union territories with two capitals.
1) Jammu and Kashmir - Srinagar (Summer Capital) and Jammu.
2) Uttar Khand - Bhararisain (Summer Capital) and Dehradun.
ED
3) Himachal Pradesh - Shimla and 2nd Capital is Dharmashala.
H
Latitudinal position: India extends from 8°4 to 37°6 in the North Latitude.
I I
IS
The total length from Kanyakumari in the South to Ladakh in the North
BL
EP S
is 3,214 kms. When the islands are also taken into consideration, ‘Indira
R TB
Point’ in the Great Nicobar Islands located at 6°45 is the southernmost

I
U
BE @K
point. Contrast to this ‘Indira Col’ of Ladakh is the Northern tip of India.
The Tropic of Cancer or 23°.30 North Latitude passes through Central
I
part of India.
Do you know this?
Longitudinal Position: With regard to
neighbouring Countries of India
TO
its longitudinal position, India extends

from 68°7 East to 97°25 East longitude.
I I
Length of Boundary
Countries
width India km
T
From East to West about 2933 kms.

O
Pakistan 3310
Indian Standard Time is based on
N
I Afghanistan 80
82.30 East longitude passing through China 3917
Prayagraj. It is the central longitude of Nepal 1752
India and the Indian Standard Time. Bhutan 587
Mayammar 1458
Frontiers and Neighbouring Countries: Bangladesh 4096
India being a peninsula, it has both Srilanka costline
land and water frontriers too. India has Maldeves costline
15,200 kms of land frontiers. The main India 15200
land of India has a coastline of 6100 km.
including Islands India has 7516.60 kms of coastline.
91
India shares land frontier with seven nations. In the North-west, it shares
with Afghanistan and Pakistan; in the North with China, Nepal and Bhutan;
in the East with Myanmar (Burma) and Bangladesh. Sri Lanka in the
south and Maldives in the south-west are also neighbouring countries of India.
Do you know this?

• The boundary line between India and Pakistan is called “Radcliffe Line”.
• The boundary line between India and China is called “McMahon Line”.
• The boundary line between India and Afghanistan is called “Durrand Line”.
PHYSICAL FEATURES OF INDIA
India has different types of relief features. These are found in

different parts of the country. Their history dates back to different
ED
geological periods and there are differences in the structure and surface
H
features. Based on these differences, the country is divided into four major
IS
divisions: BL
EP S
1. Northern Mountains :
R TB
U
The Himalayan mountain is the highest in the world and consists of
BE @K
highest peaks, deep valleys, Glaciers rivers etc. The Himalayan range begins
at the Pamir Knot in the west and extends upto Arunachala pradesh in
the East. It is about 2500 kms in length. These folded mountain ranges
are three main ranges: 1. Siwalik mountains (foothills of Himalaya) 2. The
TO
Himachal (middle Himalaya) 3.The Greater Himalayas (Himadri)

a) Siwalik Range : These hills are the most recent formations and are
T
located in the southern part. They have lesser height. They are also called
O
N
‘the Foothills’ of the Himalayas. These hills have narrow strips of plains
or valleys which are called “Dunes”. For example. Dehradune, Kota, Patli,
Chaukhamba, Udhampur and Kotli. These are about 600-1500 meters
above the sea level.
b) The Himachal (Middle Himalaya) (central) : They are about 3600
meters to 4,500 meters in height and are located between Siwalik and
the Greater Himalayas. They are about 60-80 kms in width. The lesser
Himalayas consist of many parallel mountain ranges. For ex.Pir Panjal,
Mahabharath range, Nagtibba, Mussoorie, etc. Kangra and Kulu are
the famous valleys. Shimla, Mussorie, Nainital, Ranikhet, Chakrata and
Darjeeling are the well known hill stations.
92
c) Greater Himalayas (Himadri) : These are known for the highest peaks
of the Himalayas and the earlier formed ranges of the Himalayas. This
range is completely covered with snow. Hence it is called ‘Himadri’ (abode
of snow). This is about 6000 meters to 8000 meters above sea level. The
highest peak, ‘Mount Everest’ (8848 meters) lies between Nepal and Tibet.
Other peaks of this range are Kanchenjunga, Dhaualagiri, Nanda Devi,
Gowrishankara etc. These peaks have many glaciers, the most famous
among them being Gangotri it is the origin of river Ganga. There are many
passes which not only provide transport facilities but are also excellent
tourist attractions. They are Kashmir’s Burzil, Zojila, Barala cha of
Himachal pradesh.
The range of fold mountains lying to the North of the Greater Himalayas
is called ‘trans Himalayas’. This consists of Karakoram range and Kailash
range, Godwin Austin or K2 is the highest peak in India (8611 mts). Ladakh
ED
plateau also lies in this region.
H
Importance of the Himalayas: The Himalayan mountains have influenced
IS
the life of Indians to a greater extent. They provide protection to India,
BL
EP S
by obstructing the cold winds from the North Asian regions. They are the
R TB
birth-place of many rivers. They form vast plains. They facilitate hydro-
U
electric power generation. They are the home to many types of plants
BE @K
and animals. They are a great treasure-house of minerals, and are also
significant for tourism and religious centers.
2. Northern great plain :
TO
The Great Plains of the North are also called ‘Sutlej-Ganga plains’.
They are found between the Himalayan Mountains of the North and the
T
Peninsular Plateau in the south. These plains stretch from the plains of
O
the river Indus in the west to the Brahmaputra valley in the East. Their
N
breadth is around 2,400 kms whereas the width is 70 km to 500 kms. This
area has the lEast variation in height and is completely flat. The entire
plain is formed by the deposition of alluvial soils brought by the rivers
which rises in the Himalayas.
Do you know this?
Babar, Bhangar and Khadar: When the Himalayan rivers enter the plains,
they deposit rock there. These are called ‘Babar’. The area with loamy soil
deposited of the ancient times is called ‘Bhangar’. The loamy soil formed in
recent times is called ‘Khadar’.
93
3. Peninsular Plateau: The Peninsular Plateau is the largest of all
physiographic divisions of India. Moreover, it is the most ancient, and is
a part of the Gondwana landmass which existed in the early stages of the
earth, as said by the geologists.
ED
H
IS
BL Myanmar
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
TO
T
O
N
The Peninsular Plateau stretches from the south of the

Sutlej-Ganga plains upto the Indian ocean in the south. Its total area is
94
around 16 lakh sq.km. It stretches from the Aravalli mountains in the
North to Kanyakumari in the South. It extends approximately 1400 kms.
from the Western Ghats in the West to the Rajmahal hills of Jharkhand
in the East. This peninsular Plateau is in the form of a triangular shape
being broad in the North and narrow towards the South. It is bounded
by the Arabian Sea in the West, Bay of Bengal in the East and the Indian
ocean in the South.
In the North of Peninsular Plateau, we find mainly the Vindhya
mountains, Satpura hills, Aravali hills, Malwa plateau, Chotanagpur
plateau and rivers like the Narmada, Tapti and Damodar flow amidst
these, along with many small rivers. All these are together to the North
of Narmada referred to as the ‘Central Plateau’. To the South of these,
there is the Deccan Plateau. Mahadev and Maikhal ranges, Amarakantak
ED
hills, Rajamahal hills are to the North of Deccan plateau. To the west of
H
the Deccan Plateau, there are the Western Ghats. In Maharashtra and
IS
Karnataka, these are referred to as ‘Sahyadri’. ‘Anaimudi’ peak (2665
BL
EP S
meters) in Annamalai range is the highest peak in South India. To the

R TB
U
East of the Deccan Plateau, there are the Eastern Ghats. They meet the
BE @K
Western Ghats in the Nilgiri hills. The Eastern Ghats are not very high or
continuous. In the Eastern Ghats, Armaconda and Mahendragiri are the
highest peaks. These Ghats are separated by river valleys here and there.
The Peninsular Plateau has great economic significance. The reason
TO
for this is that it has rich deposits of minerals. As the rivers have formed
T
many waterfalls, they are best suited for the production of hydro-electricity.
O
N
4. Coastal Plains : Apart from the islands, India has a coastal line of 6,100
kms. Starting from the Kutch region of Gujarat, the coastline extends
upto Gangetic river basin in the East. The narrow plain along the coast is
called the coastal plain. The 9 states of India have coast line. The Indian
coastline is divided into West coast and East coast.
The West coast spreads from Kutch of Gujarat in the North between
the Arabian sea and the Western Ghats upto the Cape of Kanyakumari
in the South. It is 1,500 kms long. This is further divided into Malabar
coast in Kerala, Canara coast in Karnataka, Konkan Coast in Goa and
95
Maharastra and Gujarath coast. Mumbai, Marmugoa, Cochin, Kandla,
Karwar and Mangaluru are the major ports of this coast. The Eastern
costal plains extends from Kanyakumari in the South to the Gangetic
river in the North. The East coast is located between the Bay of Bengal
and the Eastern Ghats. This coastline is very wide and flat. It comprises
the deltas of Mahanadi, Godavari, Krishna and Cauvery rivers. In the East
coast, there are some salty, brackish-water lakes or lagoons. Chilka lake
of Odisha and Pulicat lake of Andhara Pradesh are the important. The
East coast is divided into Utkal coast in the North and Coromandel coast
in the south.
Islands: There are totally 247 islands belonging to India.
Of them, 204 are in the Bay of Bengal and 43 are in the Arabian Sea. In the
ED
Gulf of Mannar, there are a few coral islands. Andaman and Nicobar islands
H
in the Bay of Bengal are formed from hard volcanic rocks. Lakshadweep
IS
islands are coral islands. India’s extreme southern tip is located in the
BL
EP S
great Nicobar island. This is called Indira Point.

R TB
U
BE @K
EXERCISES

TO
1. The name ‘India’ is derived from the river ___________.

2. The total area of India is ____________ sq.kms.
T
O
3. In the central part of India _____North latitude passes.

N
4. The coast line of India with major land mass is ________ kms.
5. The Indian physiography has been divided into __________ major
parts.
6. Greater Himalaya is also called __________.
7. The highest mountain peak in the world is ____________ .
8. The North Indian plain is made up of __________ soil.
9. The Western Ghats in Karnataka are also called ___________.
96
II. Answer the following question in brief:
10. In which part of the Asian continent is India situated?
11. In which hemisphere of the earth is India located?
12. Which is the southern tip of mainland of India?
13. In which island is Indira Point located?
14. What is the other name for the foothills of the Himalayas?
15. Which is the recently-formed landmass in India?
16. What are the advantages of Himalayas ?
17. Explain the extent of peninsular Plateau?
18. Write about the Shivalik range.
ED
19. ‘The Northern plains are called deposited plains’. Why?
H
20. Mention the differences between western and Eastern ghats.
IS
III. Activities:
BL
EP S
R TB
1. Draw a map of India and mark the latitudes and longitudes and
U
BE @K
I
also the 230.30 latitude passing through the central part of India.
2. Draw a map of India and mark major mountain ranges, the Eastern
and Western Ghats.
3. Share your experiences with your teacher when you are travelling
TO
in the ghat sections of Mangaluru, Dharmasthala and also its

natural scenes.
T
O
IV. Projects:
N
1. Draw a map of India and mark the various States and Union
territories with the help of your teacher.
2. Draw the outline map of India, mark your neighbouring countries.
3. Collect the information, National diversity in Western ghats
and central plains of Karnatka.

97
CHAPTER – 11
INDIA - SEASONS
In this chapter, you learn about the following:

• Main features of India’s climate
• Condition of the climatic seasons of India
• Distribution of seasonal Distribution of rainfall
India has tropical monsoon type of climatic condition. In this type of
climate, winds blows in opposite directions in different seasons.
India depicts all the typical features of know this.
ED
tropical monsoon. During the first half of the The word Monsoon is
year, the winds blow from South-West to North- derived from an Arabic
H
East, and remaining half, they blow from North- word ‘Mausim’. It means
IS
East to South-West. In addition to this, seasons.
BL
EP S
geographically. India is situated both in tropic

R TB
U
and temperate zones. Latitude, height from the sea level, distance from
BE @K
the sea, direction of the winds, mountain ranges, ocean currents etc., are
influence on the climatic condition of the country.
Indian climate divided into four seasons:
1. Summer season: March to May
TO
2. South-west Monsoon season: June to September

T
3. Retreating monsoon season: October to November

O
4. Winter season: December to February

N
Summer season: The summer season begins from the first week of March
and it continues till the end of May. During this season. The sun rays
are perpendicular in the Northern hemisphere. Hence temperature will
be high. Days are quite long. The North-Indian plains are away from the
sea and have very high temperature. Rajasthan’s Ganganagar of records
a maximum of 52°C in summer, and it is the hottest place in the country.
In contrast South India is surrounded by water on three sides, and as
such temperature is moderate seen. It will be between 32° C to 35° C.
During this season, the North-Indian mountain regions and the peninsular
plateau are cooler. Due to local temperature and winds, rainfall occurs
98
in some places during April and May. These are called ‘Kala Baisakhi’ in
West Bengal, ‘Andhis’ in Uttar Pradesh ‘coffee blossoms in karnataka’ and
‘mango showers’ in Kerala. In summer, the country receives only 10% of
annual rainfall.
South-West Monsoon (Rainy season) : In India, the South-West
Monsoons comprise the rainy season. These are called the South-West
Monsoon winds. These are very humid and shower rain most parts of the
country. This season spreads from June to September 75% of the rainfall
occurs during this season. South West Monsoon separates India into
two branches: one is the Arabian Sea branch and the other is the Bay
of Bengal branch. Monsoon winds are obstructed by the Western Ghats
and as such, maximum rainfall is seen to the West of the Ghats. As these
winds proceed to the East, they get depleted of rain. The Eastern regions
of the Western Ghats are called rain-shadow regions. The Bay of Bengal
ED
monsoon winds bring rain to Myanmar, Bangladesh, North-East Indian
regions, foothills of the Himalaya and the North-Indian plains. The rain
H
IS
reduces as we move from North East to North West. With the exception of
the TamilNadu region, most of the country’s regions receive rain during
BL
EP S
R TB
the South-West Monsoon.

U
Retreating Monsoons : By the end of October, because of the Wide-spread

BE @K
South-West Monsoon rains, there is a decrease in the temperature.

Besides, during this season, the sun rays fall Vertically on the Southern
hemisphere. As a result, there is a drop in the temperature in the Northern
hemisphere. Hence this area becomes an area of high presure and the
TO
South-West monsoon winds start receeding. Slowly, they stop blowing by

the end of November. This is called the
T
Activity :
O
Receeding Monsoon Period. During Collect the information from the

N
this season. India receives about 13% newspapers about the temperature in
of the annual rainfall, due to the the major cities. Discuss with teacher
differences in temperature and about varition in temperature.
pressure of land and sea. Tropical
Cyclones frequently occur in the Bay of Bengal during this season. They
can Widespread damage along their path, particularly along the coast.
4. Winter season : In India, the winter season begins from December
and February end. During this season Ladakh, Jammu and Kashmir,
Himachal Pradesh and the North Indian plains witness very low
temperature. In some places, the temperature drops to sub-zero levels and
99
heavy snowfall occurs. But in South India, temperature is normal and the
climate is very pleasant. India receives just about 2% of the annual rainfall
during this season. Hence, the winter season is the season of least rainfall.
Distribution of rain:
Normally India receives its
annual rainfall through the
South-West monsoon. There
are a lot of variations in the
intensity of rainfall. India
receives its rainfall during all
the seasons. The country’s
average rainfall is 118 cms.
However, different regions
ED
receive rainfall during different
seasons. Besides, total rainfall
H
differs from one region to
IS
another. Based on the total BL
EP S
quantum of rainfall, India can

R TB
U
be divided into three regions.
BE @K
1. Low rainfall region :

Areas getting less than 50
cms of rain are called areas of
deficit rainfall. Thar desert of
TO
Rajasthan and its adjoining

T
areas like Punjab, Haryana, Kutch regions of Gujarath, Ladakh and Jammu
O
and Kashmir, Eastern parts of Maharashtra and interior Karnataka are

N
the areas of deficit rainfall. Ruyli of Jaisalmer district in Rajasthan is the

area receiving least annual rainfall of 8.3 cms in the country.
2. Moderate rainfall region : Areas getting rain from 50 to 250 cms are
called areas of moderate rainfall. All areas other than less and surplus
rainfall come under this group.
3. Heavy rainfall region : Areas receiving more than 250 cms of rain are
called areas of surplus rainfall. Western areas of Western Ghats, Assam and
other Eastern states and West Bengal come in this category. Mawsynram
region of Meghalaya gets the highest rainfall in the country.
100
Climatic condition of a country has a great Activity : Get to know
influence on its economy. The South-West about the amount of rainfall
monsoons control the agriculture of India received in your taluk
which is the main occupation of Indians. this year. Discuss with
Failure of rainfall leads to drought. When the your friends the climatic
monsoons are heavy there are floods they also conditions in your taluk.
cause to destruction to life and property.
Hence it is said that Indian agriculture is a “gamble with the monsoons”.
EXERCISES
1. Highest temperature region in the country is ___________.
2. Due to local temperature winds ___________ rainfall occurs.
3. The area receiving very less rainfall in the country is___________.
4. The area receiving the highest rainfall in the country is______.
ED
II. Answer the following questions in brief.
H
IS
5. Which type of climate is experienced by India?
BL
EP S
6. Why convectional rainfall occurs during retreating monsoon
R TB
seasons?
U
BE @K
7. What are the factors influenced on climate of India ?

8. ‘Indian agriculture gambling with the monsoon winds.’
Discuss.
III. Match the following.
TO
A B
i. Kalabaisaki a. Uttar Pradesh
T
O
ii. Andies b. Karnataka

N
iii. Coffee blossom c. Kerala

iv. Mango showers d. Rajasthan
e. West Bengal
IV Activity :
1. Draw a map of India and mark the distribution of rainfall.
V Project :
1. Learn from your teachers about the seasonal characteristics in your area.

101
CHAPTER – 12
INDIA - SOILS

• Different types of soil in India and their distribution
• Soil erosion and causes for soil erosion
• Effects of soil erosion
• Conservation of soil and its management
Soil is one of the most important natural resources. India consists

of various types of soil. Soil is formed by the weathering of rocks under
ED
different types of climate. Some soils are deposited by the agents of
denudation. Soil also includes decayed material of plants and animals
H
organic matter. The soil of India can be classified into 6 main types:
IS
BL
EP S
1. Alluvial soil 2. Black soil 3. Red soil 4. Laterite soil 5. Desert soil and
R TB
6. Mountain soil.
U
BE @K
1. Alluvial Soil : The soils in the lower areas is called alluvial soil. Lower
areas soils are most extensively spread over vast areas compared to other
types of soil. This type of soil are covered in Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, West
Bengal, Orissa, Punjab, Haryana and Brahmaputra valley of Assam.
TO
Besides, Narmada and Tapti valley and the coastal plains on both sides of
the peninsular plateau also have this kind of soils. The main crops grown
T
O
on this type of soil are wheat, paddy, sugarcane, cotton and jute.
N
2. Black Soil : Black soil is also called ‘Regur soil’. It is best suited for
cotton cultivation. Therefore it is also called ‘Black Cotton soil’. The area
of black cotton soil is also called Deccan Trap. The soil is formed from the
weathering of igneous rock. It contains more of clay particles. It is fertile
and capable of retaining water. This type of soil is seen in Maharashtra,
Gujarat, Madhya Pradesh, Western areas of Andhra Pradesh and North
Karnataka. This soil is more of lime and magnesium carbonates. It is highly
suitable for dry farming. Cotton, jowar, wheat, onion, chilli, tobacco, oil
seeds, lemon and grapes are the major crops growing in this soil.
102
3. Red Soil : Largest area of
peninsular Plateau coverd with
red soil. It can be seen from
Kanyakumari in the South to
Jhansi in Madhya Pradesh in
the North. It spreads from
Gujarat’s Kutch area to Raj
Mahal hills in the Jharkhand
area. The major crops growing
in this type of soil are ragi,
tobacco and oil seeds. Areas
having irrigation facility grow
paddy, sugarcane, cotton etc.
4. Laterite Soil : Laterite soil
ED
is found normally in the areas
receiving more than 200 cms
H
of rainfall. Because of having
IS
rainfall, the minerals of the soil BL
EP S
get washed off leaving behind

R TB
U
ferric oxide and aluminium in the surface soil. Hence this soil also looks
BE @K
red in colour. The minerals dissolved in the rainwater percolate to deeper

layers of the soil and insoluble oxides of iron and aluminium are found in
the top layers. Laterite soil is less fertile and lack nitrogen and minerals.
In India this type of soil is extended over the Western Ghats, the Vindhyas,
the Satpuras, the Rajmahal hills and Poorvachal region. It is suitable for
TO
the cultivation of coffee and tea and other plantation crops.

T
5. Desert Soil : Desert soil is formed in the regions of less rainfall and high
O
temperature. It is red and brown colour. Water percolates easily without

N
retentive and moisture gets reduced in the soil. Jowar, Sajje and dates are
grown in this soil. It is distributed in the areas of North-west Rajasthan
and adjoining areas of Punjab, Haryana, Kutch area of Western Gujarat
and the Western parts of the Aravalli mountains.
6. Mountain Soil : It contains plenty of decayed organic matter. This soil
is found on the lower slopes of the mountains. It is very rich in nitrogen
and organic residues. It is suitable for the growth of coffee, tea, spices
and fruits. Foothills of the Himalayas, Jammu and Kashmir, Himachal
Pradesh, Uttarakhand, Bihar, West Bengal and other mountainous regions
have this type of soil.
103
Soil Erosion
Transportation of surface soil by various natural forces is called soil
erosion. Running water, winds and sea waves are the main causes of soil
erosion.
Causes of Soil Erosion: Soil erosion is one of the most important problems
of our country. There is an increase in soil erosion in the recent years.
The important causes are 1.Deforestation 2. Over grazing 3.Unscientific
methods of cultivation. 4. Over irrigation etc. Even manufacture of bricks,
tiles and pots use the top layer of the soil leaving behind depleted soil.
Effects of soil erosion: Soil erosion leads to many problems. Most
important of them are:
1) Soil erosion leads to accumulation of silt in the river beds, thereby
causing floods.
2) With accumulation of silt in river course changing direction of rivers
ED
course.
H
3) Due to accumulation of silt, the storage capacity of the reservoirs
IS
and lakes get reduced. BL
EP S
4) Due to soil erosion, the volume of water percolating down gets reduced.
R TB
U
Due to this, natural springs dry up. As India is mainly dependent on
BE @K
agriculture, its productivity is reduced. Hence, to preserve fertility

and productivity, prevention of soil erosion is essential.
Conservation of Soil and Management:
Prevention of soil erosion and protecting the fertility of the soil is known
TO
as Conservation of Soil. In addition to this, protecting the fertility of the soil

and using the soil in a healthy way for increasing the agricultural produce
T
is its management. The five-year plans have given a lot of importance to

O
this aspect. There are many ways of preventing soil erosion:

N
i. counter ploughing.
ii. constructrion of bunds around the agricultural land.
iii. development of terraced agricultural fields.
iv. prevention of deforestation
v. encouragement of afforestation.
vi. control of livestock grazing.
vii. planned use of water.
viii. construction of check dams etc.
104
Do you know this?
• Soil is one of the most important natural resources. It is an important
national wealth.
• Soil made up of very fine particles is called clay soil.
• Sandy soil is made up of large particles.
• Pedology is the study of formation of soil, structure, chemical composition
and its changes.
EXERCISES
1. The soil deposited by rivers is called _________________.
2. Black soil area is called _____________.
3. In Rajasthan _________ soil are also mainly found.
ED
4. The widely spread soil in India is _______ .
5. For growing ragi and oil seeds, __________ soil is suitable.
H
IS
II Answer the following questions in brief:
BL
EP S
6. What are the types of soils found in India?

R TB
U
7. What is meant by soil conservation? List out its methods.
BE @K
8. What is soil erosion? What are the reasons for it?

9. What are the effects of soil erosion?
10. Which types of soils are found in the Himalayan mountains?
TO
III Activities :
1. Visit the office of the Assistant Director of Agriculture in your
T
taluk and make a list of the various kinds of soil found in the
O
N
taluk and their uses.

2. By rearing animals does soil erosion occur? Discuss with you
teacher.
IV Project:
1. Take a small amount of soil from your neighbourhood or your
farm and, with the help of your teacher, get it tested at a soil
testing center. Learn about the suitability of that soil for various
crops.

105
CHAPTER – 13
INDIA - FOREST RESOURCES

• Types of forests in India and their distribution
• Conservation of forests and methods of conservation
• Wildlife sanctuaries and national parks
• Biosphere Reserves
The total plant life growing naturally in an area is called forest or
natural vegetation. This is influenced by various ecological factors like
temperature, rain, land forms, soil etc, forming an average of 21.71% of
ED
the geographical area. According to the India State of Forest Report 2021
H
(ISFR) India has 713789 sq.kms of forest area.
IS
India is a vast country having various types of natural environment
BL
EP S
and based on the natural vegetation they can be divided into 6 main types:
R TB
U
1. Evergreen forests 2. Deciduous monsoon forests 3. Tropical Grasslands

BE @K
4. Mangrove forests 5. Desert vegetation and 6. Alpine forests of Himalayas.

1. Evergreen forests: In India, evergreen forests are found in regions
which are not more than 900 mts above sea level and receive an annual
rainfall of more than 250 cms. This type of forests are found in Western
TO
Ghats, North Eastern states of Assam, Meghalaya, Tripura, Manipur,

Nagaland and Andaman-Nicobar islands. Evergreen forests occupy
T
O
about 2.6 lakh hectares. Since the trees are always green they are called
N
Evergreen forests.
2. Deciduous monsoon forests : This type of forests are more widely
distributed in India. They are seen in areas receiving 75 to 250 cms of
rainfall. It forms about 65.5% of the total area of forests. Since India has
mainly monsoon climate, this type of forest is distributed widely. The trees
shed their leaves during the dry winters. As such these are also called
deciduous monsoon forests.
3. Tropical Grassland : This type of vegetation are found in the areas
receiving 60 to 75 cms of rain fall. These areas have tall grass and small
herbs are rarely seen here and there. Central parts of the peninsular
Plateau, border areas of Thar desert to the west of Aravalli hills have this
106
type of vegetation. Babool, Seesum and Sabhai type of grass are seen in
these areas.
4. Mangrove forests : These forest are formed due to tides. The Mangrove
forests are found along the deltas and coastal regions and estuaries of
rivers, that are subjected tides. River delta of the Ganga, Mahanadi,
Godavari and Krishna have this kind of forests. The ‘Sundari’ trees are
plenty in the Ganga basin and hence these forests are called ‘Sunderbans’.
The total area of these forests is about 4992 sq.km.
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
TO
T
O
N
107
5. Desert forests : This type of vegetation is found in regions receiving
less than 50 cms of rain. The Thar desert in Rajasthan and its adjoining
areas in Punjab, Haryana and Gujarat have these forests. The plants are
deep-rooted and consists mainly of thorny shrubs.
6. Alpine forests of Himalayas : Different types forests are found in the
Himalayas. As the height increases, the tropical type of climate changes
into the polar type of climate. According to the changes in climate, various
types of plants are found. The important types of trees growing in this
type of forest are Sal, Byra, Toon, Silver Spruce, Laurel etc. These trees
have pointed leaves.
Activity :
DISTRIBUTION OF FORESTS : Collect information
about the forest grove
ED
Scientists opinion that, for any area to possess
and environment that
a good environment, it should have 33% of its land
H
existed in the past in
IS
area under forests. When the forest area is your locality through
BL elders and listout the
EP S
compared to the total area of the country are very changes that have taken
R TB
U
less. India has very lesser area of forests. Madhya place recently in that
BE @K
place
Pradesh has largest area under forests whereas
Haryana is in the last position which has the area under forests. Karnataka
state is in the 6th position in terms of area of forests.
TO
Importance of forests :
Forest is an important resource to both man and environment. Their
T
O
importance is as follows :
N
1) Pure air, food and fodder is provided.

2) It brings good rainfall.
3) It controls soil erosion.
4) It is the shelter house for animals and birds.
5) Medicinal plants are found in abundance.
6) It attracts tourists.
7) It provides employment opportunitives.
8) It controls ecological balance.
108
Conservation of Forests : Protection of forests from human beings,
animals and natural disasters are called Conservation of forests. Indian
forests areas are gradually decreasing, because of expansion of agriculture,
animal-grazing, construction of roads and rail routes, irrigation projects,
forest fires, mining forest fires etc., are the main causes for the destruction
of forests. Hence it is very essential to protect forests. Certain measures
have to be taken towards this purpose.
Methods of Conservation : Cutting down dried-up and abrasing trees
which causes forest fires; Protecting the forest trees against diseases;
planting saplings; sowing seeds; guarding against illegal cutting of trees;
avoiding grazing of domestic animals in forests; motivating people to plant
saplings; creating awareness among people about trees and encouraging
them to protect them; implementing the social forestry projects speedily
ED
and successfully.
H
Wild-life Sanctuaries: Wild-life sanctuaries have been set up to protect
IS
BL
animals in their natural habitat. There are around 567 wild-life sanctuaries
EP S
R TB
in India today. The important ones among them are:

U
BE @K
• Tamil Nadu: Madumalai, Kanyakumari

• West Bengal: Mahananda, Chapramari
• Rajasthan: Bassi, Sawai Manshing
• Haryana: Kalesar, Nahar
TO
• Punjab: Birmotibagh, Harike

T
• Andhra Pradesh: Kolleru, Krishna

O
N
National Parks: Jim Corbett National Park in Uttarkhand is the first national
park to be established in India. The main national parks in India are:
1. Kaziranga National Park, Assam
2. Sunderbans, Westbengal
3. Hazaribagh National Park, Jarkhand
4. Gir National Park, Gujarat
5. Kanha National Park, Madhya Pradesh
6. Tadova National Park, Maharashtra
109
Biosphere Reserves : India has large diversity of flora and fauna. In order
to preserve this biodiversity, 18 biosphere reserves have been identified.
They are Nilgiri, Nandadevi, Nokrek, Great Nicobar, Gulf of Mannar,
Manas, Sunderbans, Similipal, Kanchenganga, Amarakantaka, cold desert
(Himachal Pradesh),Panna and Seshachalam Nilgiri was the first Biosphere
reserve of India .
Do you know this?
• There are around 567 wildlife sanctuaries in India.
• 106 national parks
• 122 botanical gardens
• 525 zoos
ED
EXERCISES
H
IS
1. The forests found in Assam and Meghalaya are ___________ type
BL
EP S
R TB
of forests.
U
BE @K
2. The Himalayas have _________ kind of forests.

3. The Ganga river delta is also called _____________.
4. Jim corbet National park is in ________________ state.
TO
5. According to the National forest policy ___________ % of forest

T
area is required for an healthy environment.

O
II. Answer the following question in brief:

N
6. What is natural vegetation?

7. What is the total forest area of India?
8. What are the types of forests of India?
9. Explain the characteristics and distribution of deciduous
Monsoon forests in India.
10. What are the importance of forests?
11. List out the reasons for destruction of forests?
110
12. What is conservation of forests?
13. List out your suggestions of conservation of forests in the country?
III. Activities:
1. Identify and mention the natural vegetation in your region.
List the important plant and animal species found there.
2. List the names of the different types of trees you have come
across.
IV. Projects:
1. Prepare an album with photographs of animals found in
wild-life sanctuaries.
ED
2. Locate and name the Biosphere reserves in the map of India.
H
IS

BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
TO
T
O
N
111
CHAPTER – 14
INDIA - WATER RESOURCES
In this chapter, you learn the following :

• Importance of irrigation • Types of irrigation
• Multipurpose river valley projects
• Important hydro-electric projects of India
• National Electricity Grid • Rain-water harvesting
Water is an important natural resource. It is one of the basic
requirements of human beings and it is a national property. This is being
used for irrigation, hydro-electric power generation, industry, domestic
ED
use, transportation, fisheries and also for recreational purposes. The
H
development of water resources has become very essential to satisty
IS
the needs of growing population. As a natural resource, its judicious
BL
EP S
conservation is required.
R TB
U
The water resources on the surface of the earth are the rivers and lakes.
BE @K
Wells and springs are ground water resources. The availability of water
varies from region to region and time to time. Rainfall in India is uncertain,
unreliable, unequally distributed. Agriculture depends on canals, tanks,
well irrigation projects.
TO
Irrigation means supply of water to agriculture

Do you know this?
from canals, wells and tanks artificially or
T
manually. Irrigation is very essential in the • The total volume of river

O
regions of low rainfall. Irrigation is the most water in India is 1869

N
billion cubic kilometers.

important development in the history of
Of this, usable water is
agriculture. With the available water for
only 690 million cubic
irrigation in India, a maximum of 141 million
kilometers.
hectares can be irrigated. The net irrigated
• Available Ground water
area is only 73 million hectares. At present
is 432 million cubic kms.
India has the largest area under irrigation in
the world. • The total available water
volume is thus estimated
Types of Irrigation: India being known for at 1122 billion cubic kms.
a variety of physical features, we can see the
• 1 Hectare = 2.47 Acre.
variation in the distribution of water resource
112
too. Besides, based on the water requirement for agriculture, distribution
of rainfall, physical features, types of crops and the types of agricultural
methods used, various types of irrigation are in use in different places.
Based on the source of irrigation, these can be divided into : 1. Well
irrigation 2. Canal irrigation and 3.Tank irrigation.
1. Well irrigation: Well irrigation is the most important types of irrigation in
India. It provides water to large areas of agricultural land. Supplying ground
water by digging or drilling wells is called well irrigation. Well irrigation is
more useful in low rainfall regions. Construction and maintenance of wells
is easier. Well irrigation becomes essential where the canals and tanks
are not available. There are two types of wells: 1.Open wells 2.Borewells.
Open wells : This type of wells are dug up in suitable agricultural land.
ED
Water is lifted from openwells through manual power, animals or with the
H
help of diesel or electric pump set.
IS
Tube wells : Today in India’s well irrigation system, role of borewells are
BL
EP S
very important. 59.7% of total well irrigation area and 33.7% of the total
R TB
U
irrigated area comes under tubewell irrigation.

BE @K
2. Canal Irrigation : Canal irrigation are very Do you know this?

important system of irrigation in India. India is one Cusecs : This word
of the important country in the world using canal refers to the water
TO
that flows per cubic

irrigation. Vast areas of cultivable land can be
feet per second.
irrigated by this method. India about 16.5 million
T
O
hectares are under canal irrigation. This is the

N
second most important irrigation type after well irrigation.

There are two types of canals.
a. Flood canals b. Perennial canals
a. Flood canals: Water is drawn directly from the river through canals
without the help of any dams. When the river level is high the excess water
passes through the canals. These are called flood canals.
b. Perennial canals: Dams are constructed across the rivers and water
is stored in the reservoirs. This water is provided for agriculture through
113
canals, which are called Perennial canals. This type of canal networks can
be seen in the states of Uttar Pradesh, Andhra Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh,
Punjab, Rajasthan, Haryana and Bihar.
3. Tank irrigation: It is practice in India since ancient Activity :
times. Small bunds are constructed across Listout the important
streams. Water is stored and supplied to cultivable tanks found in your
areas through small canals or pipes. Tank surroundings. Mention
irrigation is common in Andhra Pradesh, Tamil your suggetions to
conserve tanks and
Nadu, Odisha and Karnataka. In addition, Madhya lakes.
Pradesh, Rajasthan, Jharkhand and Uttar Pradesh
also have tank irrigation.
MULTI-PURPOSE RIVER VALLEY PROJECTS
India has undertaken the construction of many river valley projects
ED
for the maximum utilization of river water resources. These projects have
other purposes besides providing water for agricultural use. Such projects
H
are called multi-purpose river valley projects. The main aims of these
IS
projects are: BL
EP S
R TB
1. providing irrigation facility; 2. production of hydro-electric power;

U
3. prevention of floods; 4. creating facility for water transportation;

BE @K
5. providing water for domestic and industrial use; 6. preventing soil

erosion; 7. developing fisheries; 8. enhancing forest wealth.
IMPORTANT MULTI-PURPOSE RIVER VALLEY PROJECTS OF INDIA
TO
1. Damodar River Valley Project: This is the first multi-purpose river

valley project of independent India. This project is the joint venture between
T
the states of West Bengal and Bihar. This river was causing large scale
O
destruction to life and property in West Bengal and, as such, it was called
N
‘Sorrow of Bengal’. To prevent destructions by the river, this project was

taken up.
This project has a total canal network of 2495 kms and supplies
water for 4.5 lakh hectares of land. Dams have been constructed across
Damodar river and its tributaries at Tilaiyya, Maithan, Konar and Panchet
hill. Thermal power stations have been established at Bokaro, Chandrapur
and Durgapur. West Bengal and Jharkhand have been benefitted from
this project.
2. Bhakranangal Project: It is the one of the important multi-purpose
valley projects of India. This is the joint venture between Punjab, Haryana
114
and Rajasthan state. Dams are constructed at Bhakra and Nangal of
Himachal Pradesh across the Sutlej river. The Bakra Dam has a canal
network of about 3402 kms and provides irrigation to 14.6 lakh hectares.
Delhi and Himachal Pradesh have benefitted from this project by way of
getting irrigation and hydro-electric power. The reservoir created by this
dam is called ‘Govindasagar’. Bhakra dam is the second hightest dam
in India. (Theri dam is the highest dam in India).
3. Kosi Project: The main objective of this project was to prevent floods.
Kosi was called ‘Sorrow of Bihar’. This is a joint project between India and
Nepal. A dam is built across Kosi river at Hanumanagar on the border
of India and Nepal. This project provides irrigation facilities 8.75 lakh
hectares of land. 50% of the hydro-electric power generated by this project
is supplied to Nepal.
ED
4. Hirakud Project: This project is constructed across the Mahanadi, in
H
Odisha about 10 kms from Sambalpur. This river was known as Sorrow of
IS
Odisha an account of its frequent floods. Hirakud is the longest dam in the
BL
EP S
country, measuring 4801 mtrs in length. It provides irrigation facility to a
R TB
U
total of 2.54 lakh hectares. This project provides irrigation facilities and
BE @K
hydro-electric power to Odisha, Bihar, Jharkhand and Chattisgarh states.

5. Tungabhadra project : Irrigation and generation of hydroelectric power
are the main objectives of this project. It is established jointly by Karnataka
and Andhra Pradesh states. This dam is built across Tungabhadra river at
TO
Mallapur near Hospet in Vijayanagara district. It provides hydro-electric

power and irrigation facility to 5.5 lakh hectares in Andhra Pradesh and
T
O
Karnataka. The reservoir is called ‘Pampasagara’.

N
6. Nagarjunasagar Project : This dam is constructed at Nandikonda

village of Telangana across the river Krishna. Irrigation and generation of
hydroelectric power are its main objectives. This provides irrigation facility
to a total of 8.30 lakh hectares.
7. Upper Krishna : This is a major project of Karnataka. This project
provides irrigation and drinking water to Yadgiri, Vijayapura, Bagalkot,
Raichur and Kalaburgi districts. It is constructed across the river Krishna
near Alamatti of Vijayapura district. This has resulted in the formation of
Lal Bahadur Shastri reservoir. Another dam is built near Narayanapura.
115
The name of the reservoir is ‘Basavasagara’. Together they provide irrigation
facility to a total of 6.47 lakh hectares. Recently, hydro-electric power
generation has also started.
8. Narmada Valley Project: Narmada Project Authority was established
since this project is entangled with many controversies right from its
inception. The dam is constructed between Gujarat and Madhya Pradesh
and a decision was arrived at by the NPA on the distribution of water.
Narmada river has totally 23 dams across its length and Sardar Sarovar,
Narmada Sagar and Narmada Upper Projects are the main ones. This
project provides irrigation facility and hydro-electric power to North
Gujarat, Rajasthan and a few areas of Maharashtra state.
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
TO
T
O
N
116
INDIA’S MAJOR HYDRO-ELECTRIC POWER PROJECTS
Hydro-electric power is the second important source of power in India.
Hydro-electric power is generated to an extent of 13.9% of the total power
generated in 2011. It is estimated that India has a potential to generate
410 billion kw of hydro-electric power. But presently only 106.68 billion
kw power is being generated. The following states have important hydro-
electric power generation centres.
1. Karnataka: Shivanasamudra, Tungabhadra, Jog, Bhadra, Alamatti,
Kali, Supa, Kadra, Kodasalli Dam.
2. Andhra Pradesh: Srisailam project, Ramapadasagar Project, Sileru
project.
3. Telangana : Nagarjunasagar
ED
4. Tamil Nadu: Mettur project, Paikara eletric project, Periyar project,
Kundha project, Moyar project, Kodayar project etc.
H
IS
5. Madhya Pradesh: Bansagar, Gandhisagar, Pench Project.
BL
EP S
6. Maharashtra: Tata hydro-electric power project, Beera project,
R TB
U
Vaitarana project, Koyna project.
BE @K
7. Odisha : Hirakud project, Kolab project, Rangali project, Naraja

project.
8. Bihar : Kosi project.
9. Gujarat : Kakrapara project, Kadana project, Ukai project.
TO
10. Jharkhand : Suvarnarekha project.

T
O
In addition to the above, many other National Power Grid projects are
N
found.
National Power Grid: India generates power from various sources. All the
states do not have sufficient electric power supply at all times. Hence, to
supply power from surplus states to deficit states, a National Power Grid
is established. With its help, excess power from any state can be supplied
to any other power deficit state.
Rain Water Harvesting:
Water is very precious. Although India has vast water resource, it is
most unevenly distributed. Rainfall is confined to the rainy season. Even
117
in areas of heavy rainfall, water shortage is seen during the summers. The
only solution to the drought condition prevailing in India is ‘Rain Water
Harvesting’. Collection of rain water is called “Rain Water Harvesting”.
There are two types of rain water
Harvesting : 1.Collection of water
at the place of rainfall. eg.roof tops
of houses and buildings 2.Collection
of flowing rainwater eg. building
bunds and collecting water.
• Using the water collected
from roof tops reduces the
dependence on the public
water supply.
ED
• Digging ponds in agricultural
areas and collecting water.
H
IS
• Building check dams to prevent the flow of water and allowing it
BL
EP S
to percolate to increase of the ground water table. This is called
R TB
recharging.
U
BE @K
• Not only individuals, even communities can engage themselves in

constructing bunds or digging small ponds to collect the rain water.
In Karnataka, conservation of rainwater has been in practice from
ancient times. Tanks, lakes and ponds are all methods of conserving
TO
water. Failure to pay attention to these trasitional methods has resulted

in drought condition and water scarcity. By protecting and managing
T
properly the water problem in the country can be reduced.

O
N
EXERCISES

1. The Sorrow of West of Bengal is __________ .
2. The Sorrow of Bihar is ____________ river.
3. Biggest irrigation project of Karnataka is __________.
4. Pampa Sagara Dam is in __________ district of Karnataka.
5. Hirakud project is built across ___________ river.
118
II. Answer the following questions in brief:
6. What is irrigation? What are the types of irrigation?
7. What is multi-purpose river valley project? What are its objectives?
8. Name the hydro-electric power projects of Karnataka.
9. ’Rain water harvesting is compulsory today’. Why?
10. What is National Power Grid?
III. Match the following projects in ‘A’ with states ‘B’ :
A B
i. Bhakra dam a. Lalbahaddur Shastry Sagar
ii. Tungabhadra dam b. Basava Sagar
ED
iii. Almatti dam c. Pampa Sagar
H
iv. Narayanapura dam d. Govinda Sagar
IS
BL e. Narmada Sagar
EP S
R TB
U
IV. Activities :
BE @K
1. List out the uses of multi-purpose river valley projects of India.

2. Visit a rain water harvesting project of your place and get more
information.
TO
V. Projects :
1. List the various types of irrigation facilities around you and learn
T
the use of these methods.

O
N
2. Write about an irrigation project which you have seen.

119
Economics
Chapter - 15
ECONOMY AND GOVERNMENT

• Relationship between Government and economy
• Planning in India • Five year plans and achievements
• Green Revolution
The economic system is an organized system of all economic activities

of human beings. The main objective of the economic system is human
welfare. The government works towards improvement of human welfare.
ED
The important issue arises are: Should the government interfere in man’s
economic activities? What is the role of the government in economic
H
development?
IS
BL
EP S
Till the end of the 19th century, it was the opinion of many economists
R TB
U
that the government should not interfere in man’s economic activities.
BE @K
At that time, the government involved only in the fundamental duties of

national security, dispensing of justice and maintenance of law and order.
However, with the rise of ‘Welfare States’ in the 20th century, the scope
of governments’ involvement got extended. They came forward to provide
TO
many facilities like food, clothing, shelter, education, health, hygiene,

transport, communication etc. to the citizens. As the Government began
T
O
involving itself in the economic activities of the people. It began to gain

N
more importance in the process of economic development.

Generally, in developing countries, many problems arise due to
unemployment, poverty, agricultural backwardness, unequal distribution
of income and wealth. Government mediation becomes inevitable in
solving such problems. Developing countries also lack basic amenities
like transport, communication, electricity, education, health etc. Their
government strive towards alleviating these problems.
An economic system is characterized by fluctuations in the national
income, production, employment, investment, price etc. Such changes are
120
called economic fluctuations. When an economy moves towards progress
without extreme fluctuations, it is said to have economic stability. Similarly,
the income and wealth generated in the country should be distributed as
equally as possible to everybody without any discrimination in the name
of caste, class, literate or illiterate, urban or rural. This is called social
justice. A government’s responsibility is huge since it has to balance
economic stability and social justice with economic development.
In the 20th century, governments implemented economic plans to
achieve faster economic development. In 1929 Soviet Russia implemented
the economic plan and emerged successful in achieving quick economic
progress. After World War II, governments of many countries resorted to
economic planning in order to resolve their economic problems.
ED
1. PLANNING IN INDIA
H
Planning is essential in everyone’s life. If one has to achieve success in
IS
one’s personal life, the resources have to be utilized in a planned manner,
BL
EP S
R TB
isn’t that so? If a student desires to acquire knowledge and secure good
U
marks in examination, student has to utilize their time in the day in a

BE @K
systematic manner. Everyday the number of hours devoted for the study,
play, sleep and routine works has to be planned and implemented. Similary,
a country also plans to utilize its resources systematically in selected fields
TO
to achieve progress within a fixed time period.

‘The conscious and wise process through which
T
O
the government, with certain specific objectives,

N
utilizes the country’s resources in a profitable manner

in order to secure maximum satisfaction of its people
is called planning’. In order to attain the people’s
welfare Government keeping the available resources
in mind, on a priority basis, takes various decisions Sir M.Visveswariah
relating to what should be produced? How much
should be produced? and How the product should be distributed? In this
way, economic planning becomes a strategy to achieve overall development
of the country.
121
Modern planning was first conceived in India by Bharat Ratna Sir
M.Visveswariah. In 1934, he published a book titled ‘Planned Economy
for India’ in which he stressed the need for planning to achieve economic
development in India. Hence, he is regarded as ‘Father of Economic
Planning in India’.
After Independence, the Indian Government formed the National
Planning Commission in 1950. The Prime Minister is its Chairman. The
main objective of the commission is to precisely estimate the natural and
human resources and capital in the country, and to prepare plans for
effective utilization of these resources. Since the plan period in India is
five years, it is called as five-year plans.
In 1952 the ‘National Development Council’ was established. The chief
ED
ministers of all the states are members of this board. It approves the draft
H
copy of the five-year plans prepared by the National Planning Commission.
IS
It also attempts for balanced regional development of all the states in India.
BL
EP S
R TB
2. FIVE YEAR PLANS

U
Plans in India
BE @K
India’s first five-year plan came into Plans Plan Public Cost
Period (in crores)
effect on 1st April 1951. So for 12th
1 Plan 1951-56 1,960
five-year plan has been implemented.
2 “ 1956-61 4,672
In the year 2015 NITI Aayog has
TO
3 “ 1961-66 8,577
been established in the place of
Yearly Plan 1966-69 6,251
T
National planning commission.

4 Plan 1969-74 6,160
O
N
T h e g o v e r n m e n t h a s 5 “ 1974-78 42,300
implemented each five-year plans Rolling plans 1978-80 ____
with certain specific objectives. 6 Plan 1980-85 1,09,953
These objectives set the goals 7 “ 1985-90 2,22,169
of the respective plans. Poverty Yearly Plan 1990-92 ____
is one of the major problem in 8 Plan 1992-97 4,34,100
Indian economic system. Hence 9 “ 1997-02 9,41,041
10 “ 2002-07 15,25,639
eradication of poverty and improving
11 “ 2007-12 36,44,718
the standard of living is one of the
12 “ 2012-17 76,69,807
primary objective of Indias five year
122
plans. In order to achieve this goal, many other objectives has to be attained
as they are complimentary and contribute to eradication of poverty and
improving the standard of living. They are :
1. Increasing the production to the maximum extent possible.
2. Increasing the employment opportunities.
3. Reducing the economic disparities.
4. Ensuring economic stability.
5. Modernising the economy etc.
Achievements of the Five-year plans : Sixty years have passed since
five-year plans were introduced in India. Eleventh five years plans have
been completed. What are the success and failure of these five year plans?
ED
First let us look at the growth of Activity:
H
national income. In the initial 20-year
IS
period of planning, our national income
BL
EP S
grew at an average rate of 3.5% per

R TB
U
annum, whereas in the next 20-year
BE @K
period, it grew at an average rate of 5%.

During the period from 1991 - 2000,
the annual growth was 5.6% whereas
during 2001 - 2010, the growth was
TO
Study the bar graph given above and

7.3%. This means that, over the years, answer the following questions:
T
the rate of growth of the national 1. Which is the sector that has
O
contributed most to the national

N
income has increased gradually. In the

income in 1950-51?
period between 2001-2010, per capita
2. In the same year, which sector
income has grown at an average rate contributed the least?
of 5.6 per annum. 3. In 2011-12, which sector has
contributed the maximum income?
In the development of the national
4. In 2011-12, what is the contribution
income, there is contribution of all of the agricultural sector?
the three sectors of the economy, i.e.,
agriculture, industry and services. In
the initial period of the plan, the agricultural sector contributed more than
123
50% to the national income. However, the contribution of this sector has
reduced drastically to 18.3% in 2022-23. The major contribution to the
national income has been from the service sector.
Self-sufficiency has been achieved in the production of food grains. The
production has increased five times during the plan period, and reached
315.7 million tonnes in 2021-22.
Employment opportunities have increased with the expansion
of industry and service sector. Attempts have been made to provide
employment opportunities to the rural poor through poverty alleviation
and employment-generation programmes.
Immense progress has been recorded in the fields of science and
technology. Modern technology is being used in the agricultural, industrial
ED
and service sectors. Services of our engineers are being exported to foreign
H
countries. The exports of manufacturing and engineering products have
IS
increased to a great extent.
BL
EP S
R TB
U
But unfortunately during the post economic reform period, there is
BE @K
drastic increase in inequality of income as many disadvantaged sections

are left out of the growth process. Hence in order to include everyone in
the process of growth. Inclusive growth has become the priority of 11th
and 12th five year plans.
TO
Lot of improvement can be seen with respect to other parameters of

T
development. Life expectancy and literacy rate of people have improved.

O
N
Rate of infant mortality and post-natal mortality has reduced. Birth and
death rates have reduced, and rate of population growth is also decreasing.
The five years plans failed to create adequate jobs to all the job aspirants
in the country. Poverty though relatively has reduced is still at large,
disparity between rich and poor is increasing. Equality and social justice
is yet to be attained. Lack of basic amenties has deepened.
3. GREEN REVOLUTION
The greatest achievement of the five-year plans has been the ‘Green
Revolution’. ‘Revolution’ means ‘quick change or progress’.
124
The foodgrain production in India during 1967 was 74 million tonnes.
Due to the initiatives of the government it increased to 108 million tonnes
in 1970. The drastic increase in foodgrain production during the period is
called as Green Revolution.
The Green Revolution was the consequence of using ‘high yielding
seeds’. In the beginning of 1960, Dr.Norman Borlaug a German agricultural
scientist conducted many experiments in Mexico, the result of which was
the discovery of high-yielding wheat grains. Mexico and Taiwan made use
of this grain and achieved immense success in the production of wheat.
Agricultural production dropped drastically in India
in the year 1965-66 due to severe drought. There was
a grave scarcity of foodgrains. To resolve this problem,
in 1966, the Indian government initiated the usage of
ED
high-yielding variety seeds of wheat in the states of
H
Punjab, Haryana, Delhi, Rajasthan and selected
IS
districts of Uttar Pradesh. Growing crops using high-
BL
yielding grains involves providing specific nutrients, Dr. M.S. Swaminathan
EP S
R TB
U
regulated supply of water and protection from diseases.
BE @K
Hence, the use of chemical fertilizers and pesticides and irrigation facilities
was also initiated with the usage of high yielding variety seeds. Irrigation
facilities were expanded. As a result, production of wheat increased
immensely. This improved technology used in agricultural production is
TO
called ‘Pre-harvest Technology’. The role of Dr. M.S.Swaminathan,

agricultural scientist in implementing the improved technology in Indian
T
agriculture is significant. Hence he is called ‘the father of Green Revolution’.

O
He died on 28 September 2023. His contribution to the field of agriculture

N
is ever remembered. He is honored with the first World Food Prize in

1987. Recognizing Sri M.S. Swaminathan’s contribution to the Green
Revolution, the Government of India has conferred posthumously the
highest civilian award ‘Bhrat Ratna’ to him in 2024.
In the initial stages of the green revolution, improved technology
was used only in wheat crop. Inspired by its success, the government
encouraged farmers to use high-yielding grains even in paddy, jowar,
ragi, sugarcane and other crops. Attempts were made to use improved
technology in growing all crops. In addition, steps were taken to spread the
125
use throughout the country. As a consequence, great progress was achieved
in agricultural production. By 1980s, India achieved self-sufficiency in the
production of food grains.
Pre-harvest technology was utilised only by
Activity :
rich and large cultivators. The poor marginal
Discuss support price for
and small farmers could not utilise the high agricultural products with
yield variety seeds, chemical and fertilisers your teachers and farmers.
as they could not offered it. Hence government
subsidised the fertilisers, equipments etc,. So the poor marginal and small
formers can also avail the benefits of improved technology. In addition, it
also came forward to provide loans to farmers through banks and co-
operative organizations at low interest rates. Due to all these measures,
farmers at all levels could make use of improved agricultural processes.
ED
As a result, agricultural production increased.
H
With the increase in
IS
Do you know this?
Rainbow Revolution
BL agricultural production,
EP S
R TB
prices of agricultural
In addition to farming, farmers also engage in
U
related activities of cattle-breeding, poultry-farming,

products decreased and
BE @K
fishery and silk farming. The enormous increase

the farmers could not
in production resulting from agriculture and agro-
recover their agriculture
based activities is called ‘Rainbow Revolution’.
This revolution consist many smaller revolutions.
expenditure. Ensuring a
They are :
TO
fair price to the farmers’

1. Green Revolution - Production of Food Grains
products became
T
2. Blue Revolution - Production of Fish

inevitable. How could a
O
3. Yellow Revolution - Production of Oil Seeds

N
good price be secured for

4. White Revolution - Production of Milk
5. Silver Revolution - Production of Eggs the farmers’ produce? In
order to ensure a good
6. Golden Revolution - Production of Fruits and Flowers
7. Red Revolution - Production of Meat price for the farmers’
products agri-markets
were improved. Surplus produce had to be processed and used for
manufacturing a variety of products. It became necessary to construct
granaries and cold-storage warehouses to store the surplus produce. The
latest technology had to be implemented for providing all these facilities.
The improved technology that is used to procure, process and market
126
agricultural produce is called ‘Post-Harvest Technology’. Both pre-
harvest and post-harvest technology has enabled the green revolution.
In order to solve the problems in agricultural sector efforts are made
to promote organic and natural farming in Indian agriculture. The nature
friendly techniques of productions is the need of the hour. Government is
making its efforts to further increase the agricultural production through
this techniques. This process is being referred to as ‘the Second Green
Revolution’ or ‘Perpetual Green Revolution’. Some enthusiastic farmers
have been implementing eco-friendly and stable agricultural practices like
organic farming, zero-investment farming etc. and are already reaping the
benefits.
NITI Aayog
National Institution for Transforming India was started on 1st Jan
ED
2015 to replace planning commission.
H
NITI Aayog uses bottom-up approach. Its objectives include a 15
IS
years road map, 7 years vision, strategy and action plan.
BL
EP S
It is headed by the Prime Minister of the Country. But day to day

R TB
U
administration is looked after by the vice - chairman. Chief executive
BE @K
officer (CEO) will assist him.

Objectives :
1) To evolve a shared vision of national development priorities, sectors
TO
and strategies with the active involvement of states.

2) To faster co-operative federalism through structured support
T
O
initiatives and mechanisms with the states on a continuous basis,

N
recognising that strong states make a strong nation.

Features :
NITI Aayog is developing itself as a state of the art resource centre
with the necessary knowledge and skills that will enable to art with
speed, promote research and innovation. Provide strategic policy vision
for the Government and deal with contigent issues. It is supported by two
attached offices. Atal Innovation Mission and Development Monitoring
and Evalution organisation and an autonomous body, National Institute
of labour Economics Research and Development.
127
NITI Aayog’s activities can be divided into four main heads.
1. Policy and Programme frame work
2. Co-operative Federalism
3. Monitoring and evalution
4. Thinktank and knowledge and innovation hub
EXERCISES
1. In the 20th century, governments brought into practice _____________
to enable economic development.
2. The organization which formulates the five-year plans in India is
_____________.
ED
3. In the 11th five-year plan, ______________ was given priority.
H
4. The Pioneer of the Green Revolution was ______________.
IS
BL
EP S
5. The government encourages farmers to adopt ___________ system
R TB
U
of farming in order to make farming environment-friendly and
BE @K
stable.
6. NITI Aayog was established on ___________ .
II. Answer the following in one sentence each:
TO
7. What is ‘economic planning’ ?

8. Who is the ‘Father of Indian Economic Planning’?
T
O
9. Which is the organization that approves five-year plans?

N
10. What is ‘Green Revolution’?

11. What is ‘Post-Harvest Technology’?
12. Who is the Present Chairman of NITI Aayog?
III. Answer the following in 5-6 sentences.
13. How has the role of government increased in welfare states?
14. What are the objectives of five-year plans?
15. List out the achievements of five-year plans.
128
16. What are the factors that led to the Green Revolution?
17. What are the remedies for the problems faced by agricultural
sector?
18. What are the objectives of NITI Aayog?
IV. Activities :
1. List the foreign goods that are being used in your surroundings.
2. With the help of the internet, make a list of goals and objectives
of NITI Aayog.
3. Collect information about the functions of NITI Aayog and discuss.
V. Project :
ED
1. Visit the farm of a progressive farmer near your village/town, learn
about the agricultural practices and the pre-harvest and post-
H
IS
harvest technologies he follows, and prepare a report.
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K

TO
T
O
N
129
BUSINESS STUDIES
CHAPTER - 16
BANK TRANSACTIONS

• Meaning of Banks
• Banks and post offices in financial transactions.
• Characteristics of Banks.
• Different accounts that can be opened in a Bank.
• Methods to open accounts in Banks.
• Advantages of Bank accounts.
ED
Banks developed about two hundred years ago. The nature of banks
H
have changed as the time has changed. The term bank is related to financial
IS
transactions. Banks are financial institutions which use the money
BL
EP S
deposited by customers as investments and agreed to return whenever

R TB
U
they require. Banks advance loans to the customers and charge interest on
BE @K
them. Banks exchange the money of different countries. The development

of any country depends on the banking system of that country. Banks
advance money to agriculture, industries, traders and all other sections
of the society which are the main organs for the development of a country
TO
and accelerate the growth of the country.

T
WHAT IS A BANK?
O
N
The term bank is derived from old Italian word “Banco” or from a
French word “Banque”, both mean a “Bench” or money exchange table.
A banking company may be defined as a company which transacts
the business with finance. It accepts deposits from the public and lends
it to those who need it in the form of loans. It receives money from those
who want to save their money in the form of deposits and lends it to those
who require in the form of loans. The services of banks are called Banking.
A bank repay the deposits in the form of cheques, drafts or in some other
forms.
130
Characteristics of Banks
1. Dealing with money : Banks are financial institutions which deal
with the money of the public.
2. Individual/Firm/Company: Bank may be a person, firm or a company.
Banking company means the institution that deals with money.
3. Acceptance of deposits : Banks accept deposits from the public.
These deposits are returned whenever the customers demand it or
after a prescribed period. Banks provide security to these deposits.
Banks act as custodians of the deposits of the public.
4. Lending loans: Banks advance loans to Industrial sector, Agricultural
sector, Education, House construction and for other purposes.
ED
5. Payment and withdrawal : Banks facilitate the customers to withdraw
H
their deposits in the form of cheques or drafts.
IS
6. Agency and Utility services: Banks provide various banking facilities
BL
EP S
R TB
to its customers. They include general utility services and agency

U
BE @K
services.
7. Profit and Service Orientation : A bank is a profit seeking
institution having service oriented approach.
TO
8. Ever increasing functions : Banks continuously expand and diversify

their functions, services and activities.
T
O
9. Connecting link : Banks act as connecting links between the depositors

N
and borrowers. Banks collect surplus money of the customers and lend
the same to those who are in need of money.
10. Banking Business : The main activity of the bank is banking business
that is accepting deposits from the customers and lending the same to
those who need money. It is not a subsidiary to any other business.
11. Name identity : Banks always add ‘bank’ to their names. ex:- Canara
Bank, State Bank of India, Union Bank etc., It enables the customers
to know in which bank, that they are dealing with money.
131
Functions of Banks
1. Accepting deposits from public and others.
2. Lending money to public (Loans) and other institutions.
3. Transferring money from one place to another (Remittances)
4. Collecting money by cheques, drafts and bills.
5. Discounting of bills.
6. Hiring safe deposit lockers.
7. Conducting foreign exchange transactions.
8. Keeping valuables in safe custody.
9. Issuing letters of credit and guarantee.
ED
10. Conducting government transaction (State & Central).
H
Relation between a Bankers and customers
IS
BL
EP S
The relation between a banker and customers falls under two broad
R TB
U
categories, namely -
BE @K
1. General relationship
2. Special relationship
1. General relationship :
TO
• Primary Relationship (Debtor and creditor relationship).

• Subsidiary Relationship (Trustee and beneficiary relationship).
T
O
• Agent and Principal Relationship.

N
2. Special relationship Activity : Visit a bank

• Obligation to honour cheques. n ear your place a nd
collect information about
• Obligation to maintain secrecy of how it lends money or
accounts. higher education.
Services offered by banks :

1. Credit Cards
2. Personal Loans
3. Home and Vehicle Loans
132
4. Mutual Funds
5. Business Loans
6. Safe Deposit Lockers
7. Debit Cards
8. Trust Services
9. Signature Guarantees
Banking Transactions - Banks and Post offices :

Any sort of activity involving in money or exchange of money in an
account is viewed as bank transaction. Banks are institutions that deal
with money. Banks keep money of the customers in the form of deposits
and the money thus collected is lent to the customers who need money as
ED
loans. These loans are called Bank loans. Banks lend money and collect
H
interest on these loans out of the money collected by the bank in the
IS
form of interest, a part is given to the depositors as interest. This interest
BL
EP S
forms the income to the depositors. Banks invest the customers money in
R TB
U
National and International business and increase their funds.
BE @K
All the banking transations in India are controlled by The Reserve

Bank of India (RBI) which is known as Mother of Banks or Bankers Bank
or Central Bank of India. RBI formulates the monetary policy which should
be followed by all banks. Today we have State bank group, 12 Nationalised
TO
banks, 21 Private banks and 46 Foreign banks. The Network of banks

consist of 162904 bank branches. There are Rural banks, Regional Banks,
T
O
Govt and Private Banks also.

N
The recent development in banking industry is the inclusion of Post

Offices into its fold. The Indian Postal Department is planning to start
a bank to be tentatively called the “Indian Post Payment Bank” with a
network of over 1.55 lakh post offices spread all over India, 90 percent of
them are in and around semi-urban and rural
Activity : Visit a Post
areas. The Department is already providing
Office and get information
various financial services including a Post Office
about the working of
Savings Bank, National Savings Certificate, Postal Banking system.
Kissan Vikas Patra, Monthly Recurring deposits,
133
Postal Life Insurance, Pension payment, Money transfer etc. The Postal
Department is promoting a capital investment of Rs. 1,000 crores for
the bank transactions. It will be set up as a subsidiary with the Postal
Department.
Types of banks :
There are different types of Banks. Each type of Bank is specialsed in
different types of activities.
The Important types of Banks are:
1) Central Bank or Reserve Bank of India
2) Commercial Banks.
3) Industiral Development Banks
4) Land Development Banks or Agriculture Banks
5) Indigenous Banks (Money lenders or Sahukars)
ED
6) Co-operative Banks.
H
(The details about these banks have been learnt in economics section of
IS
previous class)
BL
EP S
R TB
U
TYPES OF BANK ACCOUNTS
BE @K
Generally four kinds of accounts can be opened in a Bank.

They are : (1) Savings Bank Account.
(2) Current Account.
TO
(3) Recurring Deposit Account.

(4) Term Deposit Account.
T
O
1. Savings Bank Account : This type of account Activity : Know the rate
N
is generally opened in banks by salaried of interest Banks offer to

persons or by the persons who have a fixed 1) Saving Bank account
2) current account 3) recurring
regular income. This facility is also given to
deposit account.
the students, senior citizens, pensioners etc.,
savings accounts are opened to encourage people to save money and pool
their savings. There is no restriction on the number and amount of deposits.
The money can be withdrawn either by cheque or through a withdrawal
slip available in the respective bank.
134
2. Current Account : Current account is opened by businessmen
who have a large number of regular transactions with the Bank. It
includes deposits, withdrawals and contra transactions. In current
account, amount can be deposited or withdrawn any number of times
in a day. Generally banks do not give any interest on these deposits
but collect service charges or bank charges on such account.
3. Recurring Deposit Account : These deposit accounts are generally
opened for a purpose to be saved for a future date. For future
requirements deposits are made regularly on monthly basis (For the
purposes of Wedding expenses of children Activity : Visit a nearby
to buy costly items like land, car etc.,) After Bank and learn about the
the period is over the total amount is repaid working methods of it.
with interest.
ED
4. Term Deposit Account : This type of account is opened for a fixed
H
IS
period by depositing a particular sum of money (the term of the
BL
EP S
deposit may be a month, six months, one year, five years or Ten
R TB
U
years). The Deposit amount cannot be Activity : Find the interest
BE @K
withdrawn before the expiry of the term. to be given for a fixed deposit
The Rate of interest is more depending upon of Rs. 50,000/- at the rate
of 8% annually.
the term in this deposit account.
PROCEDURE TO OPEN A BANK ACCOUNT
TO
To-day Banks have emerged as important Do you know this :

T
financial institutions. Banks provide a safe Joint Account: An account

O
N
environment and help to manage financial which is opened and operated

by two or more persons is called
transactions. To avail professional banking
‘Joint Account’.
service, it is mandatory for every individual
to open a bank account. Opening a bank account is not a difficult task. It
takes seven easy steps to open a bank account. they are :
1. Decide the type of account which you want to open : There are
several types of Bank accounts such as saving bank account, current
account, recurring Deposit account and fixed deposit or Term Deposit
account. Decide which type of account you want to open in the bank.
135
2. Approach the bank of your choice and meet its office : When once
you have decided to open a particular type of account. Approach the
bank officer and inform him about your wish to open the account.
The Bank officer will give you required forms and instructions.
3. Fill up the Bank account form or proposal form : Fill up this
form in all respects such as your name, address, occupation and
other details in the spaces provided. Make two or three specimen
signatures on the specimen signature card. This signature should
not be changed. If the account is to be opened in joint names, then
the form must be signed jointly and specimen signatures should be
given in separate specimen signature cards. Now a days the banks
insist on submitting the passport size photographs for the purpose
of identification, submit them.
ED
4. Give reference for opening your Bank account : Banks normally
H
require reference or introduction of the prospective account holder
IS
by any of the existing account holder or some respectable person.
BL
EP S
R TB
The introducer introduces the prospective account holder by signing

U
his specimen signature in the column meant for it. This reference or
BE @K
introduction is required to safeguard the interest of the Bank.

5. Submit the Bank account form fully filled in all respects and along
with required documents that is address proof, PAN Card, Aadhaar
TO
card, photograph etc.,

T
6. The officer will verify all the particulars submitted : He checks

O
whether the form is filled completely in all respects and the other
N
documents. If he is satisfied. Then he clears the proposal form.

7. Initial Deposit to be made : After getting the proposal form cleared.
The necessary amount is deposited in the bank. Then the bank issues
a passbook, a cheque book and a pay-in-slip book in case of savings
accounts. In case of term deposit or fixed deposit, a fixed deposit
receipt is issued. In the case of current account a pay-in-slip book
and cheque books are issued. For recurring deposit account pass
book and pay-in-slip book are issued.
136
Advantages of opening Bank Account :
• Bank account facilitates a safe custody of money.
• Bank account helps in making payments.
• Bank account helps in collection of money.
• Bank account holders get advances and loans.
• Bank account helps in smooth financial transactions.
• Bank account holders get safe deposit locker facilities.
Bank Operations :
The following major operations are provided by a banker :

• Provides savings bank facility to build up savings.
ED
• Focuses on mobilising deposits and looking for lending.
H
IS
• No restriction on number of deposits. No deposit less than Rs.10/-
BL
EP S
are accepted by the banker.
R TB
U
• Cheques, drafts or other instruments drawn only in favour of the
BE @K
account holder will be accepted for collection and crediting to the

concerned account.
• Cash can be withdrawn through cheques or withdrawal forms. If
the withdrawal is through withdrawal slip, the concerned account
TO
holder only can draw the money. Passbook should be produced

T
at the time of withdrawal. Withdrawal can also be done through

O
N
ATM (Automated Teller Machine) debit cards.

• The account holder can give a standing instruction and request
the banker for effective periodical payments such as Insurance
premium, Income tax, Electricity & Telephone bills, Water bill etc.,
• Interest at the prescribed rate will be calculated for each calendar
month on the minimum balance of credit of the account and is
credited to the account monthly, quarterly, half yearly or yearly,
generally in April and October or Feb and July.
137
• Account may be transferred between branches of the Bank at the
request of account holder. The request to closure of account should
state the reason for closure. The pass book, the unused cheque
leaves and the ATM debit card must accompany for such request.
(ATM cards are cut into two pieces across the magnetic strip)
EXERCISES
1. The word ‘Bank’ has been derived from the French word __________.
2. The Banker’s Bank is ______________ .
ED
3. An example for Natioanalised bank is ______________ .
H
IS
4. The National saving certificates are issued by ______________.
BL
EP S
R TB
5. The type of account where any number of transactions can be

U
made with Bank is ______________ .

BE @K
6. The deposits for a fixed term can be deposited in ______________

account.
TO
II Answer the following questions after discussion with your

friends.
T
O
7. What is a bank?
N
8. List out the characteristics relating to bank transactions.
9. What are the functions of a bank?
10. Explain the relation between the bank and its customers.
11. “The number of saving bank account holders is increasing” - Give

reasons.
12. What are the advantages of opening a bank account ?
138
III Activities :
1. Make a List of the names of the banks which you know.
2. Visit the branch of a bank and collect information regarding getting

the periodical interest banks offer to term deposit account.
IV Project :
1. Prepare a report on how to open a bank account by visiting a

branch and meeting its officer and open your account if you need.

ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
TO
T
O
N
139
Government of Karnataka
SOCIAL SCIENCE
(Revised Textbook - 2024)
ED
H
10 IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
Tenth Standard
TO
Part - 2
T
O
N
English Medium
Karnataka Textbook Society (R.)

6th Cross, Malleshwaram,
Bengaluru - 560 003
Content
Chapter
Chapters Page.No
No.
HISTORY
17 THE FIRST WAR OF INDIAN INDEPENDENCE (1857) 1
18 THE FREEDOM STRUGGLE 6
19 INDIA AFTER INDEPENDENCE 29
20 WORLD WARS AND INDIA’S ROLE 34
ED
POLITICAL SCIENCE
H
IS
21 INDIA’S FOREIGN POLICY AND GLOBAL CHALLENGES 44
BL
EP S
22 WORLD ORGANISATIONS 53
R TB
U
SOCIOLOGY
BE @K
23 COLLECTIVE BEHAVIOUR AND PROTESTS 64
24 SOCIAL CHALLENGES 71
GEOGRAPHY
TO
25 INDIA - LAND USE AND AGRICULTURE 81

26 INDIA - MINERAL AND POWER RESOURCES 91
T
O
27 INDIA - TRANSPORT AND COMMUNICATION 98

N
28 INDIA - MAJOR INDUSTRIES 107

29 INDIA - NATURAL DISASTERS 114
ECONOMICS
30 RURAL DEVELOPMENT 121
31 PUBLIC FINANCE AND BUDGET 128
BUSINESS STUDIES
32 ENTREPRENEURSHIP 138
33 CONSUMER EDUCATION AND PROTECTION 145
ii
HISTORY
Chapter - 17
THE FIRST WAR OF

INDIAN INDEPENDENCE (1857)

• Causes for the First War of Independence
• Immediate cause for the revolt
• Spread of the revolt and its nature
• Failure of the revolt and its effects
With the objective of expanding their rule in India, the British had
brought into force the Doctrine of Subsidiary Alliance and Doctrine of Lapse.
ED
Many native rulers rose rebel for their existence. Arms act, appointment of
H
Inam - Commission created dissatisfaction among Indians about British.
IS
As a result, Indians were upset. They were dissatisfied with the British
BL
EP S
administration too. This dissatisfaction surfaced as a major revolt in 1857.

R TB
U
While some Indians called this ‘The First War of Independence’, British
BE @K
historians called it ‘The Sepoy Mutiny’.
Causes for the First War of Independence:

Political causes: Many kingdoms lost their Know this :
TO
rights due to the promulgation of Doctrine of I n a m C o m m i s s i o n :

The Inam lands without
Lapse brought about by the British. Satara,
T
documents were confiscated.

O
Jaipur, Jhansi, Udaipur and other kingdoms

N
came under British control. Dalhousie cancelled the princely titles of the
Nawabs of Tanjore and Carnatic kingdoms. The Mughal sultans, the Nawab
of Oudh and other kings were dethroned. Consequently, lakhs of soldiers
who were dependent on these kings, became unemployed. This became a
strong cause for the protest of 1857 against the British.
Economic causes : Due to the industrial revolution in England, Indian
handicrafts and cottage industries suffered heavily. England, instead of
being a trading country, became a hub of industries. The Indian craftsmen
became unemployed. Primarily, the textile and wool industries became
sick and people lost their jobs. The cottage industries too suffered a death
1
blow. The British imposed a heavy tax on sale of Indian goods in England.
Because of the zamindari system, the landlords, acting as commission
agents between the Government and the farmers, exploited the farmers.
The right given to the taluks to collect tax was withdrawn. An ‘Inam
Commission’ was appointed and all the gifted lands without documents
(‘Inam lands’) were taken back. Due to this, the farmers felt insulted and
experienced many financial problems. This too led to the revolt of farmers
against the government.
Administrative causes: The British brought into force new civil and
criminal laws. These were applicable only to Indians. English became the
language of the courts. Most of the time the British judges favoured the
British. The aspirations of new rules were not understood by the common
people.
ED
Military causes : The condition of the Indian soldiers in the British army
H
was pathetic. The status, salary and opportunities for promotion that
IS
British soldiers enjoyed were not given to Indian soldiers. The religious
BL
EP S
sentiments of the Indian soldiers were disturbed when they were forced
R TB
U
to cross the oceans to serve on a foreign land.
BE @K
Eruption of the Revolt and its spread

Most of the Indian soldiers in the British army believed that if they
fought together, they could drive away the British from India. In this
situation, the soldiers were being given new rifles called ‘Royal Enfield’. A
TO
rumour spread among the soldiers that the cartridges used in these rifles
T
were greased with the fat of cow and pigs. While cows were sacred to the
O
Hindus, pigs were blasphemous for Muslims. This incident became the
N
immediate cause for the revolt.

The rumour that spread in the army troops at Barackpur led to severe
dissatisfaction. When the British officers ordered the Indian soldiers to
pull the safety catch with the help of their teeth, the soldiers rejected the
command and revolted against their superiors. At this juncture, an Indian
soldier named Mangal Pandey killed a British official. Subsequently, he
was arrested, tried and hanged.
Meerut was a strong military base of the British. When the British
ordered the Indian soldiers to use the greased cartridges, the soldiers
2
refused to carry out the order. The soldiers were imprisoned. As a result,
there was a revolt in Meerut. Indian soldiers rushed into the prison and
released the soldiers jailed there. This initiated seedling for the war of
independence. Later, the group of soldiers went to Delhi from Meerut. They
laid siege on the Red Fort and declared the aged Moghul king, Bahadur
Shah II as the Emperor of India. Protesting soldiers from different parts
of India reached Delhi. Consequently, the protest became
serious. It spread like wild fire to Kanpur and Jhansi.
In Kanpur, Nana Saheb rose in protest. Tatya Tope
was his assistant. In Jhansi, a revolt took place under
the leadership of Queen Laxmibai. When Kanpur fell into
the hands of the British, Tatya Tope came to Jhansi to
help the Queen.
ED
Thathya Tope
The heat of the revolt was felt in
Lucknow too. Ultimately, Lucknow was taken over by the
H
IS
British. The war spread to the south of river Yamuna. As
BL
EP S
a result, the soldiers in Jhansi felt encouraged. Jhansi Rani
R TB
U
Laxmibai who was enraged by the Doctrine of Lapse, declared
BE @K
war against the British. She took Gwalior under her control.
Jhansi Rani When the battle took place again with the British, the Queen
Laxmibai
laid down her life. Even today, the queen occupies a proud
position in the history of the independence struggle.
TO
Reasons for failure of the revolt :

T
The First War of Independence of 1857 failed due to various reasons.

O
N
The movement did not spread to the whole country. This struggle was
intended to protect the interests of a few rather than getting freedom for
the country. Instead of being an organized struggle, it erupted due to
certain unexpected reasons. The unity among the British forces and lack
of it among the Indian soldiers also led to the failure. There was no proper
direction or proper leadership. In addition, there was a lack of strategy,
expertise among soldiers, effective leadership, discipline and direction.
Many provincial kings, on account of their loyalty to the British, did not
support the struggle. The people lost confidence in the soldiers due to
their arson and looting.
3
Effects of the revolt :
The freedom struggle put an end to the administration of the East
India Company, and the administration was taken over by to the Queen
of England. The administrative responsibility was handed over to the
Secretary of Indian Affairs in the British Parliament. In 1858, the Queen
of England made a declaration. This declaration has been called India’s
‘Magna Carta’. The following points were included in it:
• The agreements made by the East India Company with the kings were
accepted.
• Ambitious expansion plans had to be given up.
• A stable government had to be provided to Indians.
ED
• There would be equality before law.
H
• The government would exhibit religious tolerance and not to interfere
IS
in religious matters of the country.
BL
EP S
R TB
The British realized that peaceful rule was not possible without
U
BE @K
support, trust and confidence of the Indians. This gives new route to
Indian freedom movement. Indians understood the inevitability of finding
alternative routes to obtain freedom from the British.
TO
EXERCISES
T
O

N
1. British historians refer to the 1857 revolt as ___________.

2. During the 1857 revolt, at Barakpura, British officer was killed
by _________.
3. Jhansi Rani fought against British and took ________ under her
control.
4. The declaration passed by the British Queen in 1858 is

called ________ .
4
II Discuss the following in groups and answer them:
5. The political factors inspired the revolt of 1857. How?
6. The economic changes of the time were responsible for the 1857
revolt. How?
7. What were the factors that disturbed the religious sentiments of

the soldiers during the 1857 revolt?
8. What were the immediate causes for the First War of Independence?
9. Make a list of the reasons for the failure of the revolt.
10. What were the features of the declaration of the British Queen in
1858?
ED
III Activities:
H
IS
1. On the Indian map, mark the kingdoms which were taken over by
BL
EP S
R TB
the British with the help of the Doctrine of Lapse.

U
BE @K
2. Organise a speech from an expert on “The 1857 revolt was the

First War of Independence”.

TO
T
O
N
5
Chapter - 18
THE FREEDOM STRUGGLE

• Indian National Congress
• Moderates, Extremists and Revolutionaries
• Freedom movement. The period of Gandhi
• Farmers’ and workers’ protests
• Leaders of the freedom movement
• Partition of India
ED
Rise of Nationalism :
In the history of India, freedom movement is a very important and
H
IS
dynamic chapter. Indians who suffered a lot under British rule showed
BL
EP S
their resistance effectively and became responsible for the first war of
R TB
Indian independence in 1857. As a result, the British government passed

U
BE @K
a proclamation in 1858 in which the rule of British East India Company

ended and began the administration of India in the name of Queen of
Britain. The Involvement of Indians in the process of law making began
through the act of 1861. As a result of all these, the new educated class,
TO
began to have the clear concept of Nationalism and tried to share the same
with the common people. Therefore, Nationalism took a definte shape. The
T
extended institutional feature of this itself is Indian National Congress.

O
N
There are many instances in India which opposed the establishment of

British empire. Many native rulers fought against British with an intension
of self interest. After 1857 revolt, many changes and effective reforms were
seen. Changes were seen in transport and communication, journalism,
establishing organisation and administrative changes. People organised
themselves to protect their interest and established many organisation.
Lord Lytton brought in 'Domestic papers control act' in 1878 to exercise
control people and Lord Rippon brought in 'Ilbert Bill' to bring in uniformity
in the judicial system. Opposing this, the Indian British people led an
organised effort and were successful.
6
The freedom struggle assumed a specific direction as a result of protests
all over the country. To avoid armed struggle, the British adopted certain
strategies. Consequently, the British Government declared the supremacy
of the Queen in 1858, and announced that Indians were British citizens.
Through this step, the British government declared provision of better
amenities to Indians. In the subsequent developments, the aristocratic
new generation who learnt English, started fighting for their rights in a
constitutional manner. This led to the establishment of Indian National
Congress.
Indian National Congress
Right from the time of Raja Ram Mohan Roy, the minds of middle class
people of India were getting prepared to face new challenges. Towards this
ED
end, many organizations were established throughout the country. Among
H
them, ‘The Hindu Mela’, ‘The East India Association’, ‘Poona Sarvajanik
IS
Sabha’ and ‘The Indian Association’ were prominent. They had limited
BL
EP S
R TB
scope and interests. They were waiting for a national level integration to
U
happen at an appropriate time. An opportunity came handy for organizing

BE @K
such an all Indian organization. In the year 1885, a retired English officer,
A.O.Hume established the Indian National Congress. It worked towards
creating political awareness and nationalist attitude.
TO
In spite of the diversity in India, the Indian National Congress struggled

to kindle the patriotic feelings of Indians. It published papers in the local
T
O
languages and started debates on political problems. As a result, the

N
people became aware of the political situation and its problems. The British
realized the growing strength of the Congress and started implementing
its ‘Divide and Rule’ policy. They separated Hindus and Muslims through
their manipulative techniques. In spite of this, the Indian National Congress
was able to formulate positive plans of action related to national issues.
By the end of the 19th century, differences surfaced in the Indian
National Congress. Based on the plan of action, beliefs and type of struggle
adopted by them, they were identified as moderates and extremists.
7
First Phase : Moderates (1885 - 1905)
Traditionally, the first 20 years of the
beginning of Congress are called the
‘Moderate Age’. Among the moderates,
M.G.Ranade, Surendranath Bannerjee,
Dadabhai Naoroji and Gopalakrishna
Gokhale were prominent. The moderates
trusted the British administration and Dadabhai Gopalakrishna
their impartiality. They used to place their Naoroji Gokhale
requests and appeals before the government

within the constitutional framework. The moderates Activity :
taught people about political situations. They Collect the photographs
of moderates and read
ED
conducted meetings, discussed problems and
their biographies.
placed before the government various requests
H
IS
related to development of industries, reduction of military expenses,
BL
improvement in educational standards, forcing the British government to
EP S
R TB
take up studies about poverty in the country etc.

U
BE @K
For the first time, the moderates critically analysed the ill-effects of the
British rule in India. They placed before the people facts and figures about
the drain of Indian wealth into England. Dadabhai Naoroji explained about
the transfer of Indian wealth to England and called it as Drain Theory.
TO
He maintained that encouraging imports and reducing exports created a

T
situation unfavorable to India, leading to drain of wealth. Since India had

O
to bear the burden of paying wages, pension and administrative expenses

N
of British officials, a lot of wealth was flowing into England. The Age of
Moderates is also called the Age of Generous Nationalism.
Second Phase : Extremists (1905 - 1920)
One group of Congress members who became unhappy with the
mild attitude of the moderates called them ‘political beggars’. Those who
criticized the moderate thinking and propagated extremist ideas were
known as Extremists. Aurobindo Ghosh, Lala Lajpat Rai, Bipin Chandra
Pal and Balgangadhara Tilak were the prominent extremist leaders.
8
Aurobindo Balgangadhara Lala Lajpat Bipin Chandra
Ghosh Tilak Rai Pal
Partition of Bengal : Bengal was the centre of protests and anti-British

sentiments. In order to curb this, Viceroy Lord Curzon proposed a plan
to divide Bengal citing administrative problems. East and West Bengal
based on Muslim and Hindu population were created. Thus, by creating
differences between the two communities, they tried to reduce the intensity
of freedom struggle.
ED
Extremists opposed the partition of Bengal in the year 1905, highlighting
H
it as an example of ‘Divide and Rule’ policy. Protests started mounting
IS
throughout the country against the division of Bengal in 1906. The
BL
EP S
Swadeshi movement was very important among these protests. Swadeshi

R TB
U
movement called for a ban on western goods and the organizations
BE @K
supporting the import of European items. They encouraged the people to

use Indian goods. In the backdrop of these severe protests, in 1911 the
British government withdrew the Declaration of Partition of Bengal.
Extremists maintained that good administration cannot be a substitute
TO
for independence. Tilak declared : “Swaraj is my birthright and I will get

it at any cost”. Thus, an independent India was the aim of extremists.
T
They started preparing the common people for freedom struggle. Through
O
religious functions they started organizing people for a freedom movement.

N
He encouraged people towards nationalism through the celebrations of

Ganesha, Shivaji and Durga Pooja. Lokamanya Tilak utilized his ‘Kesari’
in Marathi and ‘Maratha’ newspaper in English for freedom struggle.
Through these papers he called for the active participation in the fight for
freedom. He was imprisoned for his revolutionary articles and enquiries
were instituted against him. He wrote Geetha Rahasya in the jail.
The role of Revolutionaries in freedom struggle :
The revolutionaries dreamt of a totally free India. They strongly believed
that the British could be thrown out of India only by violent means. They
started establishing their secret branches in India and abroad, and engaged
9
in collection of money, arms and training of people. ‘Anusheelana Samithi’
and ‘Abhinava Bharata’ were important organizations of this kind. They
used bombs and firearms to achieve their Know this :
objectives. The government tried their best to Aurobindo Ghosh published
suppress them. The revolutionaries were a book 'Vartamana Rananiti',
arrested for murder attempts. They were in which he mentioned about
declared guilty and given life imprisonment. training of the army and skills
Many were hanged to death. V.D.Savarkar, of warfare. Barinder Kumar
Aurobindo Ghosh, Shyamji Krishna Verma, Ghosh published a daily
'Yugantara' with the same
Madam Cama, Khudiram Bose, Ramaprasad
views.
Bismil, Bhagat Singh and Chandrashekar
Azad were prominent revolutionary leaders.
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
Bhagat Singh Chandrashekar Azad V.D. Savarkar
In the north - eastern part of India, Jadonang and Gaidinliu formed an

TO
army of men and women of Naga tribal group respectively to fight against
British. The British government hanged Jadonang to death on the charges
T
O
of sedition and Gaidinliu was sent to Jail for her guerilla movement in
N
1932. She was in jail till independence.

Gandhian Era (1920 – 1947)
Gandhiji got his Barrister degree in England and
started his law practice in South Africa. The British
who were ruling South Africa, practised apartheid
and discriminated mainly against Africans and
Indians. People who were employed in low-paid jobs,
were not allowed to travel on trains along with the
white people and could not eat along with them. The
British treated them mercilessly. Gandhiji brought Gandhiji in South Africa
10
together the people who were discriminated against, and carried out
agitations and protests against the British in a peaceful, non-violent
manner. The success that he got to his movement against the British in
South Africa inspired Gandhiji to do the same in India and achieve freedom
from the British.
In the freedom movement of India, 1920-1947 is also termed Gandhian
Age. Gandhiji was in the forefront of the struggle till India won her
independence. With the entry of Gandhiji, the freedom movement gained a
new dimension. Gandhiji made use of indirect protests, non-violence and
satyagraha as the main instruments for the freedom struggle. He wrote
about his principles in the newspaper ‘Young India’. Satyagraha was his
main political weapon.
Know this :
With the entry of Gandhiji, admission to the Congress was made open to
ED
everyone and it became the common man’s organization. In order to press for
H
fulfillment of its demands, the organization resorted to non-cooperation and civil
IS
dis-obedience movement. It also suggested positive programmes for the upliftment
BL
of the society. To implement their plans, the Congress began the ‘Tilak Swarajya
EP S
R TB
Fund’ with an investment of one crore rupees. In this manner, a complete change
U
could be witnessed in the Congress with the arrival of Gandhiji in the organization.
BE @K
Hence, this period has been called ‘Gandhian age’.
The British government brought into force many regulations with a view
to suppress the increasing revolutionary activities. The most important of
them was the Rowlatt Act in 1919, which gave the judges power to arrest
TO
and interrogate people based on mere suspicion. Gandhiji protested against

this inhuman Act through satyagraha. It gained support throughout the
T
O
nation. Thousands of Indians participated in these protests against the

N
British.
Know this :
Satyagraha :
Satyagraha means it is not a way to apply physical pressure on anyone but
a struggle accompanied by self-respect. Gandhiji succeeded in using satyagraha
to fight against the apartheid policy in Africa. He used the same weapon in the
Indian freedom struggle.
Jallianwallah Bagh Massacre :

Punjab witnessed widespread protests against Rowlatt act. As the
protests turned violent, the control over Amritsar city was given to
11
General Dyer. Dyer imposed military rule in the city and banned all
demonstrations against the british rule. The protestors had decided to
assemble at Jallianwallah Bagh. They were not aware of this ban. About
20,000 protestors had assembled in this demonstration against the
Rowlatt act. This peaceful demonstration was in progress in high-walled
Jallianwallah Bagh which had narrow entrances. General Dyer arrived
at this place without any previous warning with his army, and attacked
the protestors from all sides with firearms. In this massacre, about 379
people died and thousands suffered serious injuries. This incident is called
Jallianwallah Bagh tragedy.
The government appointed Hunter Commission to conduct an enquiry
into the Jallianwallah Bagh tragedy, but it was of no use. The atrocities
against Indians continued.
ED
Know this :
H
In the backdrop of Jallianwallah Bagh
IS
tragedy, Rabindranath Tagore wrote a letter
BL
EP S
to the Viceroy and surrendered the

R TB
U
‘Knighthood’ awarded to him. The
BE @K
revolutionary Udham Singh killed General

Dyer who had massacred innocent Indians.
A Monument of Jallianwala Bhag
TO
Khilafat Movement
The Sultan of Turky was the religious chief of Muslims. He was called
T
Khalif. The atrocity against Khalif during the first world war was opposed
O
by Muslims across the world. Ali brothers started the Khilafat movement in
N
India in order to support the Turks. Gandhiji believed that only if Hindus
and Muslims fought together against the British, the British would leave
the country. In this context, he felt that participation of Muslims in the
Congress was vital. Hence, Gandhiji declared his support to the Khilafat
movement. This turned out to be a joint Hindu-Muslim nation-wide
movement against the British. Many national leaders and the Congress
took active part in the Khilafat movement.
Non-co-operation movement
In the year 1920, Gandhiji gave a call for a non-co-operation movement
against the British. Students supported his call by abstaining from schools
12
and colleges. Lawyers remained away from courts. Indian dignitaries
returned all the awards given by the British. Supporting this movement,
Motilal Nehru and C.R. Das sacrificed their law careers. During this period,
there was a stiff opposition to the visit of the British Prince. There were
widespread agitations against the visit throughout the country.
After seeing the intensity of the
agitation, fear surfaced in the
mind of the British. At this
juncture, thousands of people
jumped into the freedom struggle
at Chowri-Chowra in Uttar
Pradesh. In the year 1922, police
ED
used their force against peaceful
H
protestors. Enraged by this, the
IS
BL people tried to enter the police
EP S
R TB
Non-co-operation movement stations. Police resorted to firing.

U
When their ammunition got

BE @K
exhausted, the police ran into the station. The angry protestors set the
police station on fire. About 22 police were burnt alive inside the station.
This incident is termed Chowri-Chowra incident in history. The incident
TO
made Gandhiji unhappy. Gandhiji resented the violent incident and

withdrew his non-co-operation movement. The British government
T
O
considered Gandhiji responsible for the violent event. It sentenced him to

N
prison for six years. But in 1924, Gandhiji was released citing the reason
of ill-health.
Through the 1919 Act, Indians were given the opportunity
to contest elections. However, since the atrocities and
injustice by the British were continuing, some Congressmen
rejected the Act. With an intention of contesting elections
in the future, Motilal Nehru and C.R. Das, along with some
other Congressmen, established ‘Swaraj Party’ in 1923.
Motilal Nehru Through this party, they wanted to enter the legislative
13
assembly and oppose the policies of the British Know this :
In the corporation elections
from within. In the subsequent Belagavi
that took place in Calcutta in
Conference held in 1924, Gandhiji approved 1924, Swaraj Party won the
of the plan of the Swaraj Party and accepted majority. C.R.Das was elected
as the Mayor. He was known
it as a part of the Congress plan. Thus Swaraj as ‘Deshbandhu’.
Party became a part of the Congress.
According to the Government of India Act of 1919, there was a proposal
to appoint a Commission at the end of ten years. This Commission was to
examine the impact of the 1919 Act, suggest suitable changes if needed, and
submit it to the government. Accordingly, in 1927, the British Government
appointed the Simon Commission under the leadership of John Simon.
This commission did not have a single Indian as the member. Treating it as
ED
an insult to India, the Congress boycotted the Simon Commission. There
H
were widespread demonstrations during the visit of Simon to India. The
IS
people started shouting ‘Simon, Go back’. Wherever the Simon Commission
BL
EP S
R TB
went, it witnessed demonstrations, hartals and agitations. During this

U
time, Lala Lajpat Rai who was the leader of the movement, died after being
BE @K
injured in police caning. This made the Indians’ fight much more intense.
With an intention to reduce the hatred towards the government, as
soon as the Commission’s work was over, the British government decided
TO
to call a meeting of the Indian representatives and have a discussion with

them. The result was the Round Table Conference.
T
O
In the year 1929, under the presidentship Know this : On January

N
of Jawaharlal Nehru, a Congress Session was 1st, 1930, Jawaharlal Nehru

held in Lahore. During this conference, the hoisted the Indian tri-colour on
the banks of river Ravi.
Congress declared that ‘Purna Swaraj’ was
their aim. On January 26, 1930, the Congress celebrated Independence
day all over the country and supported the Lahore declaration. This
conference entrusted the responsibility of organizing the ‘Civil Disobedience’
movement to Gandhiji.
14
Know this :
• In the Dandi march, Karnataka’s 18-year old Mylara Mahadevappa also
participated.
• Karnataka Congress formed a committee with R.R.Diwakar, Koujalgi
Hanumantharao, Gangadhar Deshpande Hardikar and Karnad Sadashiva
Rao and started the production of salt at Ankola taluk in Karwar district.
Civil Disobedience Movement

Gandhiji, after assuming the leadership
of Civil disobedience movement,
submitted a Charter of 11 demands to
Viceroy Irwin. He had conveyed that if
these demands were not met, he would
start Civil Disobedience movement. One
ED
of the demands was abolition of tax
H
imposed on salt. But Irwin did not
IS
consider Gandhiji’s demands. As a result,
BL Dandi March
EP S
in the year 1930, Gandhiji travelled from
R TB
Sabarmati Ashram to Dandi in Surat on foot with his followers to produce

U
salt in the seashore. In this manner, he started the Civil Disobedience

BE @K
Movement. This event in history is popular as ‘Dandi March’.

Vijayalakshmi Pandit, Kamala Nehru, Vallabhai Patel, Rajagopalachari,
Babu Rajendra Prasad and thousands of others who participated in the
Civil Disobedience movement were arrested. This agitation spread to many
TO
parts of the country.

T
As mentioned earlier, as per the decision of the British government

O
to call a meeting of the Indian representatives, the First Round Table

N
Conference was held in 1930. The result was that the British understood
they could not take any decision without the participation of Indian leaders.
In this conference, an opportunity was created to allow untouchables
to be represented separately. In order to enable them to participate in
the conference, Gandhiji and other Congress leaders were released from
prison. But Gandhiji and the Congress refused to attend the conference.
Representatives of the princely kingdoms, leaders of different communities
like B.R.Ambedkar, M.R.Jayakar, Tej Bahadur Sapra, Mohammad Ali
Jinnah, Srinivas Shastri and others took part in the conference. Approval
was given to matters like Dominion status, responsible government and
15
casteist representation at the conference. But since the Congress did not
participate there, the conference was not productive. In order to bring the
Indian National Congress to the conference and help Britain achieve its
objectives, Viceroy Irwin met Gandhiji and discussed certain proposals.
The result of this discussion was the Gandhiji-Irwin Pact in 1931. In the
subsequent developments, the Congress gave up its Civil disobedience
movement and agreed to participate in the Second Round Table Conference.
Mohammed Ali Jinnah and B.R.Ambedkar participated in this conference.
In this conference, B.R.Ambedkar asked for separate constituencies
for the depressed classes during elections. This was not acceptable to
Gandhiji. As a result, there was difference of opinion between Gandhiji
and Ambedkar. Hence, even the II Round Table Conference ended without
any conclusions. But the British Government declared that they would
recognize the depressed classes’ request for separate constituency.
ED
Gandhiji began up a fast unto death agitation. Attempts were made to
placate Ambedkar. Consequently, Poona Agreement was reached. As per
H
IS
this agreement, out of the existing constituencies, some were reserved
BL
EP S
for depressed classes. In such places, only depressed classes leaders had
R TB
filed nomination as representatives of all people. Instead of a separate

U
constituency, some areas were reserved for the depressed classes.

BE @K
The British Government wanted to bring a Union government at the

Centre and provincial governments in the states. With this intention
in mind, towards the end of 1932, it called for the Third Round Table
TO
Conference. The Congress was not happy with the system suggested by the
government and hence did not participate in the conference. The British
T
government had intended to bring about many reforms through the Round
O
Table Conferences. In this backdrop, in 1935, the Indian Government

N
Act was promulgated. This act had provisions for an Indian Union and
provincial independence. Indians got political rights. Due to this, the
Congress and Muslim League participated in elections. The Congress won
the elections and formed a provincial government.
When the II World War started, as a result of political developments in
Europe, the Indian Viceroy unilaterally declared war against Germany. This
was opposed by the Congress which walked out of the Cabinet. Gandhiji
started an agitation opposing the Viceroy’s decision. In order to pacify the
Indians, Stafford Cripps was sent for mediation.
16
Quit India Movement (1942)
The British Government in the year 1942 sent Strafford Cripps to India
for peace talks. Cripps’ Commission put forward certain suggestions in
front of Indians. Giving dominion status to India, forming a Constituent
Assembly for the purpose, and giving freedom to the states to either join or
remain out of the Union were some of the suggestions. These suggestions
were not acceptable to Congress. On the 8th of August 1942, the Congress
started the Quit India Movement.
Know this :
Esoor Incident: Essor is a village near Shikaripura in the Mysore
province. During the independence struggle, this village was named
‘Swatantra Halli’. Here everybody wore the Gandhi cap. The villagers
ED
prohibited officials from entering the village, but, those officials who visited
the village in 1942 were forced by the activists to wear the cap. The
H
Sub-inspector who was with the officials protested against this and fired at the
IS
crowd. The enraged people killed him. Historically, this incident is referred to as
BL
EP S
‘Esoor Incident’.
R TB
U
Gandhiji gave a call to the Indians to ‘Do or Die’. In this context,

BE @K
many leaders like Gandhiji, Nehru, Rajendra Prasad, Abul Kalam Azad,
Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel, Acharya Kripalani, Kasturba Gandhi and others
were imprisoned. Since most of the Congress
TO
leaders were in jail, organizations other than

the Congress came into the limelight. This
T
O
movement paved the way for the emergence

N
of new leaders. Jayaprakash Narayan

assumed leadership of the movement. He
was a prominent leader of the Socialist wing
of the Congress. He carried out many Quit India Movement
revolutionary activities along with his

followers throughout India. The Socialists implemented their plans through
a group titled ‘The Freedom Struggle Front’. Through that organization,
they imparted training to workers. They urged the people to participate in
the freedom struggle. They collected funds, and gave a proper direction to
17
the movement. The interesting fact is that,
at this time, a movement began outside the
borders of India for its freedom. In this
context, the efforts of Subhash Chandra
Bose are unparalleled. After the 1937
elections, the Muslim League was not called
to participate in the government. When in Vallabhbhai Abul Kalam
Patel Azad
1939, the British government unilaterally
declared that India too would participate in the II World War, the
Congressmen in the Cabinet resigned their posts. At this juncture, Muslim
League celebrated ‘Vimukti Divas’. It did not participate in the Quit India
movement. It put forward its proposal for the partition of India.
ED
Farmers protests
H
IS
In the freedom struggle, farmers and labour organizations have also
BL
EP S
R TB
played a prominent role. During the British rule, farmers in many places,
U
revolted against landlords and European planters. They refused to grow

BE @K
indigo in Champaranya district. They staged agitations against land tax.

Gandhiji persuaded the British to abolish tax through satyagraha.
As a part of the national freedom struggle, the Congress tried to

TO
organize the farmers. Gandhiji had influence over the activities of farmers
T
in Champaranya, Kheda and other areas. Influenced by the Indian National

O
N
Congress, the farmers who were oppressed in the areas of Tebhag, Malabar
etc. rose in revolt against landlords and the British. The farmers’ problems
merged with the non-co-operation movement, Civil Disobedience and Quit
India movements. Many protests were organized under the banner of Kisan
Sabha. The protests used to be pro-Congress and, at times, anti-Congress.
The Telangana farmers’ revolt challenged the Andhra Reddy landlords and
the Nizam’s Razaks. Bengali farmers revolted against the exploitation by
landlords. In Maharashtra, the farmers protested against low wages.
18
Labourers Revolt
The labour movement started in Calcutta in the year 1827. People
started getting organized to fight for their rights in jute and textiles
industries and the railways. The railway porters staged agitation in railway
stations by shouting slogans and demanded higher wages from the British
officials. The Printers’ Union of Calcutta and the Bombay textile workers
created national awareness. The Madras Labour Union was established.
Subsequently, many labour unions were born. The Congress supported
these movements of the labour organizations.
The Tribal Movements
The Tax and Forest Act implemented by the British East India Company
provoked the tribal revolt. Of the tribal rebellions, the Santala’s revolt and
ED
Munda movement are prominent. In this regard, the Halagali Hunters
H
rebellion in Karnataka is noteworthy.
IS
The Santala tribal revolt can be termed India’s first movement. These
BL
EP S
R TB
tribals lived in Bengal and Orissa hillocks. When the permanent landlord
U
system was brought into force by the British, the people of this community
BE @K
became destitutes. Their lands went to the landlords. The landlords,

money-lenders and the British government behaved in a way that triggered
intolerance in the Santalas. The Company exploited the decent and peace-
TO
loving attitude of the Santalas. Enraged by this, the Santalas held secret
meetings and decided to loot the landlords and prominent citizens. The
T
agitation became intense in Barahat area and also in Bhagatpur and

O
N
Rajamahal. The rioters killed their enemies. As a result, the landlords and
money-lenders ran away. The government used the army
to stem the revolt and was successful. Many rioters were
arrested. Although the revolt by the Santalas ended, it
lent its voice to many similar protests later.
Subhash Chandra Bose
The most prominent among the revolutionary fighters
of India was Subhash Chandra Bose. Although he secured
Subhash Chandra
the 4th rank in the Indian Civil Services examination, he Bose
19
rejected the prestigious post in the British Service, and took an active part
in the freedom struggle. He was popularly called Netaji.
As a parallel to the peaceful struggle of Gandhiji, in the early part of
the 1930, Subhash Chandra Bose was engaged in the attempt to organize
Indians settled abroad and equip them for fighting against the British. He
travelled to Vienna, Berlin, Rome, Istanbul and other countries and inspired
the Indians there to support their motherland. The rise of Communism and
Socialism in Europe influenced the Congress in India and led to certain
changes. Socialist leftist ideology affected many people in the Congress
too. In this backdrop, Jawaharlal Nehru and Subhash Chandra Bose
established the Congress Socialist Party in 1934.
With Gandhiji’s support, Bose became Know this :
ED
the President at the Haripur Session of “India must be freed before the
the Indian National Congress in 1939. G e r m a n s c o m e … . . E v e r y d e f e a t
H
England received in Europe should
IS
However, a difference of opinion arose loosen the hold of British imperialism
BL
EP S
between Gandhiji who displayed a soft on India".

R TB
Subhash Chandra Bose

U
attitude towards the war policy of the
BE @K
British, and the harsh attitude shown by Subhash. Subhash objected to

the reluctance of Gandhiji to request international help at that time. In
1938, at the Tripuri (Jablpur District of Madhya Pradesh) Session of the
Congress, even against Gandhiji’s opposition, Subhash Chandra Bose
TO
became the President of the Congress. With that, the gap between Gandhiji
T
and Subhash widened. The plans of Subhash Chandra Bose, who desired
O
to stay within the Congress and fight the Know this :

N
British, suffered a setback. “I vow before God that I will

Disappointed with the Congress and liberate India and its 38 crore people
who are my countrymen……Even
Gandhiji’s techniques, Netaji left the
after independence, I will be forever
Congress and established a separate ready to shed even the last drop of
party called Forward Block. This party blood for the survival of my country.”
aimed to bring in progressive, fast Subhash Chandra Bose
changes. Subhash opposed the war
preparations of the British and the participation of India in the World War.
As a result, he was arrested by the British.
20
Know this :
INA
There were many Indian revolutionies working abroad for the
country’s cause. Among them was rashbehari Bose, living as a fugitive
from the British since 1915 in Japan. He seized the opportunity
oftered by the war to molilise Indians to an armed struggle against the
British. there were a number of Indian soldiers fighting on behalf of the
British. The Japanese after defeating the British in South East Asia,
took a number of Indian soldiers as prisoners of war. Major Fuziwara
a Japanese army officer persuaded captain Mohan Singh a prisoner of
war to work in colla boration with the Japanese for India’s freedom. In
march 1942 a conference of Indians was held in Tokyo and they formed
the Indian Independence League. This was followed by a conference in
Bangkok, where Rashbehari Bose was elected president of the League
and a division was taken to raise the INA. Captain Mohan Singh was
ED
appointed as the commander of INA. Which had about 40,000 Indian
H
Soldiers. This conference endorsed Subhash Chandra Bose to lead the
IS
movement. BL
EP S
Desiring to join hands with the enemies of the British, and thereby
R TB
U
defeat the British, Subhash Chandra Bose escaped from house-arrest and
BE @K
left for Germany. He gained the support of the German dictator, Hitler
to make India free. He tried to establish an army with the help of Indian
war criminals in Germany. Through Azad Hind Radio, he broadcast his
speeches to the Indians. He joined hands with Ras Behari Bose who had
TO
organized Indians to fight depending on the fate of Japan in the war. Ras
Behari Bose has established the military wing of the Indian Independence
T
League at Tokyo and named it Indian National Army. Later, he gave up the
O
leadership of the INA to Subhash Chandra Bose. At this juncture, Subhash

N
Chandra Bose gave the call “Delhi Chalo!” He urged the Indians: “Give me
blood, I will give you freedom!” There was a ladies wing in the INA named
Jhansi Regiment. Captain Lakshmi was the Commandant of this regiment.
In this manner, Subhash had planned a Activity :
military strategy through Rangoon to capture Write an essay on Opinion
Delhi which was in the clutches of the British. of Subash Chandra Bose
By that time, thousands of soldiers of the INA about freedom movement.
had prepared themselves to occupy Delhi.
Towards this end, as per Netaji’s command, they began an armed attack
on the Burma border. Fierce fighting took place between the British and
21
the INA. In the midst of this, Subhash died in a plane accident. The
British army captured the Burmese capital, Rangoon and arrested the
INA members. Later days saw many attempts of most of the Congress
leaders including Gandhiji working towards release of the INA soldiers.
Dr. B.R. Ambedkar

Dr. B.R. Ambedkar strongly believed that political
independence was meaningless without social
independence. He maintained that if a person from the
lowest of the low classes did not get social and economic
freedom, political freedom did not matter at all; it
remained only a mirage. He did not see India as only a
non-living political entity, but as one which had a living
Dr.B.R.Ambedkar
side to it, with feelings and emotions too. He carried out
ED
a study of the caste system and came up with a plan to eradicate it. In
H
order to prove that the untouchables had been denied basic facilities, he
IS
started ‘Mahad Tank’ and ‘Kalaram’ temple movements. He attended the
BL
EP S
three Round Table Conferences and gave valuable suggestions. Differences

R TB
U
of opinion surfaced between Gandhiji and Ambedkar with regard to the
BE @K
leadership of untouchables and upliftment of Harijans. The demand for a

separate electoral constituency for untouchables brought about a conflict
between Gandhiji and Ambedkar. Ambedkar was a diwan in the court of
the Maharaja of Baroda. He carried out his responsibilities as a member of
TO
the Mumbai Legislative Council and, later, Viceroy Executive Council, with
great meticulousness. Ambedkar did not join the Congress party. Instead,
T
he established an organization ‘Bahishkruta Hitakarini Sabha’ and two

O
N
separate parties named ‘Swatantra Karmika Party’ and ‘Republican Party

of India’. He published various newspapers like ‘Prabuddha Bharata’,
‘Janata’, Mukanayaka’ and ‘Bahishkruta Bharata’. He stayed away from
Communist and Socialist approaches, and worked towards progress of
agricultural labourers.
The constitution was framed as a guiding force Know this :

for independent India. Dr.Babu Rajendra Prasad “A leader without
was chosen as the President of the Constituent newspapers is like a
bird without wings.”
Assembly. Later, Dr.B.R.Ambedkar was
unanimously chosen as the Chairman of the Dr. B.R. Ambedkar
22
Constitution Draft Committee. He advocated equality in the constitution
and gave legal protection against practice of untouchability. The Indian
Constitution considers practice of untouchability a crime. After
independence, Dr. B.R. Ambedkar became the Law Minister. Though he
had been inspired by modernism, intellectualism and western philosophy,
Ambedkar remained faithful to his native Activity :
principles. He gave up Hinduism and embraced Read the Biography of
Buddhism. He believed that the same change that Dr.B.R.Ambedkar.
Marxism brought about through violence and
bloodshed, could be brought about by non-violence and peace through
Buddhism. He was posthumously awarded the ‘Bharat Ratna’ for his
lifetime achievements.
Jawaharlal Nehru
ED
Nehru entered the freedom struggle through Home
H
IS
Rule agitation. He was a prominent leader in the non-co-
BL
operation movement of 1920 and was the President of
EP S
R TB
Lahore Convention in 1929. During this convention, the

U
BE @K
objective of ‘Purna Swaraj’, a totally free India was declared.

When Gandhiji withdrew the non-co-operation movement,
Nehru got disappointed. Jawaharlal Nehru
Nehru’s ideas gave a new direction to political activities.

TO
He was influenced by Communist ideology. As a result, communist leanings

became strong in the Indian National Congress. Consequently, Nehru and
T
O
Subhash Chandra Bose established the Congress Socialist Party.

N
Nehru was the president of the 49th Convention of the Indian National
Congress. He declared that the Congress should stay away from the
imperialist war being fought at the international level. He argued that
‘Charaka’ and ‘Harijan’ movements were not very effective. At that session,
he appeared to have moved away from Gandhiji’s ideology. Though he
appeared to have stayed away from Gandhiji’s thoughts, his reverence to
Gandhiji had not decreased. As he was influenced by various intellectual
streams, he strived to achieve a holistic view with them. This is more
evident in his ‘Non Aligned Movement’ and ‘Mixed Economy’ principles.
23
Know this :
In ‘Mahad’, a place in Maharashtra, untouchables were not allowed to use
the water in the lake. The movement that enabled even the untouchables to use
the water is known as the ‘Mahad Movement’. Similarly, in a temple named
‘Kalaram’, untouchables were not allowed to enter. Even there, Ambedkar
started a revolutionary movement which enabled the untouchables too to enter.
However, though these movements created an awareness in people at that
time, they did not succeed to a great extent.
At the 50th Convention of the Indian National Congress, Nehru adopted

a softer approach towards his socialist and communist ideas. He declared,
“Today Congress supports complete democracy in India, and it will fight
for democracy, not socialism.”
We see Prime Minister Nehru as the architect of industrialization and
modern India. He also supervised, under the leadership of Home Minister
ED
Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel who was popularly known as ‘Iron Man’, to bring
H
together all the princely states and merge them with the Union of India.
IS
Later, Nehru laid the foundation for Indian democracy by reorganizing all
BL
EP S
the states on the basis of language. A mixed

R TB
Activity :
U
economic system which had principles of both Learn more about the
BE @K
capitalism and socialism was his contribution foreign policy framed by the
to modern India. He believed that growth was first Prime Minister, Pandit
possible through intense industrialization. He Jawaharlal Nehru.
was the pioneer who envisaged the development of India through five-year
TO
plans. With regard to foreign policy, India abandoned the political stand
of the two groups and advocated Non alignment policy. On the basis of
T
O
Panchasheel principles, he remained

N
away from power politics and aimed

to implement the formula of peace
and harmony. He died in 1964.
Mohammed Ali Jinnah
Mohammad Ali Jinnah joined
Indian National Congress in 1906
and worked as private secretary to
Dadabhai Naoroji. He defended Tilak
in court cases where he was accused
Jinnah and Gandhiji
24
of provoking unrest, and this brought him great appreciation. He joined
Home Rule League movement. In many conferences that took place in
1916, he spoke about the need for unity between Hindus and Muslims.
Since he was being seen as a pro-Muslim politician, he opposed the British
legacy. Condemning the Rowlatt Act, he resigned from his post in the
Central Legal Advisory Committee. He declared that he was a nationalist
Muslim in the Round Table Conferences. When in 1937, the Congress and
the Muslim League failed in forming the government after the elections,
he changed his strategy. As the days of declaration of freedom for India
neared, he intensified his demand for Pakistan in many ways. This led to
the partition of the nation.
Partition of India
ED
Throughout the freedom struggle, the Congress supported a united
H
India. The Muslim League, on the other hand, kept on demanding a
IS
nation for Muslims. In the Lahore Session of the Muslim League that took
BL
EP S
R TB
place in 1940, Jinnah declared that Hindus and Muslims could never
U
form a country. After the II World War, the Labour Party came to power
BE @K
in Britain. It adopted various measures to solve the political imbroglio in

India. It sent a Cabinet Mission to have talks with India about self-rule.
This Commission had talks with the Congress and Muslim League, and
TO
suggested federal form of government for India. It also recommended

formation of a Constitution Preparation Assembly and establishment of
T
O
an interim national government. A difference of opinion arose between

N
the Congress and Muslim League with reference to formation of interim

government. The Muslim League gave a call to observe 16th August 1946
as ‘Direct Action Day’ pressing for the formation of a separate nation. Due
to this, led to the communal riots across the country. The muslim league
did not participate in the constituent assembly presided over by Dr. Babu
Rajendra Prasad. The British were interested in dividing Hindu-Muslims.
British tried to protect their interest during the partition of Bengal and in
the implementation of 1909. Act can be observed here. The roots of division
laid by the British culminated in partition.
25
Relations between the Congress and
Know this :
Muslim League had worsened. At this time, On 30th January C.E 1948
the British government, declaring that it the man of unity of Hindu
and Muslims, Gandhi was
would transfer power soon, sent Lord assasinated when he was
Mountbatten as Viceroy to India in March going to attend a prayer meeting
1946. Mountbatten had talks with Gandhiji, by Nathuram Godse. Though
physically he killed Gandhiji,
Jinnah and others, and framed a plan to his aspirations for equality,
divide India. In July 1947, the India humanitarian sensibilities,
Independence Bill was passed and became d r e a m s o f b r o t h e r h o o d ,
remained as ideals of mankind.
an Act. Accordingly, on 15th August 1947,
two nations named India and Pakistan came into existence. Radcliff
Commission marked the boundaries of these nations. Pandit Jawaharlal
ED
Nehru took the oath as the first Prime Minister of India.
H
EXERCISES
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
1. The Indian National Congress was established in the year _________.

BE @K
2. The person who talked about the ‘Drain theory’ was ______________.
3. ‘Swarajya is my birth right’ was declared by ___________.
TO
4. The Ali brothers started the __________ movement.

5. Separate nation for Muslims was proposed by ___________.
T
O
6. The Lahore Session of the Indian National Congress that took place
N
in 1929 was presided by ____________.

7. Mahad tank and Kalaram temple movement was organised by
_______________.
8. The Jhansi regiment of Indian National Army was headed by
__________.
9. The place where Gandhiji carried out the Salt Satyagraha
was____________.
10. Quit India movement was carried out in the year____________.
26
II Fill in the blanks with given alternatives :
11. Founder of the Indian National Congress was _________.
a) Mahathma Gandiji b) A.O.Hume
c) Balagangadhara Tilak d) Gopalkrishna Gokhale
12. Publisher of ‘Maratha’ Paper was _________.

a) Jawaharlal Nehru b) Ras Bihari Bose
c) Balagangadhara Tilak d) V.D. Savarkar
13. Swaraj Party was established in the year _________.

a) 1924 b) 1923
c) 1929 d) 1906
ED
H
14. President of Indian National Congress of Haripura session was
IS
_________. BL
EP S
a) Sardar valbha Bhai Patel b) Dr. B.R.Ambedkar

R TB
U
BE @K
c) Lal Lajapath Roy d) Subhashchandra Bose

15. Iron man of India was _________.
a) Bhagath Sing b) Chandrashekar Azad
TO
c) Abul Kalam Azad d) Sardar Valbahi Patel

T
III Discuss the following in groups and answer them:

O
N
16. Which were the organizations in India before the establishment of

the Indian National Congress?
17. What were the demands put forward by moderates to the British?
18. Analyse the drain theory.
19. Name the revolutionaries in freedom movement.
20. Explain the role of Balagangadhar Tilak in the freedom struggle.
21. What were the reasons for withdrawing of partition of Bengal?
22. Describe Chowri-Chowra incident.
27
23. Describe the Salt Satyagraha.
24. What were the reasons for the failure of the Quit India movement?
25. Name the revolutionaries who took part in the Indian freedom
struggle.
26. What was the result of the second Round Table Conference?
27. Give an account of the achievements of Subhash Chandra Bose in
the independence struggle.
28. Describe the tribal revolts in the Indian freedom struggle.
III Activities:
1. Collect pictures of freedom fighters and prepare an album.
2. With the help of the internet, collect pictures and information about
ED
Jallianwallah Bagh tragedy and Dandi satyagraha.
H
3. Arrange lectures on Gandhiji’s policies of satyagraha and non-
IS
violence. BL
EP S
R TB
U
IV Project :
BE @K
1. Enact dramas depicting patriotism in your school.

TO
T
O
N
28
Chapter -19
INDIA AFTER INDEPENDENCE

• The consequences of the partition of India
• The problem of refugees
• The problem of formation of government
• The integration of the princely states
• The reorganization of states
The declaration of the British government on the 3rd of June 1947,

based on the report of Lord Mountbatten, formed the basis for the creation
ED
of two independent countries called India and Pakistan. August 15th 1947
H
was a day of joy and sorrow for Indians. Although Indians were not in favour
IS
of separate countries for Hindus and Muslims, it became inevitable due
BL
EP S
to the ‘Divide and Rule’ policy of the British. Many problems cropped up
R TB
U
along with independence. Many questions like rehabilitation of refugees,
BE @K
communal riots, formation of government, integration of various provinces,

production of food, development of agriculture, growth of industries etc.
had to be dealt with.
Problem of refugees
TO
The problem of refugees was one of the worst problems resulting from
T
the partition of India. Due to the division, people had to migrate from
O
N
Pakistan to India leaving their homes,familiar environment, property etc.,

and go to a new place. The burden of providing shelter, employment, land,
education, health care, conducive social environment to these refugees fell
on the government. Many efforts went into this process of rehabilitation.
Communal Riots
The seeds of hatred between Hindus and Muslims Activity:
sown by the British grew to explosive level by Discuss with your
teachers the problems
the division of the country. The links of religious
India had been facing in
harmony among various religions were very loose mainlaining peace in the
and weak. Hatred grew among those who lived country.
29
together leading to untold suffering. Bringing these religious conflicts
under control by the time of division was a herculean job for the government.
Mahatma Gandhiji strived hard to control the communal conflicts which
were leading to destruction of national unity. He took to fast in Calcutta,
reading the Bhagavad gita, praying that the people be liberated of their
intense passions.
Formation of New Government

A temporary government was formed on the 15th of August 1947,
when India got its independence.. Mountbatten continued as the Governor
General of the country. Jawaharlal Nehru took over as the first Prime
Minister of the country. The Indian constitution was adopted on the
26th of January 1950. The Chairmanship of the Constitution Drafting
ED
Committee was assumed by Dr. B.R. Ambedkar. After the constitution was
adopted, Babu Rajendra Prasad became the first President of the country.
H
IS
The constitution declared India as a sovereign, democratic, republic.
BL
Later, the 42nd amendment was brought in, and the phrases ‘Secular’
EP S
R TB
and ‘Socialist’ were added. On the basis of this, the Indian government
U
BE @K
followed an independent ‘Non-Alignment’ foreign policy. India brought in

parliamentary democracy into force.
Know this :
Parliamentary democracy: The Constitution Preparation Committee studied
TO
many constitutions and the experiences of different countries and came to the
conclusion that a parliament consisting of elected representatives was the best
T
form of government. Hence they rejected the presidential model and recommended
O
a parliamentary democracy.
N
Integration of Native Provinces

When the British left India, there were 562 provinces.
While dividing the country, the British had given three
options given to the provinces. Firstly, they could join
the Union of India. Secondly, they could join Pakistan.
Thirdly, without getting integrated with either of the
nations, they could remain independent. In this
backdrop, the Government of India invited all the
provinces to join the Union of India under the 1947 Vallabhbhai Patel
30
Integration Act. Those who joined in this way were given a privy purse
based on that province’s income. In addition, they were given some special
facilities and status. Later in the year 1969, the Government abolished
the payment of privy purse and other facilities. During the process of
integration, Junagadh, Hyderabad, Jammu and Kashmir displayed their
stiff opposition. Resolving all these problems and bringing about a
successful integration of provinces were done by the ‘Iron Man’ of India,
Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel.
Junagadh
The king of Junagadh wanted to merge his province with Pakistan.
People came on to streets against the king. Unable to face the people, the
king fled the kingdom. Based on the request made by the diwan of the
province to the Indian government, the army was sent to Junagadh to
establish peace. Junagadh was merged with India in 1949.
ED
Hyderabad
H
Hyderabad was under the Nizam’s rule. With the intention of remaining
IS
independent, the Nizam refused to join the Union of India. At this time,
BL
EP S
an armed struggle of the farmers of Telangana under the leadership of

R TB
U
Communists was under way. There was a severe hatred against Razakar
BE @K
the cruel army of the Nizam. The Indian government sent an army and
defeated the Nizam, paving the way for merger of Hyderabad with the
Union of India in 1948.
Jammu and Kashmir
TO
King Harisingh of Jammu and Kashmir wanted to remain independent.

Fearing a merger of Kashmir with India, Pakistan incited the tribals of the
T
O
Jammu and Kashmir valley. The National Conference of Sheikh Abdullah

N
which fought for the freedom of Kashmir, finally decided that merging
with India that had a democratic republican constitution, was better than
merging with Pakistan which had a religious constitution. Pressurized
by such forceful circumstances, king Harisingh requested for help from
the Indian government. After the Pakistani attempt failed, Jammu and
Kashmir merged with India with certain conditions. One part of Kashmir
remained with Pakistan. The Indian government complained to the United
Nations Organisation against this. On 1st January 1949, the UNO ordered
a ceasefire. The North-West region of Kashmir occupied by Pakistan is
called Pak-occupied Kashmir even now. The integration of Jammu and
Kashmir with India is unique compared to that of other provinces.
31
Pondicherry
The French colonies had continued their hold on Pondicherry, Karaikal,
Mahe and Chandranagar in post-independence India. As a result of the
struggle by the Congress, the Communists and other organizations urging
that it should be a part of India, in 1954, these provinces joined India.
Pondicherry was declared a Union territory in 1962. Pondicherry was
renamed as puducherry in 2006.
Goa
An endless struggle took place demanding the inclusion of Goa which
was under the imperialist rule of Portugal, with India. Though they were
ordered to give up Goa, the Portuguese brought in additional troops from
Africa and Europe, and tried to strengthen their hold by suppressing the
movement. In 1955, satyagrahis from different parts of India gathered at
ED
Goa and began a liberation movement demanding that the imperialists quit
H
Goa. In 1961, the Indian army intervened and took Goa under its control.
IS
Goa which remained a Union Territory till 1987, became a state later on.
BL
EP S
Linguistic formation of states

R TB
U
The most important democratic movement that was carried out in

BE @K
post-independence India was the movement for linguistic formation of

states. In order to provide good administration, demand was made to
mark the boundaries based on the language of the people in those areas.
The administration was not effective during the times of the British and
TO
the princely kingdoms because the language used for administration was
T
different from the language of the common man. In this backdrop, the
O
desire for linguistic formation of states was intense. After Potty Sriramulu,
N
under the aegis of the Andhra Mahasabha, went on a fast-unto- death

satyagraha for 58 days and then died in 1952 demanding the formation of
Vishalandhra state, this demand became much more severe. In 1953 the
government formed Justice Fazal Ali Commission in which Fazal Ali was
the Chairman, K.M.Panickker and H.N.Kunjru were the members. In 1953
Andhra Pradesh became the first state to be formed based on language.
As per the report of the Commission, the State Reorganisation Act came
into force in 1956. Accordingly, 14 States and 6 Union Territories were
formed in the country.
32
Kannada-speaking areas had been scattered under different provinces.
Demanding that all these areas be brought together, a movement began
under the leadership of ‘All Karnataka State Activity :
Formation Parishat’. Finally, on November 1st, Make a list of the states
1956, The ‘Mysore State’ was inaguarated. It was that came into existence
renamed as ‘Karnataka in 1973’. Today, India after 1970.
has 28 states and 8 union territories. Delhi is a
union terriotory as well as national capital territory.
EXERCISES
1. The last Governor General of the British India was _______.
2. The first Home Minister of India was ______________.
ED
3. The first President of India was _____________.
4. Pondicherry joined India as a Union Territory in _________.
H
IS
5. The linguistic organization of India took place in __________.
BL
EP S

R TB
U
6. What were the problems faced by India after Independence?
BE @K
7. How did the country deal with the problem of refugees?

8. Describe the manner in which Pondicherry was liberated from the
French.
9. How was Goa liberated from the Portuguese?
TO
10. Why was the state re-organisation commission formed by the

T
government of India in 1953?

O
N
III Activity:
1. Draw a map of India and mark the states.
IV Projects:
1. Make a list of the capitals and administrative languages of the
states in India.
2. With the help of your teacher, learn about the cultural significance
of our neighbouring states.

33
Chapter - 20
WORLD WARS AND INDIA’S ROLE

• The I World War
• The rise of dictators
• The II World War
• India's Role
The First World War

Even prior to 1914, there were frequent strifes and conflicts among
ED
Britain, Germany, France, Italy, Austria-Hungary, and Russia to gain
H
control over Europe and their colonies. Industrial revolution and new
IS
inventions led to severe competition among European countries. There is
BL
EP S
a history, spanning centuries, of rivalry among European countries with
R TB
regard to capturing markets and the resources of innumerable countries

U
of the world including India. The agreements arrived at in this process

BE @K
served to keep alive the boundary disputes of many countries. This shook
the balance of power equations between strong European countries.
Due to the above state of affairs, every strong nation indulged in extreme
militarization. Many alliance pacts were formed. Extreme nationalism
TO
began to develop in some countries. Imperialist tendencies strengthened.

The first World War divided the countries into two groups. Britain, France
T
O
and Russia formed the Triple Entente pact whereas Germany, Austria-
N
Hungary and Italy entered into a Triple Alliance pact. Within a short while,
Italy joined the rival group. As the war progressed, the groups changed
in structure.
The first world war took place between 1914 - 1918. The immediate
reason for the war was the assassination of the Austrian prince, Archduke
Franz Ferdinand on 28th July. This incident created a rift between Austria
and Serbia.
In the beginning, America was neutral. Russia was against Germany.
By the time the war ended, the picture had changed. America had joined
Britain and France. In November 1917, a Socialist Revolution took place
34
which prompted Russia to arrive at a ceasefire agreement with Germany
and withdraw from the war. Germany, which had been severely battered
by the attacks of the Triple Entente countries, accepted defeat and stopped
fighting.
In 1919, the Alliance signed a humiliating Versailles treaty. Austria-
Hungary and the Ottoman kingdoms lost their identity. Germany lost
most of its area. The map of Europe changed drastically. Many small
independent nations came into being. With the intention of preventing
wars in the future, the League of Nations was established.
Among the defeated countries, feelings of shame and humiliation gave
rise to aggressive nationalism. The compensation for the loss in war and
other decisions that were heaped on Germany affected the people adversely.
Unemployment, poverty and slump in development led to widespread
ED
dissatisfaction which was exploited by German industrialists for their own
profit. This atmosphere enabled the growth of a dictator like Hitler who
H
IS
caused the II World War. The weapons manufacturers and arms traders of
BL
Britain, France, Germany and America made enormous gains at this time.
EP S
R TB
U
Know this :
BE @K
In the World War I, approximately 1,00,00,000 people including soldiers and

civilians of both the parties lost their lives. 2,00,00,000 people were injured
and 35,00,000 people were permanently disabled. As in any war, even the
first world war was fought for the profit and greed of some people. Immense
TO
suffering and loss of lives resulted.
Rise of Dictators
T
O
Hitler : The situations that resulted after World War

N
I brought into existence dictators like Hitler in Germany

and Mussolini in Italy. Hitler first became the Chancellor
and, subsequently, after the death of Hindenberg, became
a dictator. Hitler became the Fuhrer (the leader). By the
time Hitler assumed power, communists and socialists
had grown powerful in Germany. Against this backdrop,
gaining the support of industrialists, Hitler suppressed
Hitler
the communists and socialists. He banned labour unions
and political parties. He declared that Nazi was the only political party.
35
Hitler planted his speculative thoughts and the fear that Jews would
control the world, in the minds of Germans, and created a fear psychosis.
He declared that the German Aryan race was the best in the world.
To propagate all this, Hitler adopted Nazi philosophy. The gist of Nazi
philosophy is: The best race in the world is the Aryan race. Only Germans
are eligible to rule the world. All other communities are eligible only to be
ruled. Jews are responsible for all the problems of Germans. In addition
to Jews, Communists, Catholics and Socialists are also responsible. These
people are unfit to exist. This sort of intense nationalism was put into
practice in the cruelest manner. To spread racial hatred, he appointed
a special minister called Goebels. He organized an outfit called ‘Brown
Shirts’ to create unrest and fear in the minds of people.
In this direction, the mass murders and massacres have become most
ED
famous in history. As per an estimate, he was responsible for the death of
H
6 million Jews and over a crore of other civilians. His mass massacre was
IS
called ‘Holocaust’. He enacted his rules of 1935 called the Nuremberg Laws.
BL
EP S
He imprisoned people in gas chambers without light or ventilation, without

R TB
U
giving them food or water. He made them work like slaves in concentration
BE @K
camps. He indulged in mass killings by using poisonous gas and mass

shootings. He designed ways of killing people irrespective of whether they
were children, women or old people. He employed his dictatorial power
for mass massacres. The ambition to win the entire world and popularize
TO
the Aryan race was one of the reasons for the World War II. The chapter
of Hitler’s racial hatred ended with his death.
T
O
Mussolini: The social movements, repercussions of World War I and the

N
Russian revolution led to the emergence of parallel political force with

Mussolini’s fascism. Intense nationalistic attitude, destruction of enemies,
glorification of violence, racial supremacy, imperialist expansion, support
to massacres were the main features of Fascism.
The Prime Minister of Italy from 1922-1943 was the founder of
the ‘National Fascist Party’. In 1925, he dismissed the democratic
government and legally assumed dictatorship. With the support of his
secret police, he destroyed all his political opponents. He prohibited
all labour strikes. He became a dictator. Joining hands with Hitler,
36
he became responsible for the death of lakhs of people. He was assassinated
in 1945.
World War II
Even before people forgot the deaths and casualties of World War I,
World War II started with the declaration of war by Nazi Germany against
Poland on September 1st 1939. World War II is the most destructive and
barbaric in the history of mankind. More than 30 countries were directly
involved in this war. World War II lasted from 1939 – 1945. The Great
Depression during the 1930 caused by the destructive policies of the
developed nations caused very difficult situations in Europe and America.
The life style of people deteriorated to a pitiable extent. Industrial and
agricultural production came to a standstill. Unemployment reached a
dangerous proportion. Against the backdrop of the defeat of World War
ED
I, humiliating treaties and enormous economic loss, there developed
intense nationalistic awareness in many countries. In Germany and other
H
European nations, industrialists donated huge amounts to propagate
IS
nationalism. Using this resource, movements of hatred and arrogance
BL
EP S
R TB
became active. People like Hitler in Germany and Mussolini in Italy, came
U
to power. In East Asia, Japan with an intention to expand its empire, was
BE @K
attacking Chinese territories.

During World War II, two rival groups, namely the Axis and the Allies,
were formed. There were Germany, Italy and Japan in the Axis group,
whereas there were Britain, France, Russia and other countries in the
TO
Allies group. When Germany attacked Poland, Britain which was an ally of
T
Poland, declared war against Germany. However, in reality, Britain did not
O
immediately rush to Poland’s help. Poland was captured by Germany. At

N
this time, since there was communism in Russia, Britain, France, America
and the others hoped that Hitler would attack Russia. Aware of this, on
24th August 1939, Russia signed a no-war pact with Germany (Molotov-
Ribbentrop Pact). As a result, Hitler attacked the West instead of the East.
Hitler entered into an agreement with Italy and occupied most parts of
Western Europe including Denmark, Norway and Holland. In 1941, Hitler
directed his attacks at Soviet Russia. Thus, Russia was forced to enter
the war. At this juncture, Japan joined Hitler’s camp. Japan attacked and
occupied many areas in America and Europe which were to the west of
the Pacific Ocean.
37
Italy and Germany attempted to capture the British colonies in North
Africa and the Suez Canal, but failed. In 1942, Russia defeated the German
troops in the Stalingrad war. After that, in 1943, Germany faced a series
of defeats. Russia played a major role in these defeats. The Allied forces
invaded Italy. America defeated Japan and got back the western Pacific
islands. With the Great March of the Russian Red troops and the attack
of the western nations, Germany was forced to surrender, and Berlin
collapsed. Hitler committed suicide in 1945. With this ended the war in
Europe. In 1945, America threw the first-ever nuclear bomb on Hiroshima
and Nagasaki of Japan. As a result, lakhs of people were reduced to ashes.
The effects of this are being felt by Japan even today. After Manchuria was
liberated by Russia on 15th August 1945, Japan surrendered totally. With
this, the Allied forces registered an emphatic victory.
ED
Know this :
How many died in the World War II?: In the world war II, civilians and soldiers
H
IS
put together, about 4,82,00,000 people lost their lives. German-led Axis forces lost
BL
EP S
about 82,00,000 people, while the Allied forces lost about 4,00,00,000. Maximum
R TB
U
number of people, that is, 2,00,00,000, died in Russia. China, with 1,00,00,000
BE @K
came second. With their sacrifice, victory over Hitler was impossible. The human
race could not have been saved from the Nazi regime.
World War II which witnessed the maximum deaths and injuries,

TO
caused pronounced social and political changes in the entire world. The
United Nations Organisation replaced the League of Nations. The victorious
T
Allied countries, namely the United States of America, Soviet Union of

O
Russia, China, Britain and France became the permanent members of

N
security council. The Soviet Union and the United States of America
became the most aggressive, rival countries. This paved the way for the
beginning of a cold war. Asian and African nations were benefitted due to
a conducive atmosphere for acquiring freedom. Britain, France and many
other nations lost many colonial establishments which were under their
rule. India’s independence may be considered in this background. Since
America used atomic power, it led to a severe competition in acquisition
of atomic weapons by powerful nations.
38
World wars and India’s Role
In the two world wars England would not have won without the
co-operation of India’s Army. This has been proved in the Military records
and war reports. Indian Army’s Courage, bravery,Sacrifice are alive even
today in the memory of the nations that took part in the wars.
In the I world war leadership of England played a decisive role. India,
under the colonial rule of England and many princely states helped
England by their military, Financially and by supplying many products.
As soon as the war started Empeor Gerge V made an appeal to the Indians
and the Indian National congress for help. At this stage Gandhiji returned
to India from South Africa and requested the people to help the British as
ED
they were in need of it.
H
About 1.5 million soldiers took part in this war from India. Apart
IS
from this, Indians helped by giving 1,72,815 animals consisting of 85,953
BL
EP S
horses, 10,781 camels, 5,061 bullocks and 65,398 mules. 7 crores of

R TB
U
small arms and ammunition, 6 lakhs rifles and so on. Apart from this,
BE @K
between 1914-18, India supplied 4,19,20,223 garments, raw materials,

manganese, mica, timber, tea, rubber were also supplied.
TO
T
O
N
Mysore Lancers
39
Maharaja Krishna Raja Wodeyar IV wrote a letter to Viceroy in
August 1914 that he will help the British at this crucial time of war.
Immediately he contributed 50 Lakhs of rupees from Mysore state for
this purpose. In September 1914, the Mysore Lancers regiment were
ordered to be ready to move to Egypt for war in support of Britain.
Regimentdar B. Chamaraja Urs was sent with Mysore Lancers to the
battlefield and Col J. Desiraja Urs was also sent to the battlefield as
Maharaja’s representative. Mysore Lancers consisting of 23 officers,
444 non-commissioned officers and men with 528 Horses, 49 mules
and 132 followers left Bangalore on 13th October 1914 to take part in
the war. Major M.H. Hundersan accompanied it.
In November 1915 the Mysore lancers fought against the enemies in

Suez canal province and in November 1917 they led in seizing gaza of
palestine.
ED
They made the enemies to flee out of that area as it was reported by
H
commander in chief of Egypt to the viceroy. They destroyed the Turkish
IS
army and captured palestine, syria, Damascus and Alleppo cities.
BL
EP S
R TB
U
A prominent part was played by Mysore Lancers and Jodhpur
BE @K
Lancers in taking control of Haifa. The Jodhpur lancers, led by Major

Dalpat Singh took the frontal position but was killed. Captain Aman
singh took command and led the charge straight into the enemy camp.
The Mysore lancers attacked his Austrian battery. Even today we find
TO
both the Jodhpur and Mysore lancers are part of the reconstituted 61st
cavalry the only horse mounted regiment of the Indian Army.
T
O
Some of the important commandants of Mysore Lancers were A.T.

N
Tyagaraj, A. Lingaraja Urs, Subbaraja Urs, B.P. Krishne Urs, Mir Turab
Ali, Sardar Bahadur, B. Chamaraja Urs and regimentdar B. Chamaraja
Urs and Col. J. Desiraja Urs.
The Hyderabad Lancers also took part in the war. The efforts of the
Mysore, Jodhpur and Hyderabad Lancers were immortalised by erecting
beautiful war memorial at New Delhi as Teen Murti Bhavan, actually
derives it's name from the Teen murti’s i.e. three statues of Mysore,
Jodhpur and Hyderabad Lancers at the Circle which incidentally is as
Teen Murti Marg.
40
As a Symbolic gesture of friendship with Israel India renamed Teen
murti Chowk war memorial during the visit of prime minister Benjamin
Netanyahu on 14th January 2018. as Teen Murti Haifa Chowk and the
road as Teen Murti Haifa Marg.
Inspite of all the help taken by England, it did not keep upto its
promises and in 1919 it passed the Rowlatt Act which resulted in Jallian
wala bhag massacre.
India and the II World war :

World war II was a watershed moment in modern world history and
drastically changed the social and political map of the world. and especially
of India under the colonial rule at that time. The dominant historical
narratives of world war II have been predominantly Eurocentric. India
underwent extraordinary and irreversible changes between 1939-45. The
entire environment of India underwent change as thousands of natives
ED
put on the military uniform to fight in places like west Asia, Malaya,
H
Burma, Iraq, Iran, Syria, North and East Africa, Sicily, Mainland Italy,
IS
Greece, Crete, Cyprus, Ethiopia and Somaliland. India was the dividing
BL
EP S
line between Germany in the West and Japan in the East.
R TB
U
Colonial India’s involvement in the war has often been studied against
BE @K
the backdrop of the on going freedom struggle, the varying attitudes of

Indian National Congress, the Muslim League and the formation of the
Azad Hind Fauz under Subhas Chandra Bose. Indian resources and
soldiers aided the allies in winning the war.
The new found confidence and belief in their own abilities as national
TO
people stemmed not from the nationalist movements aimed against the
T
war but from the professional experience they gained during the war.
O
N
England utilised the agrarian products and industrial goods for the
war. The ordinance factories upgraded their technology and expanded
the volume of output of war -related industrial goods. Thus quantitative
and Qualitative development of weapons somewhat raised the readiness
of the Indian troops during the latter part of the II world war.
The techniques of small war which the Indian Army had learnt in the
North - West Frontier helped it while combating Italians in East Africa.
Intensive training and combined arms techniques enabled the Indian
Army to drive back Erwin Rommel’s Africa korps. The participation of
the Indian Army in defeating the German Armed forces during II world
41
war is a high watermark in Indian Military History. The Indian Army was
defeated by the Imperial Japanese Army in 1942. The Burma campaign
between 1942-45 proved to be significant for the Indian Army as they
received rigourous, tactical and innovative military training under the
Indian command, especially the General Head quarters and South East
Asia command. This helped for victory in the Burma compaign during
late 1944-45.
The war ended in 1945 and resulted in many political changes all
over the world. Many countries which were under the hold of England
became independent.

Nations Year
Lybia 1951
ED
Sudan 1956
H
Ghana 1957
IS
BL
EP S
Nizeria 1960
R TB
U
Alzeria 1962
BE @K
Kenya 1963
Zambia 1964
EXERCISES
TO

T
O
1. World War I ended in the year__________.

N
2. Versailles Pact was signed in the year __________.

3. Fascist dictator was _______________ .
4. The leader of the Nazi Party in Germany was _____________.
5. World War II started in the year __________.
6. Japan attacked the American Naval Centre at ___________.
7. As the head of Mysore Lancers __________ was sent to the war field.
42
8. Explain the immediate cause for World War I.
9. ‘Nazi ideology destroyed Germany’. Justify this statement.
10. What were the causes for World War II?
11. Name the Commandants of Mysore Lancers.
12. What were the result of the World War II?
13. Where is Tin murti chowk?
14. How did Britain utilise the resources of India during the World
War II?
III Activities :
ED
1. Collect the information on the impact of the wars on the human
H
generation.
IS
2. With the help of internet and newspapers, collect information and
BL
EP S
R TB
write an essay on the attempts being made by India, along with

U
other nations, in order to establish peace at the global level.

BE @K
IV Projects:
1. Draw a map of the world and mark the countries of the Allied
Forces and the Axis Powers.
TO
2. Collect pictures of the flags of different countries of the world.

T
O
N

43
Chapter - 21
INDIA’S FOREIGN POLICY AND

GLOBAL CHALLENGES
• A brief introduction to India’s foreign policy
• Denial of human rights • Economic Inequality
• Arms race • Terrorism
Political Scientist Karl Wolf gang deusch says if civilization is destroyed

in future, it will not by famine or plague but by international relations and
foreign policy. His words highlights the importance of studying foreign
policy. Jawaharlal Nehru’s role in laying a solid foundation for India’s
ED
foreign policy is significant hence he is called “Father of Indian Foreign
policy”.
H
Meaning and definition of Foreign Policy : The policy followed by a
IS
nation in dealing with other nation is called Foreign Policy. Today every
BL
EP S
nation needs its own Foreign Policy.

R TB
U
According prof. Mahendrakumar : “Throughout course of action for

BE @K
achieving objectives in Foreign relation as dedicated by the Ideology of

National interest”.
Factors determining Indias Foreign Policy : Determinants of Foreign
Policy are the decisive factors that drive the formulation of Foreign Policy. A
TO
country’s Foreign Policy is based on the Geographical, Historical, Cultural,

Social, Economic, Political, Demographic, Military and philosophical
T
background of that country. India’s Foreign Policy also shaped by several

O
factors. They are as follows :

N
1. Common determining factors :

1. unity and sovereignty of the nation.
2. Interdependence.
3. Protection and development of national interests.
4. Stimulating factors.
2. Internal determining factors
1. Geographical location of the nation
2. Size of population
3. Ideological economic and military aspects
44
3. External determining factors
1. International conditions.
2. Relations with international organisation.
3. Global public opinion.
The above general, internal and external factors have their own
influence on the formulation of India’s foreign policy.
Foreign policy of India :
As every country has its own foreign policy to protect its interests. India
has formulated its own foreign policy based on its geographical, cultural,
social, economic, political and moral background.
Evolution of Indian Foreign policy : The evolution of India’s foreign
policy can be trace back to British period. In 1925 the Indian National
Congress created a separate department of external affairs to deal with
foreign countries, for convenience of study its evolution can be divided in
ED
to three stages.
1. Jawaharlal Nehru’s Idealism phase (1947-1959) : During this phase
H
Nehru’s Idealism greatly influenced foreign policy of India. Idealism is
IS
an Idea that inspires every one to live in peace. Nehru’s foreign policy of
BL
EP S
idealism proved in his stand for taking the Kashmir issue to the United
R TB
U
Nations (UNO)1947 for a peaceful settlement. The Panchasheela agreement
BE @K
with China in 1954, support for Non alignment, anti colonialism, anti-
apartheid and anti-imperialism reflected his stance, but his Ideal foreign
policy came under criticism due to insidious policies of countries like
China, USA and Pakistan.
2. Phase of Strategic Realism (1959-1991): Jawaharlal Nehru pursued
TO
a policy of peace full coexistence with China. But due to China’s attack on
India in 1962 Nehru himself reconsidered his Idealistic policy with China.
T
O
International relations no one is a permanent enemy and no one is a

N
permanent friend; Nehru seems to have belatedly understood the practical

truth that there are only permanent interests. Giving shelter to Dalailama
of Tibet an enemy of China in 1959. In 1961 military conquest of Goa from
Portuguese marked the beginning of strategic realism. After Nehru prime
ministers like Lal Bahadur Shastri, Indra Gandhi, Rajiv Gandhi led the
development of strategic realism. Lal Bahadur Shastri opposed American
policy in Vietnam even knowing it could lead to Food crises in India. Indra
Gandhi was responsible for Liberation of East Pakistan from west Pakistan
and creation of Bangladesh. During period of Rajiv Gandhi, Sumo Dorang
events with China were the examples of India’s strategic realism from 1959
to 1991.
45
3. Economic experimental phase (1991 to present) : In International
politics a country’s economic power has major impact on balance of power.
India realized this lately during Narasimha Rao’s period India abandoned
protectionist economic policy. Then adopted globalization and opened up
to the world in the form of liberalization, privatization and allowed private
investment. All the subsequent prime ministers supported and encouraged
this policy as a result India is now recognized as the 5th largest economic
power in the world. A foreign policy that empowers the country’s economy
has become increasingly popular. Despite considerable differences with
several countries todays foreign policy is implemented which may not lead
to economic crises.
Principles of Indian Foreign Policy
1. Opposition to colonialism : India itself was a colony of European
countries be fore Independence. It fought against British colonialism and
ED
got independence. So India is aware of the effects of colonialism. It always
H
oppose colonialism in International forums.
IS
2. Opposition to imperialism : India opposes the imperialistic policy of
BL
EP S
rich countries who expands their empire by exploiting poor countries in

R TB
U
the name of colonialism.
BE @K
3. Opposition to Racial discrimination : As caste system rooted firmly

in Indian Society. In European, American and African countries the policy
of discrimination based on body colour is practiced. India opposes both.
4. Policy of Non Alignment : After 1945 the world was divided in to two
TO
groups between America and Russia. India remained neutral and protected
T
its interest without joining any of the group. This is called Non-Aligned
O
policy.
N
5. Priority for the progress of African and Asian Countries : When

we look at the sovereign countries on world map we come to know that
African and Asian countries are economically backward due to colonialism.
It is India’s stand that all these colonised countries once must come in to
mainstream of development.
6. Support for disarmament : India supports the stand for preventing
the production of Atomic bombs, Hydrogen bomb and other life threatening
weapons. However India has produced nuclear weapons only as a self
defence against external attacks. India is committed to the policy of
‘No first use’.
46
7. Support to United Nations (UNO) and world peace: Having made
Buddha’s mantra of peace as principle of its foreign policy India is
supporting United Nations which itself is established for world peace and
its perseverance.
Thus India’s foreign policy is subject to several policy norms in the
international forums safeguarding its economic, political, social, cultural
and military interests.
Global Challenges and India’s role
Being the biggest democracy in the world India as emerged as Fifty
largest economy in development and a leader among the developing
countries. India is emerging as a global power and the voice of Non-
aligned and other Backward countries. In this situation India has realised
its role in problems facing by the world. In order to deal and manage
the global challenges according to its capacity. Ist has Implemented a
ED
contextual foreign policy to balance with other countries and International
H
organisations.
IS
After the second world war there was a setback to colonial and
BL
EP S
imperialist policy in world. With change of old world the new world emerged.
R TB
U
This era began with the establishment of UNO in 1945. However many
BE @K
Global challenges such as Denial of Human Rights, Arms race, Economic

Inequality. Racial discrimination and terrorism are still in existence.
1. Deniel of Human Rights : Just and favourable human and social
conditions for the development of Human personality are called Human
TO
rights. Humanists have advocated the Human rights, that every one born
with it. but unfortunately most of the people of world have been denied
T
these Human rights for a long time. We can see denial of Human rights
O
based on factors like religion, race, gender, cast, colour and Nationality.
N
American wars of Independence 1776, French revolution 1789,

Russian revolution 1917, Freedom struggle of India and other countries
that happened in the first half of the 20th century are the struggles for
human rights.
Universal Declaration of Human Rights : The world witnessed two
destructive Global wars in the First half of the 20th century. World has
also witnessed the brutal policies of dictatorship leading to loss of lives
of many. Indiscriminate violence of nations led to the deaths of millions
brutally suppressed freedom and rights of the people. In contrary to this
UNO was established. On 10th December 1948 UN adopted universal
47
declaration of Human rights in its General Assembly. Hence on 10
December International Human rights day is celebrated every year. The
United Nation universal declaration of Human rights is considered as an
important milestone against denial of Human rights.
Slavery, Human trafficking, Child labour, exploitation of women, etc
are prohibited under universal declaration of Human right. Right to life,
liberty, Right to self defence, Right to Religious freedom, Cultural and
Educational rights are Constitutional recognised rights in all democratic
countries. But we can still see denial of Fundamental rights in authoritarian
regimes and monarchies.
India’s Efforts to Protect Human Rights:
India has always advocated universal human rights. India has been
advocating protection of Human rights in united nations General Assembly.
Fundamental rights are guaranteed in Indian constitution. India oppose
ED
genocide and all forms of exploitation and oppression. India tries to protect
Human rights through united Nations and other global organisations. India
H
IS
has established National Human rights Commission and State Human
Rights Commissions in this regard. BL
EP S
R TB
2. Arms race : Arms race is the competition among the countries for
U
production, stockpiling and use of arms.

BE @K
Disadvantages of Arms race : Fear, Instability, among the countries has

increased the possibilities of war. It hinders in achieving world peace. It
leads to Financial loss and economic instability. Former President of USA
Eisenhower once expressed. ‘This world in Arms is not spending money
TO
alone it is spending sweat of its labourers, genius of its scientists and the
hopes of its children’s’. This statement confirms the ill effects of Arms race.
T
To avoid all the mentioned evils disarmament is the only need of the hour.
O
N
Disarmament : Disarmament is essential for survival of present and future

world. It is the only solution to stop the Arms race.
Meaning : Disarmament means the reduction or elimination of certain
or all types of armaments (weapons) for the purpose of ending Armament
race. The question of disarmament and Arms control is considered very
serious due to the production of Nuclear weapons or bombs chances
of war increased. There is a famous saying, ‘we must put an end to war
otherwise war will put an end to mankind’.
As India is one of a peace loving nation it Advocates disarmament. The
elimination of weapons is essential for global security. A number of global
agreements have been signed to achieve disarmament (Denuclearisation)
48
they are Strategic Arms limitation treaty (SALT), Nuclear Non proliferation
treaty (NPT), Comprehensive test Ban Treaty (CTBT), Proliferation Ban
Treaty (PBT), Biological weapons convention (BWC) all of these considered
as important global treaties in preventing Arms race. India makes
favourable effort for arms controls that can lead to definite destruction.
In this regard all nations including India need to make efforts.
3. Economic Inequality : The present day world-family facing a very
big issue of economic inequality among its members. This situation is
partially the historical legacy of colonialism and exploitation. European
powers have established their colonies in Africa, Asia and even in Latin
American Countries. Due to colonialism and imperialism the resources
of the country from Asia, Africa and Latin America were looted. Owing to
this policy of imperialism those countries who suffered alien Colonial rule
have remained economically backward. Their progress has been hampered
till the first half of the 20th Century. After independence, those countries
ED
especially African and Asian did endeavour to achieve economic progress.
H
But lack of sufficient capital to develop agriculture, industry, transport
IS
and communication, science education, health etc. Such underdeveloped
BL
EP S
countries had to depend upon foreign aid.
R TB
U
After 1945, in the bipolar world American bloc and Russian Communist
BE @K
bloc started assisting these backward countries But at same time this
economic inequality and poverty situation of these countries have been
exploited to serve the national interests of the advanced countries.
Characteristics of Economically backward countries
TO
Poverty and unemployment rates are high. In adequate utilization of

natural resources. Poor quality of education. Ill health and malnutrition
T
is high. Lack of technology, lack of proper infrastructure is found in these

O
countries.
N
India has taken following Reform measures to Reduce Economic in

Equality
At this situation, India has launched the policy of non-alignment.
She advocated for the economic assistance to the needy countries by rich
nations without any conditions. Thereby India has championed the cause
of national pride of the economically weak countries; but at the same time
India stood for the smooth flow of capital investment by rich nations.
Third world : The term third world was used for the first time by a French
Alferd Sauvy. The idea of third world seems to emphasis the concept of
49
poor nations. These nations try to over come problems like lack of food,
lack of capital, lack of technological knowledge, lack of health facilities,
lack of higher education opportunities and similar problems. Similar
phenomena like unnecessary spending in foreign countries free trades,
inadequate competition, globalization etc are having a negative impact
on poor countries many times. In solving all these the united nations
and developed countries need to make complimentary efforts. India as
progressive nation advocates economic justice and equality among all
nations of the world.
4. Terrorism : Terrorism can also be known as extremism. This is a
forceful pressure tactic. Terrorism is a political strategy aimed at serving
purpose of extremists organisations. It intend to create atmosphere of
fear. Such acts of organized violence are illegal and anti social in nature.
ED
The collapse of world Trade Centre in 2001, series of blasts in U.K. Iran,
India, Pakistan, Afghanistan, Indonesia etc show the alarming magnitude
H
of global level terrorism. Terrorism fueled by religious, fundamentalism,
IS
separatist ideologies, Leftist thoughts, liberation motives, racialism etc.
BL
EP S
Even a state can sponsor terrorism by funding terrorist organizations in

R TB
U
other countries.
BE @K
Negative effects of terrorism are as follows. It causes loss of life,

property, it is a hindrance to economic development it threatens socio
culture aspects, causes mental disturbance, disrupts law and order it is
a worry to global security of various countries. Road Transport, Railways,
TO
Airways, government offices, highly populated areas, market places are

T
some of the vulnerable targets of terrorism. Propaganda is normally

O
accompanied with terrorism. It is in the form of unconventional warfare.

N
Suicidal attacks, hijacking, gun-battles, bombing, keeping the targeted

persons or innocents as hostages are some of the heinous technique of
terrorists.
India is considered as one of the soft bases for terrorists. Kashmir,
Nagaland, Mizoram, Assam etc have been chosen as the targets of terrorism
in our Country. Terrorist attacks have taken place in many places like
series blast in 1993 on Taj Mahal palace hotel and railway stations in
Mumbai on 26 November 2008, the Parliament in New Delhi in 2001 also
in places like Hyderabad, Chennai, Bengaluru, Bodh Gaya and others. It
50
indicates that India is prone to extremism or terrorism. Even Naxalites and
separatist groups in North-east States of India carrying terrorist activities
funded by some countries also challenging the internal security of nation.
Neighbouring counties like Pakistan and China have been accused many
a time for their role in terrorist activities in our country.
Steps taken by India to tackle challenge of terrorism:
National Investigation Agency (NIA) has been established it has formed
special forces to counter terrorist operation. India is strongly oppose
terrorism within India and in foreign soil and is constantly asking for global
co-operation to counter terrorism. Government has created ATS (Anti
terrorist squads), Established Intelligence Agencies like IB (Intelligence
Bureau) RAW (Research and Analysis Wing) using through it strong themed
intelligence system). A financial intelligence unit has been setup to prevent
ED
the transfer of funds to terrorist organisations. India signifies its supports
on the global fight against all forms of terrorism.
H
IS
The history of mankind brings home one truth. Violence and terrorism
BL
EP S
have achieved little whereas truth, non-violence, compassion and

R TB
U
sacrifice have achieved a lot. The assassinations of Mahatma Gandhiji,
BE @K
Shyamaprasad Mukharji and Indira Gandhi did not create new history. On
the contrary, Buddha, Mahavira, Basaveshwara, Gandhiji, B.R. Ambedkar,
Nelson Mandela, Dalailama and Mother Teresa spread enthusiasm, new
light and peace to the whole world. The effects of peace and compassion
TO
are greater than those of violence and hatred.

T
Know this :
O
N
Abbrevitions :
SALT - The Strategic Arms Limitation Treaty.
NPT - The Nuclear Non-proliferation Treaty.
CTBT - Comprehensive (nuclear)-test-ban-treaty.
BWC - Biological Weapons convention.
NIA - National Investigation agency.
ATS - Anti-terrorism squad.
RAW - Research and analysis wing.
IB - Intelligence Bureau.
51
EXERCISES
1 The architect of Indian foreign policy is __________.

2 The world human rights day is celebrated on __________.
3 India as a peace loving country advocates __________.
II. Discuss in group and answer the following questions.

4 What is foreign policy
5 Which are basic principles of India’s foreign policy ?
6 Which are the challenges faced by world after the second world
war ?
ED
7 Mention the measures taken by India to protect human rights.
H
8 Arms race is a way for global destruction, in this backdrop mention
IS
the result of arms race. BL
EP S
R TB
9 What are the features of economically backward nations? Describe

U
the reasons for their backwardness.

BE @K
10 Mention the measures under taken by India to remove economic

inequality among nations.
11. Describe the effects of terrorism.
TO
12. What measures undertaken by India to tackle challenge of

terrorism?
T
O
N
III. Activities :
1 Collect the information of Human Rights Commission in
safeguarding human rights.
2 Collect information on child rights activist Kailash Satyarthi.
IV. Project :
1 Make a study of great personalities who fought against violation
of human rights.

52
Chapter - 22
WORLD ORGANIZATIONS

• Establishment of UN • Objectives of UN
• Organs of UN • Achievements of UN
• Agencies of UN • Regional Co-operation
United Nations :
Establishment - 20th Century has witnessed
two global wars. After the First World War,
ED
League of Nations was established to maintain
peace, but it failed. As the Second World War
H
began in 1939. When that war was going on,
IS
serious efforts have been made to establish
BL
EP S
another world organisation to secure lasting
R TB
peace. Leaders like Winston Churchill of

U
England, Joseph Stalin of Russia, and

BE @K
Franklin D. Roosevelt of America decided to

have a new global organization. The term
‘United Nations’ was coined by President
Franklin D. Roosevelt and was first used in
TO
the declaration of 1st January 1942 signed by

26 countries. The UN as the World organization
T
came into existence on 24th October 1945. At

O
present there are 193 member nations in The UN. Its headquarters is in
N
New York City, Membership is open to all peace loving countries. India is
one of a founding member of UN.
Aims and objectives of the UN :
The Charter of the UN is its basic document which contains 111
articles divided into 19 chapters. The Preamble of the UN Charter starts
as follows; “We the people of the United Nations...”
The objectives of the UN are: 1) To maintain international peace and
security 2) To develop friendly relations among nations, 3) To establish faith in
fundamental human rights, 4) To achieve international cooperation in solving
international problems of economic, social, cultural or humanitarian character,
53
5) To establish justice and respect for international obligation and 6) to
function as a center for harmonizing the actions of nations.
Organs and functions of the UN :
The UN Charter has provided for six principal organs.
1) General Assembly : This is the General

Assembly
general body consisting of all the
members of the U.N. Each member Security
Secretariat
country can send 5 members but Council
have only single vote. The Assembly United

at its first session elects a President Nations
International Economics
for a term of one year. It also elects Court of and Social
Justice Council
17 vice Presidents and 7 Chairmen
ED
for the 7 standing Committees. The
Trusteeship
ordinary session normally Council
H
commences in September and lasts
IS
Organs of UN
until mid December. A two BL
EP S
third majority of members present and voting

R TB
Do you know this :

U
is required on all important questions. The
BE @K
The official languages of annual budget is to be approved by General

the UN are Arabic, Chinese,
English, French, Russian
Assembly. Emergency meetings of the Assembly
and Spanish. may be summoned to discuss urgent issues.
It is playing a prominent role in almost all
TO
global issues as ‘a World Parliament’.

2) The Security Council : This is the most powerful organ and executive
T
O
or cabinet of the UN. It consists of 15 members out of which 5 nations-

N
U.S.A., Russia, Britain, France and China are the permanent members and
other are non permanent members. The non-permanent 10 members are
elected for a term of two years by the General Assembly. These members
represent various geographical regions. Each member has one vote.
The permanent members enjoy VETO power while the non-permanent
members do not enjoy VETO power. India desires to have a permanent
membership of this organ.
Security Council is primarily aiming at solving international disputes
through peaceful means. If there is a necessity, it may direct the UN peace
keeping force (IPKF) for international peace and security. It elects the
54
judges of the International Court of Justice and recommends the name
for the post of the Secretary General.
3) The Economic and Social Council : This Council consists of 54
members elected by the General Assembly. 18 members of this Council
shall be elected each year for a term of 3 years. The Council elects a
President among its members.
The main functions of Economic and Social Council are as follows:
i) To study and report about international economic, social, cultural,
educational, health and related matters. Accordingly issues like that
of refugees, status of women, housing etc come under its purview
(functional area).
ii) A number of issues such as the status of refugees, women and
housing issues come under the purview of this board.
ED
iii) It makes recommendations for the observance of human rights and
fundamental freedom.
H
IS
iv) It can conduct (convene) international conference pertaining to
BL
EP S
human resources, culture, education etc.
R TB
U
v) The Council coordinates the wok of specialized agencies like
BE @K
International Labour Organization (I.L.O.) Food and Agricultural

Organization (F.A.O.) World Health Organization (W.H.O.) etc.
4) Trusteeship Council : Trusteeship Council is a Committee set up
to look after the colonial territories during their transition period. When
TO
they were emerging as sovereign (Independent) Nations. (Trusteeship

Council also called Board of Trustees) The total 11 areas were under the
T
administration of Trusteeship Council, now all these regions became

O
independent and got self Government. The Republic of Palau was the last
N
territory under the administration of this Council. With the emergence

Palau as a sovereign republic in 1994 the Trusteeship Council lost its
relevance (importance). Today no geographical area is under administration
of this Council.
5) International Court of Justice : It is the principal judicial organ
of the U.N. and all members are the parties to the statute of this Court.
It consists of 15 judges elected for a term of 9 years and is eligible for
re-election. Its permanent seat is in the Hague of Netherland. It elects
its own President and Vice President for a term of 3 years. The Court
takes decisions on majority basis. Along with judgments on international
55
disputes, it gives advisory opinions on any legal question. The decision of
court are important on moral and ideological forms. But the court does
not enjoy any compulsory jurisdiction to countries.
Inspite of these limitations, the Court has contributed towards
international peace and security in its own way.
Do you know this:
Benagal Narasinga Rau was the first Indian to be selected as the as the
Judge of the International court of Justice. He hailed from Mangalore. Nagendra
Singh was the first Indian serve as the president of international court of justice.
Raghunandan Swaroop Patak, and the Dalveer Bhandari also served as judges
of International Court of Justice. Presently Dalveer Bhandari appointed for second
term as a Judge.
6) The Secretariat : This comprises the Secretary General and Staff
ED
of the U.N. The Secretary General is the Chief Administrative officer
H
of the Organization who is appointed by the General Assembly on the
IS
recommendation of Security Council for a five year term. The Secretariat
BL
EP S
is located at the head quarters of the UN in New York, USA, having its
R TB
U
branches in Geneva (Switzerland), Vienna (Austria), and Nairobi (Kenya).
BE @K
All the day to day administrative work, planning and organization of UNO
come under its purview.
Do you know :
UN Secretaries General :
TO
1 Trygve Lie (1946-1952) Norway.

2 Dag Hammarskjold (1953-1961) Sweden.
T
O
3 U.Thant (1961-1971) Burma (Present Name Mynmar).

N
4 Kurt Waldheim (1972-1981) Austria.

5 Javier Perez (1982-1991) Peru.
de Cuellar
6 Boutros Boutros Ghali (1992-1996) Egypyt.
7 Kofi A.Annan (1997-2006) Ghana.
8 Ban K Moon (2007-2016) South Korea.
9. Antonio Guterres (2017- ____) Portugal.
UN and Noble Peace Prize
1. In 1961 the than Secretary General Dag Hammars Kjold
2. In 1988 for United nations Peace Keeping Force.
3. In 2001 Jointly to Secretary General Kofi Annan and UN.
56
Achievements of UN The achievements of UN can be summarized as
follows. The united nations is working in its own methods for establishing
world peace through solving economic crisis and also solving social and
educational problems.
The achievements of UN can be listed as follows:
1) It resolved Korean conflicts, Swiss canal crisis and Vietnam problem
2) Continuously working for the solution of Kashmir and Palestine-Israel
dispute.
3) UN continuously making efforts towards the goal of disarmament.
4) Trying to solve economic, financial and international trade related
problems through world bank, IMF, International Monetary Fund,
W.T.O World Trade Organisation.
ED
5) Even trying to eradicate communicable and non-communicable
H
diseases through World Health Organisation (W.H.O.)
IS
BL
EP S
6) Through declaration of Universal Human Rights seeking their
R TB
implementation world wide.

U
BE @K
7) Striving are making efforts to end apartheid, imperialism and

colonialism.
8) Striving to prevent ill effects of global warming.
TO
Agencies of U.N :
a) F.A.O. (Food and Agricultural Organization): With an intention to
T
O
fight against poverty, hunger and mal-nutrition all over the world F.A.O.
N
was started in 1945. Its main organs are a) Conference b) Council and c)
Director General. It aims at I) Improvement of agriculture, 2) Provision of
more nutritious food 3) Liberation of the world population from hunger
and 4) Improvement of the living conditions of the rural people. Its Head
Quarter is in Rome of Italy.
b) W.H.O. (World Health Organization) : In order to protect and improve
health of mankind World Health Organization was established in 1948.
W.H.O. strives to eradicate epidemics like Cholera, plague, malaria, small
pox and COVID-19 etc. It fights against AIDS, Cancer and similar global
level health hazards. WHO is successful in eradicating small pox from the
57
world. In its agenda there are issues like population explosion, environment
protection, hunger and malnutrition. In all these fields the service of WHO
is very significant. Its Head Quarter is in Geneva of Switzerland.
c) UNESCO: (United Nations Educational Scientific and Cultural
Organization) :
It was established in 1945 and its headquarters Activity:
is in Paris. This is a prominent specialized organ List the historical
mainly dealing with the promotion of science, monuments of Karnataka
education, and culture throughout the globe. It which are included in the
aims at the development of technical education, UNESCO world heritage
information technology, creative thinking, list.
cultural and environment studies. In the
development of knowledge and its dissemination UNESCO assists state
and non-state institutions all over the World.
ED
d) UNICEF (United Nations International Children’s Emergency Fund)
H
: This specialized agency came into existence in the year 1946 to look
IS
after the welfare of children especially after the Second World War. Later
BL
EP S
in 1957 it became a permanent institution. Its main objectives are to

R TB
U
provide favourable condition for the development of women and children.
BE @K
It extends assistance to all the needy countries of the world to fulfill these
goals. In 1965 UNICEF won the Nobel Peace Prize. The money collected by
selling the greeting cards by this organization is utilized for the welfare of
the children. Thus, it is a popular humanitarian organization.
TO
e) I.M.F. (International Monetary Fund) : After Second World War with

an intention of reconstructing World Economy and encourage International
T
Economic Cooperation two organisations namely IMF (International

O
Monetary Fund) and IBRD (International Bank for Reconstruction and

N
Development) were established at Britton Wood Conference in 1944. The

IMF became operational after 1947. Its head office is in Washington of
USA. It try to solve international economic problems.
It aims at solving international economic problems. It strives to promote
world trade, economic stability and sound balance of payment situations.
This Institution consists of Board of Governors, Executive Directors and
Managing Directors. The functioning of IMF has been widely appreciated
for its efficiency and transparency. It may be described as Central Bank of
central banks of different countries. It strives to harmonize the economic
relations of advanced and poor nations.
58
f) I.B.R.D. (International Bank for Reconstruction and Development):
I.B.R.D. born at Britton Wood Conference is one of the important Institution
belongs to World Bank Group. This institution started in 1944. Its
headquarter is in Washington. This has been established with the aim of
economic rejuvenation of the world after the Second World War. It extends
huge loan facilities to all the needy member states for the development
of agriculture, industry, transport and communication etc. It helps to
promote World trade and balance of payment adjustments. For all the
developing nations World Bank or IBRD is extending very useful financial
assistance. It consists of Board of Governors, the Executive Directors and
the President.
g) I.L.O. (International Labour Organization) : The International
Labour Organization was established after First World War as a organ of
ED
league of nation and later continued as a agency of UN it is a century old
organisation. As the very word suggests this is mainly aiming at the welfare
H
of the working class. Its headquarter is in Geneva of Switzerland. Every
IS
member state sends two representatives to its Administrative Council one
BL
EP S
R TB
from labour class and another from the management. Issues like social
U
security, protection from health hazards, standard of living etc. of working

BE @K
classes come under the purview of I.L.O. Even the maternity benefits of
women labour, minimum wage, housing benefits etc. are also dealt by this
organization. Though the decisions of I.L.O. are only advisory in nature,
still the Member states do respect them. Its general conference is like a
TO
Global Parliament of the working place and seeks to protect their interests.
T
This agency got Noble Peace Prize in 1969.

O
h) U.N.C.T.A.D (United Nations Conference on trade and

N
Development): This world agency is mainly concerned with the promotion

of global level trade and commerce. It strives for smooth international trade
by providing technical assistance. It helps to avoid any policy barriers and
thereby promote international trade and commerce. Thus, it intends to
economic progress of the Family of Nations.
i) W.T.O. (World Trade Organization) : After Second World War to remove
obstacles in the International Trade Another Organization namely World
Trade Organization was established on 1st January 1948. All the member
states have signed an agreement called GATT (General Agreement of Trade
59
and Tariff). It aimed at solving any sort of problems relating to international
trade and commerce. In place of this agreement on 1st January 1995
WTO was came into existence. It functioning along with the World Bank
in formulating policies on international trade and commerce. It help
Developing nations to solve some difficulties owing to free trade policy. It
can be regarded as the 3rd economic pillar of World Trade and commerce
along with IMF and IBRD.
Regional Cooperation: In the present day world we can observe many
regional organizations which facilitate mutual understanding and
cooperation among the member States. The following are some of the main
organizations.
1) Commonwealth of Nations: This was formally called British
Commonwealth of Nations and later the word ‘British’ has been deleted.
ED
It started in 1926 and most of the countries including India which got
H
independence voluntarily joined this organization. It is symbolically
IS
headed by the British Crown. At present there are 56 countries in the
BL
EP S
R TB
Commonwealth of Nations and its headquarter is in London. Prime

U
Ministers, Finance Ministers and Foreign Ministers of the member nations

BE @K
participates in the meetings of this organization. Upholding of democracy,

liberties, assistance to eradicate poverty, promotion of world peace, sports,
science, and cultural ties are some of the objectives of Commonwealth
TO
of Nations. This Organization helps to promote friendly ties among the

member states.
T
O
2) South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) : In 1985

N
South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation Came into existence.

It consists of 8 countries viz. India, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Srilanka,
Maldives, Nepal, Bhutan and Afghanisthan. This is mainly aspiring for
the promotion of welfare of these member states. The main objectives of
SAARC are the promotions of economic growth, social progress and cultural
development through mutual cooperation. In order to fulfil these objectives
a number of Technical, Standing as well as Action Committees have been
established. Of course, mutual distrust and a number of disputes among
the member states stood as the stumbling blocks (obstacles) on the path
of the progress. The ‘Unanimity’ rule which means the acceptance of all
60
the Member states for any decision proved to be a handicap of SAARC.
It could not solve the dispute among its members. Still its periodical
meetings provided opportunity for leaders to have amicable discussions.
A number of seminars and workshops, training programmes have been
jointly sponsored by the Member States in the fields of Science, technology,
agriculture etc. India plays vital role in the working of SAARC. Its Head
Quarter is in Katmandu of Nepal.
3) European Union: The European Union or EU is a Union of 27 European
countries. It was established in 1992 by the Treaty of European Union
in Maastricht (A city in the Netherland). It implements a common single
market, a single currency, common agricultural and trade policy etc.
The most important EU institutions are i) the Council ii) the Commission
iii) the European Parliament, iv) the European Court of Justice and
ED
v) European Central Bank. As such EU may resemble a federation or
H
Confederation. Supporters of the European Union agree that it is a force
IS
for peace and democracy. European Union is the successor of European
BL
EP S
R TB
Economic Community (EEC). The members of the EU have transferred to

U
it considerable sovereignty. Its head office is at Brussels of Belgium.

BE @K
4) Association of South East Asian Nations (ASEAN) : The Association

of South East Asian Nations came into existence in 1967. Its head office
is at Jakarta of Indonesia. Its original members are Singapore, Malaysia,
TO
Indonesia, Philippines and Thailand. Now there are 10 countries in this

organization. The main objects of ASEAN are i) to accelerate the economic
T
O
growth, social progress and cultural development in this region; ii) to

N
promote active collaboration and mutual assistance in economic, social,

cultural, technical, scientific, administrative fields etc. The ASEAN is not a
military alliance. Although India sympathized with the aims and objectives
of ASEAN she has not joined this it acting as observer.
5) The Organization of African Unity : The Organization of African
Unity was formed in 1963. A large number of African states which gained
independence have initially evolved a number of regional associations.
Later, they formed this Organization of African Unity. It stands for the
principles of self-determination of all the independent African States.
61
It upholds freedom, equality, justice and solidarity of African countries.
The member states of OAU expressed their determination “to fight against
neo-colonialism in all its forms”. The membership of the OAU is open
to all independent sovereign states of Africa who are willing to abide by
the Charter. This organisation renamed as Affrican Union (AU) in 2002.
Presently there are 55 members of this organisation. In 2023 G-20
Summit of New Delhi Affrican Union Members were given its permanent
membership.
The Organization of African Unity consists of i) Assembly of Heads of
States and Government, ii) a Council of Ministers, iii) a Secretariat, and iv) a
Commission of Mediation, Conciliation and Arbitration. The OAU has played
an important role in denouncing colonialism, apartheid, imperialism etc.
ED
You should know :
World Bank Institutions:
H
IS
1) IBRD (International Bank for reconstruction and Development)
BL
EP S
2) IDA (International Development Association)
R TB
3) IFC (International Finance Corporation)

U
BE @K
4) MIGA (Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency)

5) ICSID (International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes)
EXERCISES
TO

1 UN has been established in __________.
T
O
2 The Headquarters of UN is situated in the city of __________.

N
3 The organ of the UN resembling the Cabinet is __________.

4 Tenure of Judges of International Court of Justice is __________
years.
5. The head office of FAO is at ______________.
6 International Court of Justice is at __________.
7 The present Secretary General of UN is __________.
8 World Health Organisation has been started in the year __________.
9 SAARC has been established in the year __________.
62
II. Discuss in group and answer in Two or Three sentences.
10 Who are responsible for the formation of UN.
11 Which are the main organs of UN?
12 Who are the permanent members of Security Council?
13 What are the objectives of WHO?
14 Prepare the list of activities of International Labour Organization?
15 Expand the word SAARC.
III. Discuss in group and answer in 6 to 10 sentences.
16 List out the objectives of UN.
17 Explain the formation of General Assembly.
18 What are the activities of Economics and social Council?
ED
19 Explain the role of UN in maintaining world peace.
20 What are the functions of UNESCO.
H
IS
21 Explain the role of IMF in solving the economic problems of the
World.
BL
EP S
R TB
22 List out the objectives of Commonwealth of Nations.

U
BE @K
23 Explain the European Union.
IV. Activity :
1 Collect the historical pictures of Karnataka which comes under

TO
UNESCO World Heritage cites according to 2023 report and make

list of the style of their architecture.
T
O
V. Project :
N
1 Collect the information from Newspapers about the peace keeping

activities of the UN.

63
SOCIOLOGY
Chapter – 23
COLLECTIVE BEHAVIOUR AND PROTESTS

• Mobs – meaning, nature and effects.
• riots – meaning, nature and effects.
• different forms of collective behavior.
• Women’s Movements
• Farmer, labour and anti-untouchabality movement.
Man is a social animal, and hence always lives in groups, communities

and societies. When he is a member of a group, he behaves in a manner
ED
totally different from the way he behaves when he is alone. This kind of
H
behavior is called ‘collective behaviour’. Collective behaviour is an integral
IS
part of our social life. BL
EP S
The thoughts, feelings and behavior of a large number of disorganized

R TB
U
people coming together accidentally constitute collective behaviour. Human
BE @K
behaviour coming under the scope of collective behavior includes mobs,

rumours, propaganda, public opinion, revolution, social movements etc.
Some of such behavioral patterns are described underneath:
Mobs: ‘Assembly of people around a common interest without any
TO
expectation or planning is called a mob”. The mob is a temporary assembly

of people which responds to a particular provocation. For ex: a group of
T
people assembled near a theatre to buy tickets, an assembly of people

O
around an accident scene. etc..

N
Mob is a temporary assembly of people. In this, people assemble at

a specific place. Members of a mob are influenced very easily by mutual
feelings, opinions and acts. There is a possibility of display of suppressed
feelings. Sometimes such displays assume violent form.
Influence of mob
Uncontrolled acts of the members of a mob often indicate the
shortcomings of the society. Sometimes, they express the frustration
towards the working of social organizations. In addition, they represent
the people’s dissatisfaction about the government’s projects, attitude and
specific programs.
64
When the collective behavior goes to an extreme, it becomes necessary
to use police force, security forces, military help etc.
Riots: Riots are another type of mob behavior. Violent and destructive
nature of mob behavior is called riot. When riots become uncontrollable
and harmful, they lead to destruction.
Nature of Riots : The minimum level of unity seen in a mob is not visible
in a riot. Those involved in riots go on destroying everything in their way.
Creation of chaos is the intention of rioters. Sometimes, these riots lead
to large scale loss of property and lives. The people engaged in riots do
not have any particular aim or cause for the destruction they cause. Riots
have become serious challenges for law and order.
Communal clashes, communal fights, group clashes are the some
examples of riots. Riots occur more in towns and cities. Provoking
circumstances, individuals’ uncontrolled behavior, uncivilized behavior,
ED
criminal intent of people, riotous mindset are the main causes for riots.
H
Riots do not continue for a long time. They have to end at a particular
IS
stage. Riots can be controlled by the presence of mind of the officials, by
police and security forces and law.
BL
EP S
R TB
U
Collective behavior and movements:
BE @K
When collective behavior is organized and directed towards a specific

goal, and aims to bring about social change, it is called a Movement. Many
such movements have taken place in India. Environmental movements
can be given as an example for this.
TO
Environmental Movements :
The soil, air, water and biosphere around us getting polluted with
T
O
toxins and chemicals is called environmental pollution.

N
With the increase in human population, there is a significant change

in lifestyle also. As a result of this, the pressure on the environment
where human beings are living is progressively increasing. Developed and
developing nations exploit the natural resources in an aggressive manner.
Developed nations are destroying the environment for the purpose of their
luxurious life. Many nations in the world are exerting enormous pressure
on the environment due to the problems faced by increase in the human
population. In addition, the unbridled growth of cities, proliferation of
industries, technological progress, expansion of transport system etc.
are destroying the forests and polluting the environment. Consequently,
pollution is posing a serious problem.
65
Many intellectuals, environmentalists and others have expressed
their apprehensions about the environmental pollution. People have also
realized the threat and are carrying out collective protests demanding
environmental protection. Let us learn in brief about a few such important
agitations.
1. Chipko movement :
The government gave permission to
chop down certain trees in Tehri Garhwal
district of Uttarkhand. The people there
realized that there will be loss of trees,
and their environment will be destroyed.
So they hugged the trees and halted their
destruction. This movement took place in
1973 under the leadership of Shri Sunderlal
ED
Bahuguna and Shri Chandiprasad Bhatt. As
a result, the permission given to chop down
H
the trees was withdrawn.
IS
2. Appiko movement:
BL
EP S
R TB
U
In 1983, the farmers of Salyani village in Uttara Kannada district of
BE @K
Karnataka began the ‘Appiko’ movement. When the contractors came to

cut down trees in Kelase forest, in order to stop them, the farmers hugged
the trees and protested. The purpose of the farmers’ protest was to stop
smuggling of trees, and develop awareness among the common people
about the importance of growing trees and the importance of environment.
TO
3. Narmada movement:
T
An agitation was launched against the construction of a dam across

O
the Narmada river under Sardar Sarovar Project in Gujarat. The leaders
N
of this movement were environmental activists Medha Patkar and Baba

Amte who felt that with the construction of the dam, there would be large
scale destruction of forests, damage to the environment and threat to many
animal species. This is called as Narmada Bachavo Andolana.
4. Silent Valley movement:
The environment and many animal species came under threat when a
dam was planned to be constructed in the Silent Valley in Palghat taluk of
Kerala. In order to stop the construction, the Kerala Sahitya Parishad and
wild-life enthusiasts agitated against it. This movement was successful in
protecting many forms of flora and fauna.
66
5. Movement against MRPL:
Environmentalists protested against the ‘Mangalore Refineries and
Petrochemicals Limited’ (MRPL)in Mangalore in Karnataka when they
realized that the chemicals fumes from the proposed oil refinery would
destroy the environment.
6. Agitation against Kaiga:
Dr.Shivaram Karanth and other intellectuals carried out a movement
against the Nuclear Power Generation Center proposed to be set up in
Kaiga in Karnataka. This agitation was carried out because the agitators
felt that the nuclear power generation center would cause loss of forest
cover, and the radiation from the center would pollute the environment,
thus endangering the survival of various animal species of the area.
Along with carrying out agitations, it becomes necessary to create
ED
public awareness about the various issues. People have to be made
to understand that it is their prime duty to protect their environment
H
and nurture it. Only then will each citizen work towards protecting the
IS
environment selflessly. There is a need to create awareness among the
BL
EP S
people regarding effective programmes for environmental protection and

R TB
U
their implementation.
BE @K
1) Women’s Movements :
Women’s liberation movement which was held in 1980 was significant
among the mass movements. A women’s movement is a protest by women
against the oppression and exploitation of a male - dominated culture.
TO
Movements Organised by Women :

T
a) Alcohol Prohibition Movement

O
: Alcohol Prohibition Movements

N
are organised by the women against

alcohalism which has created havoc
and hardship in the life of the poor rural
women and women labourers. •
b) Women Self Help Group : Women have

formed self-helped groups base on trust
Women self help groups
and co-operation. These groups empower
women economically andsocially. In addition to that self-helped groups
play an important role in providing them with equal rights opportunities
and powers.
67
2) Farmer’s Movement : Farmers protests which started through the
refusal of taxes, againast economic crisis are going on even today.
D. Devaraj Arus who came to power in
Karnataka in the seventh decade,
implemented many laws, for the
empowerment of the socially weaker
section of the society, among these
abolishion of bounded labour which
was intended to free the tenents from
the cluches of land lords was the most
important.
The peasant rebellion at Naaragunda in 1980 was a rebellion against
the government’s tyranny and it was in favour of farmers under the
ED
leadreship of Pro. M.D. Nanjundaswamy ; he established the Karnataka
H
State farmers association. The Karnataka farmer’s movement is going on
IS
in an organised manner while presenting the democratic demands of rural
BL
EP S
people.
R TB
U
3) Labour Movements : The movements carried out through Labour

BE @K
organisations to uphold the dignity of labourers and to protect the interests

of labourers are called labour movements.
Labourers contemporary pro-labour ideology has grown in opposing
TO
capitalist exploitations. Even today many labour unions exist in the country
and have continued their struggle.
T
O
4) Anti - Untouchability Movement :

N
Untouchability is an anti human behaviour in a hierarachical

caste system. The anti untouchability movemet is the people’s movement
against the attack on dalits for being untouchables and caste - based
social oppression. It was started in the 19th century by Jyoti Rao
Phule of Maharashtra in 1917. Anti untouchability movements arose
in places like Tamil Nadu and Karnataka in 1925, Periyar Ramaswamy
started the self-respect movement. Dr. B.R. Ambedkar’s thought and
struggle the anti-untouchability movement took on an intense form.
Dr. B.R. Ambedkar advocated the rights for socially oppressed,
68
untounchables and women throuhout his life. He started the magazine
‘Mookanayaka’ and was instrumental in creating a huge movement against
the practice of untouchability. Even Gandhiji was a reformist who wanted to
end untouchability. Even today various organisations continue to conduct
movements against the practice of untouchability.
Do you know this ?
The Stree Shakti Yojana is a good example of women’s self-reliance that can
be achieved through self-help groups. Women self help groups in Karnataka
under the name of ‘Stree Shakti Yojana’ are becoming very popular across the
state recently. An example in this regard is worth mentioning here.
Example : A village industry organisation called ‘Siri’ belonging to Sri
Kshetra Dharmasthal village development scheme of Dakshina Kannada district
of Karnataka has provided an opportunity for rural women to produce valuable
ED
economic goods. It also succeeded in selling these products at reasonable prices
H
and creating new economic hopes among women.
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
EXERCISES
U
BE @K
1. Chipko movement took place in ___________ State.

TO
2. The leader of the Narmada agitation is ____________.

3. Dr. Shivaram Karanth agitated against the ___________ Nuclear
T
O
power station.
N
4. What is ‘Collective behaviour’?
5. Who is the leader of ‘Chipko’ movement?
6. What is self-help group?
7. What is labour movement ?
69
III Answer the following in two or three sentences after discussing
them in groups:
8. What does collective behavior include?

9. What is a ‘mob’? Give examples.
10. Describe the nature of a mob.
11. Describe the meaning and nature of environmental pollution.
12. Explain the importance of women’s self-help groups.
IV Activities:
1. Visit women’s organizations and self-help groups in your Place.
Collect their programmes with objectives.
ED
2. Learn from the members how the women’s organizations and self-
H
help groups have enabled economic development of women.
IS
BL
EP S
V Project:
R TB
U
1. Collect the information and prepare the album about environmental

BE @K
movements in Karnataka.
2. Prepare a report on the project on the scheme Sasya Shyamala
implemeted in your school.
TO
T

O
N
70
Chapter – 24
SOCIAL CHALLENGES

• Problem of child labour – meaning, effects, constitutional
provisions
• Violence on women - Child marriage
• Dowry – nature, consequences and measures to remove it
• Female foeticide
As society becomes more and more complex, the innumerable
managerial conflicts sometimes weaken individuals and organizations and
ED
push them towards exploitation. These conflicts get expressed as social
exploitation and problems of that time. There are some social problems
H
which are the product of modernity! You will get to know about some of
IS
them here. BL
EP S
The societies of developing countries like India are afflicted with

R TB
U
many problems. For e.g. excessive population, poverty, unemployment,
BE @K
beggary, juvenile delinquency, crimes, problem of child labour, corruption,

exploitation of women, dowry harassment, youth unrest etc. It is essential
to look in to these problems positively as challenges instead of seeing them
negetively.
TO
Let us get to know about a few of such social problems.

Child Labour
T
According to the Constitution, ‘Child labourers are those who are aged
O
below 14 years and work in order to earn money’. Normally, the labour
N
undertaken by minor children are called ‘Child Labour’.

In many developing countries like India, exploitation and employment
of children are a rampant social evil. It is assuming greater proportions
year by year. Children below 14 years are being employed in various fields.
Majority of the child labourers work in rural areas like fields, farms and
plantations. The rest work in urban and industrial areas.
Causes :
Poverty, domestic conflicts, divorce, domestic violence, excessive
control, greed of industrialists, illiteracy, kidnapping of children and
pledging them etc.are the causes behind child labour and its increase.
71
ED
H
Ill-effects of child labour :
IS
Child labour is the result of a serious lacuna in the social system. The
BL
EP S
people who extract work from children throughout the day, do not pay
R TB
U
any attention to their mental, emotional, educational or medical needs.
BE @K
Instead, they harass them physically and mentally.

Due to ill-health, lack of nutritious food and proper medical facilities,
forced employment, economic and social exploitation, thousands of child
labourers are suffering even today. At an age when they should have been
TO
playing, day-dreaming or studying, their innocence has been snatched

T
away from them by pushing them into employment.

O
Remedial measures :
N
The government has decided to take certain measures to free children

from employment and exploitation, and rehabilitate them. The Central
government has launched a programme called ‘Rehabilitation Welfare
Fund of Child Labourers’ through which their educational, medical and
fundamental needs can be fulfilled, and their exploitation stopped.
To prohibit appointment of child labourers, the ‘Child Labour Prohibition
and Control Act (1986)’ has been enacted. Industrialists who violate this
law, will have to mandatorily contribute Rs. 20,000/- per child labourer
to the Welfare Fund.
72
Constitutional provisions:
Article 24 of our Constitution declares that employing children below 14
years for work is a cognizable offence. It warns against employing children
in hazardous industrial units. Under the Directive Policies of the State,
the government has declared that ensuring the welfare of the children are
its responsibility.
The Government had undertaken many measures to eradicate child
labour. It launched the National Child Labour Project(NCLP) in 1988. This
project is implemented at the state level too. The department of Education,
Labour, Women and Child Welfare together visit factories and identify
child labourers. They rescue the child labourers and provide education
along with all free facilities. Bal Mandirs are being set up for the education
of such children at Taluk and District levels. These children are being
provided free food, shelter, etc.
Under the ‘Sarvashikshana Abhiyan’ project, child labourers in
ED
Karnataka are being brought to school under the programme ‘From
H
Drudgery to school’, and they are being given free education. The Right to
IS
Education Act of 2009 guarantees compulsory free education to children
BL
EP S
of 6 years to 14 years. As per this Act, 25% seats in private schools are
R TB
reserved for child labourers, backward class children, scheduled caste and
U
scheduled tribe children, and children with special needs.

BE @K
The Supreme Court has ruled that a Activity:

‘Child Labour Rehabilitation Welfare Fund’
should be established to protect the human If any of your friends is a
rights and financial interests of child child labourer and stays away
TO
labourers and end their exploitation. The from school, bring it to the notice
Union Government implemented a ‘National of your teacher.
T
O
Policy’ in 1987 for the welfare of child

N
labourers. In 1988, it launched a Project for Child Labourers’ Welfare. In

2006, the government brought into force the ‘Child Labour Eradication
and Rehabilitation Act’.
POCSO (Protection of Children from Sexual Offense) Act :
The protection of children from sexual offenses act, is aimed at curbing
the increasing number of sexual assults on children in schools, families
and public places these days protetion of children from sexual offenses
act 2012 has been passed preventing the increasing sexual violence
against children in schools, families and public places these days. This
act punishes and child (male and female) below 18 years of age who
73
has been sexually exploited, for torturesed, abuses, molested, assulted
or made un protected touching in any manner what so ever constitutes
sexual assault. This act (protection of children from sexual offenses act -
2012) June 19-2012 has been implemented by the government of India.
Child Marriage:
Child marriage tradition is one of the

major problems in our society. Now, let’s
know what is meaning of Child Marriage.
According to law, the marriage that

takes place between a boy of below 21
years and a girl who is below 18 years is
child Marriage. If either of the two is below
the legal age, it is called Child Marriage. If a girl who is below 18 years of
ED
age is married to boy of more than 21 year age is also considered as Child
H
Marriage.
IS
BL
EP S
Know this :
R TB
U
Why child marriages should not be performed? First, it is illegal.

BE @K
Second, for a girl to enter the institution of marriage, she should

be mentally, and physically prepared to manage the functions of
marriage. Having children is one of the basic functions of the marriage.
TO
Hence, the girl should be ready mentally and physically to bear

children. According to various researches, the womb would be evolved
T
O
completely by the age of 18 years. An evolved womb can support the

N
fetus for full nine months. Otherwise, the fetus may undergo damage
and lead to its death endangering the life of the mother also. Hence,
it is mandatory for the girl to complete 18 years of age before entering
marriage.
Child Marriage is considered as a crime. A child marriage affects

not only the married couple but it also affects the physical and
psychological well-being of the children born out of such marriages.
74
Reasons for Child Marriage:
1. Gender discrimination is the primary reason for Child Marriage. It
is believed that since a girl goes to another family after marriage,
it is better to send her early. The discrimination between the
boy and the girl results in child marriage. Interestingly, Child
Marriages breed child Marriages. The people who went through
child marriages strive to get their children married off early.
2. Lack of education is one of the main reasons for Child Marriage.

As the children do not go to school, they end up marrying early.
Usually, if a family educates a girl till class 10th, they does not
get her married unless she attains the age of 18 years. Hence,
education plays a major role in the prevention of Child Marriage.
ED
3. Lack of proper implementation of law, Poor implementation of
legal provisions in school education, Lack of participation in the
H
part of community and general public in the implementation of
IS
child rights and child development programmes has led to the
BL
EP S
R TB
problem of child marriage to prevail.

U
BE @K
Effects of Child Marriage:
The holistic development of children is stunted by child marriage and

they lose the power of questioning. As a result, violations like sexual
assaults on children increase the number. Many rights of children like
TO
education, childhood, entertainment, interaction with friends continue to

be violated. Children fall into the trap of malnutrition, anemia, diseases,
T
O
abortions, infanticide and maternal mortality increases. The chance of

N
girl becoming a widow at a young age is also more and they become a
victim of violence easily.
How to prevent Child Marriage?
The Government of Karnataka has designated 47 officers of different

levels as the Child Marriage Prevention Officers. Hence, wherever a
child marriage takes place, you can complain against it with any of
these officers. You can lodge a complaint through a toll free number
1098. You need not disclose your name also. You can also inform the
Head Master of neighbouring government school, Village Accountant,
75
Panchayat Development Officer, Health Inspectors and the nearby Police
Station also. All these are considered as Child Marriage Prevention
Officers. It is their duty to see to it that no child marriage take place in
their area. If a child marriage has taken place, they are the officers who
are empowered to lodge complaint at the concerned police station. Apart
from this, all the district and taluk level officials are regarded as Child
Marriage Prevention Officers. They can lodge complaint anywhere at any
time.
Solutions for Child Marriage:
1. Implementing the education Development Programmes without
lapses can prevent school dropouts before 18 years of age. This
means all the children within 18 years of age should be within the
schooling system and should have 100% attendance. Similarly,
birth registration is compulsory and 100% birth registration
ED
target is needed.
H
IS
2. Importance should be given to girls’ education. They should
be empowered on priority. A child marriage should always be
BL
EP S
reported, questioned and opposed.

R TB
U
BE @K
Activity:
• If you come to know a friend of yours is about to go through
Child Marriage, inform the issue to the Child Marriage
Prevention Officers or simply call 1098.
TO
Child Marriage Prohibition Act 2006

T
O
This Act applies to all states of India. The Act of 2006 has come into
N
effect with few changes in the previous laws. Such laws were in effect in
1929 and 1986. After India became signatory of Child Rights Convention
of the UN in 1992, the new law was brought into effect with changes as
per the convention agreed upon.
As per this law, it is a crime to marry even when either of the couple
is minor. It is a crime even if a major man marries a minor girl or vice
versa. If a child marriage takes place, the people who are invited to the
marriage and those who conducted or motivated the marriage are liable for
imprisonment of two year and a fine of rupees one lakh. As per provisions
of this law under column 9, 10 and11; the priest, the photographer,
videographer, cook, provider of Shamiyana services, musicians, vehicle
76
drivers and whoever took part in the marriage are liable for punishment.
The parents of the girl/boy are considered as the major culprits. The
owner of the marriage hall, the printer who printed marriage invitations,
all are considered as offenders under this law. Whoever encourages and
participates in the child marriage is considered as offenders. The very
participation in the child marriages means the violation of child rights. All
the violators are considered as offenders. The law clearly declares that all
citizens of the country have the responsibility of protecting child rights.
Harassment of Women:
One of the innumerable problems being faced by Indian women is
harassment. In spite of their progress in various fields like education,
economics, politics and industry, there is violence inflicted upon women.
Rape, violence, suppression, dowry harassment, physical and mental
ED
harassment, forced abortions, use of vulgar language etc. are some of the
H
harassments on women both inside and outside the house. Let us discuss
IS
a few problems. BL
EP S
R TB
Dowry:
U
BE @K
Dowry is a custom associated with the Indian system of marriage. It

is called ‘Varadakshina’ in Kannada. ‘Vara’ means a boy of marriageable
age. ‘Dakshina’ is ‘the giving of a gift’. It is a gift given to the bridegroom.
Any kind of property, jewellery or gift given to the bridegroom at the
TO
time of marriage, either before or after the marriage is known as ‘dowry’.

T
Giving or receiving dowry is a punishable crime.

O
N
When the bride’s family cannot afford to satisfy the bridegroom’s

demand for money, jewellery etc. and yet have to struggle to fulfil them,
it results in great exploitation. As a consequence, the bride’s family will
have to face severe financial constraints.
In this way, dowry is a social evil tormenting women. In the name of
dowry, women are being abused and subjected to violence, torture and
murder.
Ill - effects of Dowry
Dowry diminishes women’s self-respect, dignity and stature. It leads to
77
domestic conflicts. It also creates animosity between men and women. Due
to this evil, immorality and violence increase. Family relationships suffer.
Families of brides get oppressed under financial constraints. Greed for
dowry is leading to deception in the name of marriage. In order to escape
from the dowry menace, people are resorting to child marriage. Female
foeticide and female infanticide are increasing. The number of divorces
are also rising.
Measures to eradicate dowry system
Prohibition of Dowry Act 1961:

In order to legally eradicate the dowry system, the Central government
enacted a ‘Prohibition of Dowry Act’ in 1961. Under this Act, marrying
under the condition of being provided dowry is prohibited. Those who
ED
violate this law are fined Rs.5000/- penalty or sent to jail for 6 months.
H
Sometimes both the penalties are imposed.
IS
This Act was amended in 1986 and made stricter. According to the
BL
EP S
R TB
amendment, any person who gives, takes or forces to give dowry can be
U
imprisoned for 5 years and fined 15,000/- penalty.

BE @K
Dowry deaths have been brought under the purview of ‘Indian Penal
Code’ and ‘Indian Criminal Procedure Code’. They can be tried only as
non-bailable and non-negotiable offences.
TO
Apart from legal measures, encouraging people to become awareness,

T
inter-caste marriages, modern mass media, voluntary organizations and

O
women associations can also help to eradicate this social evil from our
N
midst.
Female Foeticide and Female Infanticide
Among the innumerable problems being faced by Indian women even
in today’s modern world, female foeticide and female infanticide are the
most inhuman.
Female Foeticide
When the foetus is that of a girl and the parents do not want a girl baby
to be born, they kill it in the womb itself. This is known as ‘female foeticide’.
78
Developments in modern medicine enable the parents to know whether
the foetus is that of a girl or boy through sex determination tests. The desire
for a male child is leading to misuse of modern technology. Through the
help of scanning, people get to know the biological gender of the foetus,
and if it is that of a girl and they do not want it, they get rid of it by killing
it in the womb itself. Cases of such abortions are increasing in number
day by day.
Cases of female foeticide are rising in number due to reasons like poverty,
burden to dowry, illiteracy, ignorance, anti-women ideas, desire for male
progeny etc.
As a result of female foeticide, there is a reduction in the number
of women leading to imbalanced gender ratio, gender discrimination,
degradation of women status.
ED
In order to stop sex determination tests of foetuses through modern
technology, the ‘Prohibition of Pre-natal Gender Determination Test Act’
H
was enacted in 1994. In spite of this Act, clandestine female foeticide is
IS
being carried on its against law. BL
EP S
R TB
Do you know this?

U
According to the 2011 census, with the exception of Kerala and

BE @K
Pondicherry, in all the states the number of women is less than that
of men.
TO
Gender ratio as per 2001 census Gender ratio as per 2011 census
Women Men Women Men

T
O
933 1000 943 1000

N
Rural 949 1000
Urban 928 1000
Female Infanticide
‘The inhuman practice of killing the female baby after it is born is
female infanticide’. Cases of female infanticide are very rare these days.
If the government enacts a Prohibitory Act to stop shameful activities
like female infanticide, the gender ratio between men and women will be
equal.
79
EXERCISES

1. Article ______ of the Constitution prohibits employing children for
work.
2. The ‘Prohibition of Child Labour Act’ came into practice in the year
_______.
3. The National Policy was framed in _______ .
4. The Prohibition of Dowry Act first came into effect in ________.
5. Protection of Children from sexual offenses (POCSO) act came
into force in ________.
ED
6. Mention any two social challenges plaguing India.
H
7. What is child labourer?
IS
BL
EP S
8. What is the meaning of female foeticide?
R TB
U
9. What is female infanticide?
BE @K
10. What is Child Marriage?
III Discuss the following in groups and answer the following:

11. Mention the causes for the problem of child labour.
TO
12. What are the consequences of child labour?

T
13. Explain the measures for eradicating the problem of child labour.
O
14. What are the evil effects of dowry system?

N
15. What are the solutions for the problem of dowry?

16. Whar are the effects of Child Marriage ?
IV Activity :
1. Make a list of the social problems of your place.
V Project :
1. Invite a legal expert to your school and conduct a Lecture about
the child marriage, the laws of infanticide and child labour.

80
GEOGRAPHY
CHAPTER – 25
INDIA - LAND USE AND AGRICULTURE

• The factors affecting the land. • Types of Land use.
• Meaning and significance of agriculture
• Types of agriculture
• Distribution of crops, factors affecting cropping patterns
• Food crops, commercial crops, fibre crops, beverage crops,
horticulture, floriculture.
ED
Introduction: Land is the most important natural resource. Making use
H
of land for various purposes like cultivation, forestry, grassland, fallow
IS
land, purposes other than agriculture etc., is called ‘Land use’.
BL
EP S
Factors affecting utilization of land:

R TB
U
Depending on the necessity and characteristics, land is utilized for

BE @K
different purposes. Many natural, economic and social factors influence

the manner in which land is used. The natural factors are land forms,
climate are influenced on characteristics of soil. Land holdings, population,
demand for agricultural products, profession, attitude of people, social
TO
and economic condition, marketing facilities are influenced on land use.

Other factors like technology, irrigation facility, human capability, land
T
ownership also have an effect on it.

O
N
Types of land use:

Land use as practised in India is divided into different types:
1.Net sown area 2.Forest area 3.Use of land for purposes other than
cultivation 4.fallow land 5.grassland 6.uncultivated land.
1. Net sown area: It is the most important type of land use in India. As
India is mainly an agriculture-based economy, major portion of the
land is being used solely for cultivation. India ranks second in the
world with respect to the extent of area under cultivation, after the
U.S.A. The total cultivation area in Punjab, Haryana, West Bengal,
Uttar Pradesh and Bihar is more than 60%.
81
2. Forest land: According to a survey, the total area under forests in India
is only 21.71%. It was 16.2% in 1950-51. According to the National
Forest Policy, 33% of the area should be covered with forests. Hence
attempts are being made to increase the area under forest.
3. Land use for non-agricultural purpose: Apart from cultivation and
forest development, some of the land is used for purposes other than
agriculture. It is used for construction of buildings, dams, industries,
roads etc.
4. Fallow land: It is the land left uncultivated. With the increase in
population, there is great demand for agricultural products, and as
such, more and more land is being used for cultivation. Therefore, even
fallow land is being utilized for agriculture with the help of technology.
5. Grassland: Grasslands are diminishing continually with the expansion
of area being taken up for agriculture. Himachal Pradesh has the
ED
largest area under grasslands whereas Punjab and Haryana have the
H
smallest grasslands.
IS
6. Other uncultivated land: Land which was earlier used for agriculture
BL
EP S
is now left uncultivated due to certain changes in the chemical

R TB
U
composition of the soil which have rendered it unsuitable.
BE @K
AGRICULTURE
Agriculture is one of the ancient occupation of human beings, has
engaged in it since the beginning of civilization. Agriculture has been
described as ‘the art of cultivating the land’. Cultivating or tilling the land
TO
and growing crops. Agriculture also includes fisheries, cattle-rearing and

forestry.
T
O
Importance of Agriculture: Agriculture is the main occupation of

N
Indians. It can be seen in all parts of the country in different forms, and
cultivating different crops. Farming supplies the food grains of the huge
population of the country. It is a life-subsistence occupation and provides
more employment opportunities than all other sectors of economy.
There are many industries in India which depend on the raw materials
provided by agriculture. Thus, indirectly, agriculture nurtures many
industries. eg: chemical fertilizers, pesticides, insecticides, industries
manufacturing farming equipment etc. Agriculture supports even many
tertiary occupations like transport, trade, banking etc.
82
Different types of farming exist in India. They are: 1.Intensive
farming 2.Subsistence farming 3.Commercial farming 4.Mixed farming
5.Horticultural farming
1. Intensive farming: Growing 2-3 crops on the same plot in a year is
called Intensive Farming. India’s population being huge, there is large
demand for our agricultural products. Hence this kind of farming is
in practice in areas which are fertile and have huge population.
2. Subsistence farming: Farmers growing crops for their own use is
called Subsistence Farming. In this kind of farming, farmers grow food
grains, oil seeds, vegetables etc. Subsistence farming are divided into
two types a) sedentary farming b) shifting cultivation.
a. Sedentary Farming: It is settled agriculture. The agriculture
practices and seeds used are traditional ones, the produce is mainly
ED
used domestic consumption and in small holdings.
H
b. Shifting cultivation : Sometimes people do not settle down in
IS
any particular area, but cut down forests and engage in farming.
BL
EP S
After one or two years’, when the fertility of the soil reduces, they
R TB
U
move on to other areas and start cultivation there. This is called
BE @K
shifting cultivation. It has been banned in the modern days.

3. Commercial Farming: Agriculture practiced to commercial purpose
is called Commercial Farming. Tobacco, sugarcane, cotton, tea, coffee,
rubber etc. are commercial crops.
TO
4. Mixed Farming: Mixed farming is the raising of crops and cattle-rearing,

poultry, beekeeping, pig-rearing, silk farming, aquaculture etc. This
T
O
is called Mixed Farming.

N
5. Plantation Farming: It refers to the cultivation of a single crop over

a large area for exports. It is one of the important types of Indian
agriculture. Coffee, Tea, Coconut, Arecanut and Rubber are the
important plantation crops of India.
Cropping Pattern: The cropping pattern of a region refers to the proportion
of an area under different crops at a given point of time. The ratio of these
crops is known as Cropping Pattern. The crop ratio includes Food Crops
and Non-food or Commercial Crops. The cropping pattern of any area in
India is mainly dependent on land forms, climate, soil, water availability,
economic factors, social factors and technology.
83
Factors influencing cropping pattern: The Crop of any one region
influenced by the natural, economic, social factors and the farmers’ attitude
of that area.
1. Natural factors: Among the Physical factors, land forms climate and
rainfall are important, and play a significant role in determining the
cropping pattern of that region.
2. Economic factors: Commercial crops are growing in vast holdings.
Earning a huge profit is the main purpose of growing such crops.
3. Social factors: Traditions, superstitions, illiteracy etc. play an
important role in determining the cropping pattern.
4. Farmer’s attitude: This plays a very important role in the cropping
ED
pattern of an area. eg: Earlier, farmers in North Karnataka used to grow
mainly jowar and wheat. However, now they are growing sunflower,
H
IS
groundnut, toor dal and onion which fetch a greater profit.
BL
EP S
In addition to the above water availability, transport facilities, market

R TB
U
hybrid seeds, chemical fertilizers, land development etc. influence cropping
BE @K
patterns.
Crop Seasons: In India agriculture is carried on throughout the year in
different seasons. India has three cropping seasons, they are 1) Khariff
TO
or early monsoon crop. 2) Rabi or post monsoon crop 3) Zaid or summer

crop. Crops are grown in all seasons of the year in different parts. Thus,
T
O
we see one or the other type of crop in one or the other place throughout
N
the year. In our country, three types of crop seasons are seen: 1. South-
west monsoon or kharif crops 2. North-east monsoon or rabi crops
3. Summer or jade crops.
1. Early monsoon or kharif crops: The crops grown during the south-
west monsoon season are called kharif crops. Seeds are sown in the
month of June or July and crops are harvested during September
and October. Maximum cropping area of the country is cultivated
during this seasons. Paddy, ragi, cotton, jowar, maize and oil seeds
like groundnut are the main crops grown during this season.
84
2. Post monsoon or rabi crops: It is the important cropping season in
the receiving rain during winter months. North-western part comprises
of Punjab, Haryana, Jammu and Kashmir, Uttar Pradesh, and in the
South Andhra Pradesh and Tamil Nadu are the states known for this
cropping season. Wheat is the most important ‘rabi’ crop of the north-
western states. During the winter months, the cool temperate with
light rain is most suitable for the growth of wheat. The seeds are sown
in October - November and the crops are harvested during February
and March.
3. Summer crops: In many areas of the country, during the period
between rabi and kharif crops, crops and cultivated. The crops grown
during summer is also called as ‘Zaid farming’. Pulses like black gram,
green gram, oil seeds and vegetables are grown in this season.
ED
Major Crops: India is one of the most important agriculture-based
H
IS
countries. As a result of the green revolution, Indian agriculture has seen
BL
EP S
tremendous progress utilizing irrigation facility, modern agricultural
R TB
U
implements, chemical fertilizers, high-yield variety seeds, insecticides and
BE @K
pesticides. Besides, the country

has become self-sufficient in the
production of food grains. The
most important crops grown in
TO
India are food grains, commercial

crops, fibre crops and beverage
T
O
crops.
N
1.Food crops:
Paddy: Paddy (Rice) is the most
important food crop of India.
India has the largest Paddy
growing area in the world.
Second place in the production.
Majority of the people of the
country use rice as their staple
food. Paddy is major kharif crop.
85
About 25°C temperature and
100-200 cms of annual rainfall
are necessary for the growth of
paddy. Fertile alluvial soil and
clayey soil is most suitable for
the cultivaition of paddy. It
requires standing water till the
crop is ready for harvesting,
hence flat land is required.
Wherever rainfall is less,
irrigation is necessary.
West Bengal is the largest
Paddy-producing state. Other
ED
states are Andhra Pradesh,
H
Tamil Nadu, Odisha, Karnataka,
IS
Uttar Pradesh and Punjab are BL
EP S
major producer of Paddy.

R TB
U
Wheat: It is important Rabi crop of India. Our country has made a lot
BE @K
of progress in the production of wheat. India is one of the leading wheat

exporting countries of the world. Wheat needs 10° to 15° C temperature
and 50 to 70 cms annual rainfall for its growth. Wheat grows well in sand-
TO
mixed clay and black soil.

Wheat is largely grown in the states of Northern regions of Punjab,
T
O
Haryana and Uttar Pradesh. Punjab is known as the granary of wheat.

N
Madhya Pradesh, Bihar, Rajasthan, Gujarat, North Karnataka and

Maharashtra are the other wheat growing Do you know this?
states. Uttar Pradesh stands first in the Sugarcane is a perennial plant
belonging to the group aficinerum. The
production of wheat. industries of sugar, khandasari sugar,
Commercial Crops: jaggery-production and alcohol depend
on sugarcane production. Besides,
1. Sugarcane: It is the most important sugarcane bagasse pulp is the main
commercial crop of India. In India, sugarcane raw material for manufacturing of
paper.
cultivation has been in practice since
ancient times. India is the place of origin of sugarcane. India occupies
86
second place in the world. It is an Do you know this?
annual crop and is growing in Ratoon system is hidely used in the
irrigated areas. This crop needs a production of sugarcane in India. First crop
climate of high temperature and is produced by planting small pieces of
sugarcane. horizontally subsequent crops
moisture. It needs a temperature
are produced by cutting the sugarcane at
of 21° to 26° celsius and 100-150 the base leaving a small piece with the root
cms annual rainfall. Fertile loamy in the soil. This is called ‘Ratoon System’.
soil mixed with black soil is most
suitable. Most of the states in India grow sugarcane. In the states of Uttar
Pradesh, Maharashtra, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Gujarat and Andhra
Pradesh, sugarcane is the most important commercial crop.
2.Tobacco: India stands third place in
Do you know this?
the production of tobacco. Tobacco is used Tobacco belongs to the group
ED
in beedi, cigarettes, hukka, snuff, tobacco ‘nicoticiana’. Its place of origin
H
is the Andes Mountains of in
products, and is also consumed directly. South America. Jean Nicot
IS
Despite the wide-spread knowledge that introduced tobacco to France.
BL
EP S
tobacco is injurious to health, demand for From France the Portugueseth

R TB
U
brought it to India in the 17
tobacco products is on the increase every day. century.
BE @K
This is a tropical crop, which requires a

temperature of 21° to 27° C. Regions of moderate rainfall with average 50
cms It grows well in sandy soil, it requirs chemical fertilizers. Andhra
Pradesh, Gujarat, Uttar Pradesh, Karnataka, Bihar, Tamil Nadu and
TO
Maharashtra are the produces of cultivate tobacco. Karnataka’s Nipani

T
town of Belagavi district is the marketing center for tobacco.

O
N
Fibre crops:
Cotton and jute are the most important fibre crops grown in India and
they supports cotton textile and jute industries.
1.Cotton: Cotton is the most important fibre crop in India. Raw cotton
is also used as raw material in cotton mills and a large quantity of cotton
is exported, thereby earning foreign exchange. India ranks first in area
under cotton cultivation, and second in production of cotton. Cotton is the
tropical and sub-tropical crops. It grows well in areas where temperature
is 20° to 25° C with a rainfall of 75 to 150 cms. Black soil and loamy soil
support the growth of cotton. Black cotton soil which can hold moisture,
87
is most suitable. This is grown as a kharif crop. Gujarat, Maharashtra,
Andhra Pradesh, Haryana, Karnataka and Madhya Pradesh are cotton-
growing areas.
Beverage Crops:
Coffee and tea are the most important beverage crops grown in India.
India is also an important tea and coffee-producing and exporting country
in the world.
Tea: Tea is the most popular drink not
Do you know this?
only in India but also the world. India has Tea contains a stimulant
the largest production of tea in the world. For ‘theine’. Tea gardens are
a long time, India had monopolized the export found in Assam, West Bengal,
Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Tripura,
of tea in the international market. Tea Himachal Pradesh, Karnataka,
production has gained lot of importance Arunachal Pradesh, Nagaland
ED
because it provides employment opportunity. and Manipur.
H
Tea is a perennial crop growing in the
IS
evergreen tropical and sub-tropical regions. Average temperature of 21°
BL
EP S
C and rainfall of 150-200 cms are essential. It require fertile soil with rich
R TB
U
organic matter and hill slopes with sand-mixed black soil are required.
BE @K
Tea grows well at an altitude of 1200 to 2400 metres. Important tea growing
states are Assam, West-Bengal, Tamilnadu and Keral. India is famous for
Tea export.
Role of Horticulture and Floriculture in Development of Agriculture
TO
India produces not only food crops, commercial crops and fibre crops,
T
but also many horticultural and floricultural products. Horticulture and

O
N
floriculture have progressed very well in recent years with the help of
research centres.
Do you know this?
1. Horticultural crops : Horticulture
•Indian Council for Agricultural
involves cultivation of fruits, vegetables
Research (ICAR)
and flowers. It consists of crops which
• Indian Institute of Horticultural
yield harvest in a very short period.
Research (I I H R)
Horticulture is more intensive and
are engaged in research work in the
commercial than other agriculture
agricultural field.
techniques.
88
India ranks first in the world in the production of mango, banana,
chikoo and citric fruits. Due to this, the government is giving more
importance to horticulture and this field is witnessing immense progress.
This progress of the horticultural field is known as the ‘Golden Revolution’.
India has all the facilities needed for horticulture like diverse conditions,
land forms climate, soil, irrigation facility, labour, market, governmental
encouragement etc.
Floriculture : Floriculture refers to the
Do you know this?
productions of flowers for marketing. An ambitious project has been
India is known for the art of growing taken up to link the areas in which
flowers from the ancient times. India horticultural crops are grown
produces flowers like jasmine, champa, with the market. This market has
marigold, chrysanthemum, kanakambara, direct contact with the surrounding
rose and lily are very important. There is producing areas. This is called
ED
‘Terminal Market’.
a lot of demand for cut flowers like rose,
H
orchids, gladiolus, lily, carnation, anthurium etc., and their production
IS
has gained significant progress. BL
EP S
R TB
U
Floriculture is limited to a few states in India. Tamil Nadu, Karnataka,
BE @K
Maharashtra, Uttar Pradesh, West Bengal, Andhra Pradesh, Himachal

Pradesh, Haryana, Rajasthan and other states are the major states engaged
in floriculture. Floriculture in India is adopting variety in its produce. Thus
there is a high potential for development of agriculture. Both plantation
TO
crops and Floriculture crops have helped for the improvement in the
condition of farmers.
T
O
EXERCISES
N

1. Utilising the land for a variety of purposes is known as _____.
2. Growing Two-three crops on the same plot in a year is called
____________.
3. Farmers growing crops only to sustain themselves is called
_____________ farming.
4. Progress in the horticultural field is known as ___________ .
5. The state is the largest producer of paddy in India is _______.
89
6. The crops grown during summer is also known as _______
farming.
II. Answer the following questions in brief.
7. What are the factors that influence land use ?
8. What is ‘Agriculture’ ? What are the types of Agriculture ?
9. What is ‘kharif crop’ ?
10. What is meant by ‘rabi crop’ ?
11. What are the factors essential for growing cotton?
III. Activities:
1. Collect samples of the various food grains and pulses
ED
in India.
2. Mark the Sugarcane and Tobacco growing regions of India in the
H
IS
outline map of India.
BL
EP S
3. Tobaco using is injurious to health. Collect the information from

R TB
U
the near Doctor.
BE @K
IV Projects:
1. Collect pictures and information about the various crops grown
in your neighbourhood.
TO
2. Conduct a group discussion about floriculture and women

empowerment.
T
O
N

90
CHAPTER – 26
INDIA - MINERAL AND POWER RESOURCES

• Introduction to the minerals of India and their importance
• Distribution and production of the major minerals of India
• Need of Non-conventional energy sources like solar power,
wind power etc.
• Scarcity of energy resources, their conservation and solutions
• Causes of scarcity of energy resources
Minerals are the most important natural resources. ‘A compound of
ED
naturally available substance with specific chemical composition is called a
mineral’. Minerals are available along with rocks in the surface of the earth.
H
Among them, iron ore, manganese ore, bauxite ore, mica and gold are very
IS
important. In addition to these, energy resources like coal, petroleum and
BL
EP S
atomic minerals are also produced in the country. In view of the shortage
R TB
U
of electricity in the country, non-conventional energy sources like solar
BE @K
power and wind power have become very important.

1. Iron ore: Iron ore is the most important
Do you know this?
Ferrous and Metallic mineral produced in
Types of iron ore: Based
India. Of the total value of minerals production on the metal and impurities
TO
in the country, iron ore constitutes about content, iron ore is classified
20%. India ranks 6th in the world as far as into four types: 1.Magnatite
T
iron ore deposits are concerned. 2.Heamatite 3.Limonite

O
In India, Jharkhand, Odisha and Karnataka 4.Sederite

N
states have maximum iron ore deposits.

Singhbaum of Jharkhand, Keonjhar, Mayurbhanj and Sundargarh
districts have huge deposits of iron ore. Bastar, Durg and Raipur districts
of Chattisgarh, Goa, Andhra Pradesh and Tamil Nadu also have iron ore
deposits. In Karnataka, Kemmangundi, Hospet, Sandur and Kudremukh
have large deposits of iron ore.
The iron ore produced in India is being used for iron and steel industries
of Karnataka, Chattisgarh, Jharkhand, West Bengal, Madhya Pradesh,
Odisha, Tamilnadu and Andhra Pradesh. Besides, the ore is being exported
to Japan, China, Italy, Iran and other countries, thereby earning foreign
exchange.
91
Uttarakhand
Haryana
Rajasthan
Odisha
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
Manganese Ore: Manganese is the most important of the Ferro-allied

ores mined in India. Manganese is used in the manufacture of steel. It
is also used in manufacture of chemical and electrical equipment and
TO
colored glass.
Types of Manganese ore: The main types of manganese ore are
T
O
Pyrolusite, Psilomelane, Magnatite, Branite and Holyandite.

N
The manganese ore extracted in India is of the best quality. Pyrolosite

and Silomelane are important manganese ore. Odisha, Karnataka, Madhya
Pradesh and Maharashtra are the important manganese-producing states.
In addition, Bihar, Chattisgarh, Rajasthan, Punjab and Goa also produce
manganese ore.
3. Bauxite ore: Bauxite is the important ore of aluminium. It is mixed
with sand and iron oxide. Being brownish yellow and grey in colour, bauxite
is sticky like clay in nature. Bauxite has about 60-70% of aluminium oxide
and by melting this, aluminium metal is obtained. Since aluminium is
used in various types. It is called the Wonder Metal of the 20th century.
92
Bauxite is mainly used in the
production of aluminium
metal. India has huge bauxite
deposits and also self-
sufficient in aluminium Uttarakhand
Haryana
production. India ranks 5 inth
the world in bauxite deposits. Rajasthan
Bauxite is available in plenty

in Koraput, Kalahandi,
Bolangir, Sundergarh
districts of Odisha, Jamnagar,
Bhavnagar, Junagadh,
Bharuch and Surat districts
ED
of Gujarat, Ranchi,
Palamu,Jaipur, Lohardaga of
H
Jharkhand, Ratnagiri,
IS
Kolhapur, Ambolighat, BL
EP S
R TB
Udayagiri, Radhanagari,
U
Dungarvadi of Maharashtra,
BE @K
Bastar, Bilaspur, Raigad and Surguja districts of Chattisgarh. In addition,

Madhya Pradesh, Belgaum of Karnataka, Salem and Madurai of Tamil
Nadu, Vishakapatnam of Andhra are also have bauxite deposits. Saudi
Arabia, the United Arab Emirates, Britain, Germany, Japan and the United
TO
State of America import bauxite from India.

T
4. Mica : Mica is a very large important non-Ferrous mineral. India is in a

O
leading position in having deposits of mica and in the manufacture of mica

N
plates. Mica is transparent, heat resistant, shiny silicate mineral. Mica has
some qualities; the important among them are insulation and elasity. It is
used in the manufacture of telephones, telegraph, wireless service, glass,
colour varnish, artificial rubber, dynamos and chemical industries. Mica
is also called ‘kage bangara’ in Kannada.
Types of Mica:
Based on the chemical composition and colour, mica is divided into
many types. They are Muscovite (white), Biotite (black), Phlugovite (brown)
lepidotite etc. India has plenty of the best variety, i.e., muscovite.
93
Mica is found in Sri Potti Sriramulu Nellore district of Andhra Pradesh,
Warangal of Telangana, Krishna and East Godavari districts, Dhanbad,
Palamu, Giridh and Kodarma of Jharkhand, Gaya, Mongair Bagalpur,
Naoda districts of Bihar; Udaipur, Ajmira, Bilwara, Jaipur rural districts of
Rajasthan, Trivandrum of Kerala state, Salem of Tamil Nadu, Chindwara,
Bastar in Chathisgarh and Balaghat of Madhya Pradesh. In early period
India was a leading exporter of Mica. Today, because of the availability of
substitute for mica, its export has reduced.
5. Gold Ore: Gold is the valuable metal, and has been popular since ages.
Gold is used as a standard in fixing the value in the international money
market. India has insignficane gold deposits. KGF in Kolar, Raichur and
Hatti and Kappatagudda of Gadag mines of Karnataka, Anantpur of Andhra
Pradesh, Bihar, Kerala and Tamil Nadu have some deposits of gold ore. In
addition to this, it is found in the form of fine threads in the igneous rocks
of Kappatha Gudda in Gadag. At present, Hatti is the largest producer of
ED
gold in the country.
H
Power Resources:
IS
Power resources are essential for the economic development of the
BL
EP S
country. Conventional power resources are those which can get exhausted.
R TB
Ex: coal, petroleum, atomic power etc. Non-conventional power sources

U
are those which are not exhaustible. Most important of them are solar
BE @K
power, wind power and hydro-electric power.

Coal: In India, the most important power Do you know this?
resource is coal. India ranks third in the Based on the carbon content and
world in the production of coal. It is said calorific value, coal is divided into
TO
that millions of years ago, the earth was four types:1.Anthracite 2.Bituminous
covered with thick dense forests, and 3.Lignite and 4.Peat.
T
these forests gradually burried in the

O
layers of the earth and converted into coal due to heat and pressure. Coal
N
is not only an energy source, but also used in the manufacture of insect
repellants, explosives, artificial fibre, artificial rubber, plastic, chemical
fertilizer etc. Coal being an important mineral product with multiple uses,
it is called ‘Black Diamond’.
In India, coal deposits are widely distributed in Damodar river valley.
Jharkhand and Chattisgarh are the states producing largest amount of coal.
Jharia, Giridh, Bokaro and Karanpur are the main fields of Jharkhand.
Besides, Godavari, Mahanadi and Vardha river valleys have coal deposits.
The states producing coal are Jharkhand, Chattisgarh, Odisha, West
Bengal, Andhra Pradesh, Telangana and Madhya Pradesh. In India, there
is a great demand for coal and hence it is importing superior quality coal.
94
Petroleum: It is believed by scientists that petroleum is the product of
fossils of ancient living beings. Petroleum pumped out of the earth is a
mixture of various materials and is called Crude Oil. This is purified in
refineries to produce gasoline, petrol, diesel, kerosene etc. Petrol is not
only an energy source but also an important raw material. A number of
industries have flourished using this as a raw material. Petroleum is a very
important energy resource in agriculture, industry and transportation.
This is a very precious in both during peace and war. Hence it is called
‘Liquid Gold’.
In India, petroleum was first discovered at Digboi of Assam. Till
independence, Digboi was the only region of petroleum products. Today,
Lakhimpur, Hugrijin, Moran, Naharakathia and other oil wells of Assam
producing petroleum production.
Gujarat is the another field producing crude oil. The first well was
drilled in Ankaleshwar. In the year 1974, crude oil was identified about
ED
110 kms away from Mumbai in the offshore field called Bombay High and
H
the production was started in 1976. This is the biggest oil deposit of India.
IS
Recently, oil deposits have been discovered in Kaveri, Krishna, Godavari
BL
and Mahanadi river basins. Today, there are about 23 refineries producing
EP S
R TB
petroleum. The petroleum production is not sufficient in India, crude oil

U
is being imported from Iran, Iraq, Saudi Arabia and Russia.
BE @K
ATOMIC MINERALS:
India has plenty of atomic minerals. Atomic power is generated using
these atomic minerals. Atomic power decides the status and might of a
nation. Atomic power was used only for a country’s defence in the earlier
TO
days. But today, it is being widely used for power generation. The important
atomic minerals found in India are Uranium, Thorium, Berylium, Lithium
T
O
etc.
N
a. Uranium: It is distributed in Singhbhum and Hazaribagh of Jharkhand,

Gaya of Bihar, in the loamy soil of Saharanapur of Uttar Pradesh, in
the sandy coasts of Kerala.
b. Thorium: This can be found in Kerala, Bihar, Tamil Nadu and
Rajasthan.
c. Berylium: Berylium oxide is used as a catalyst or ‘moderator’ in
reactors producing nuclear energy. India has sufficient deposits of
berylium.
d. Lithium: This light metal is obtained from lepidolite and fudomine
ores. It is found abundantly in Jharkhand and Madhya Pradesh.
95
Non-conventional energy sources: All over the world, due to the use
of conventional energy sources like coal, petroleum, natural gas and other
fossil fuels, the phenomenon of green-house effect and consequent increase
in temperature of the earth’s atmosphere is being noticed. This is called
‘global warming’. Population increase, urbanization, industrialization etc.
have also led to the increased use of fossil fuels. Due to this, environmental
pollution is also increasing. Today, it is essential to reduce the use of such
fuels and preserve environmental stability.
Renewable energy sources are solar energy, wind energy, tidal energy,
Geo thermal energy, bio-gas etc. are called non-conventional energy
sources.
1. Solar Energy: Use of the heat
emiting from the sun’s rays is called
‘Solar Energy’. This is renewable
ED
source of energy, and the solar
power is directly converted into heat
H
energy. Solar energy is already
IS
being used in a variety of ways like
BL
EP S
Jharkhand
R TB
solar water heater, cooker, solar

U
thermal electric bulb, railway

BE @K
signal, to water and in BAY OF BENGAL
communication media. India’s first

solar electricity production center ARABIAN
SEA
is being proposed to be set up at Kalpakkam
TO
Baramar in Rajasthan. Recently, a

solar electric station was proposed
T
O
to be set up in Pavagada of Tumakuru

N
district in Karnataka.
Wind Power: In India, wind power is being produced on a commercial
purpose and in the future, many parts of the country would be using
wind power as the main source of electricity. India is the fifth country in
the world to produce wind power. Tamil Nadu, Maharashtra, Karnataka,
Rajasthan and Gujarat are establishing wind power stations.
Need for non-conventional energy: In India, of the energy resources
being used, the exhaustible energy resources are the main ones. It has
become inevitable to use non-conventional energy sources to conserve
96
the conventional energy sources. Exploration and use of nonexhaustible
energy uses has gained a lot of importance in the five-year plans.
Remedies: It has become inevitable in our country to take necessary steps
to prevent the deficit in the energy resources. 1.Use of non-conventional
resources 2.Giving importance to hydro-electric power generation 3.Use of
alternate local energy resources 4.Encouraging the use of non-conventional
energy resources 5.Educating the people regarding the reduced use of
energy resources 6.Producing energy from solid waste.
EXERCISES
1. The wonder metal of the 20th century is _________ .
2. The largest producer of gold in India is _________.
ED
3. Mica is also called ‘__________________’ in Kannada.
H
IS
4.
BL
What are the important mineral resources available in India?
EP S
R TB
U
5. Which are the types of manganese ore?
BE @K
6. What are the uses of Mica?

7. Which are the important atomic minerals?
8. What is non-conventional energy resources? Explain their
importance.
TO
9. Give suggestions of your own to eradicate the power scarcity.

T
O
III. Activity :
N
1. Show the distribution of minerals on an outline map of India and

mark them.

97
CHAPTER – 27
INDIA - TRANSPORT AND COMMUNICATION

• Importance of transport in India
• Types of Road Transport – Important National Highways
• Problems of Road Transport
• Know about railways, air transport and waterways
• Known about the Mass Communication
• Types of Communication, Importance of Communication
• Geographical Information System, GPS and Remote Sensing Technology
ED
Movement of goods, services, information and Do you know:
H
materials from one place to another is called
IS
Agriculture and
‘Transport’. Transport provides goods and services
BL
EP S
Industry form the
from the place of production to the place of demand.
R TB
backbone and muscles

U
Through the transportion goods and services reach of a nation and transport
BE @K
to the places of requirement. is its nervous system.

The role of transport in the economic development
of our country is significant. Areas of Agriculture, Industries, Mining,
Forestry, Fisheries, Dairy Farming etc. are closely linked with the markets
through the transport. Hence, for speedy economic development, fast
TO
transport systems are necessary.

T
Types of Transport: There are four important types of transport: 1. Road

O
Transport 2. Rail Transport 3. Water Transport 4. Air Transport.

N
1. Road Transport : The roads have been constructed since ancient period
in India. Many kings gave importance to the construction of roads. During
the British period roads were constructed mainly for defence purpose.
Importance of Roads in India: India is a country of villages and is
predominantly an agricultural nation. Roads are very important for
the development of villages and agriculture. Movement of agricultural
produce by farmers to the markets is possible only by roadways. Essential
commodities required by the villagers are transported with the help of
roads. Road transport feeders rail ways. Roads Provide the movement of
goods.
98
Types of Roads : Roads are classified into four types. There are : 1) National
Highways, 2) State Highways, 3) District Roads and 4) Village Roads.
1. National Highways :
These are the most are important roads of the country. The national
highways constructed across the length and breadth of the country. These
highways connect various state capitals, major ports and industrial cities.
Their construction and maintenance is the responsibility of the Central
Government.
The Indian Government established National Highways Authority of
India in the year 1988 to construct and maintain National Highways. It
started to function in the year 1995.
India has a total of 1,45,240 kms of National Highways. At present
NH-44 is the longest national highway of India. It is 3745 kms in length,
starting from Srinagar of Jammu and Kashmir, it ends in Kanya Kumari.
ED
The highest road in the world has been constructed by the Border Roads
H
Organization of India in Umling-La pass of Ladakh. It is at an height of
IS
19024 feet. BL
EP S
National Highway Development Project (NHDP)

R TB
U
A central governament which construct a 4/6 lane roads of national
BE @K
highways through out India at an average length of 13150 kms is known

as National Highway Development Project. This project is an important
and outstanding project to fulfill the basic needs and is the largest project
of independent India.
TO
The Golden Quadrilateral of 5846 kms length and the corridor

highways of 7300 kms length connecting from North to South and East
T
to West is a part of the National Highway Development Project.

O
N
1) Golden Quadrilateral Highways : The Golden Quadrilateral

Highways links the major metropolitan cities of the country like Delhi -
Mumbai - Chennai and Kolkata through 4/6 lanes of national highways.
2) Corridor Highways (North - South and East - West Highways) :
The North - South corridor highways links Srinagar (Jammu and Kashmir)
in the North to Kanyakumari (Tamil Nadu) in the south.
The East - West corridor highways links Porabandar (Gujarath) in
the west with Silchar (Assam) in the east.
The Golden quadrilateral and corridor roads including national
highways are important not only economically but also politically.
99
They enable transportation of goods at a minimum cost and shortest time.
They play an important role in uniting India emotionally and creating
national integration.
Problems of Road Transport :
1. Many village and district roads become unfit for transportation
during the rainy season.
2. Road transport is also the cause of environmental pollution,
increased density of vehicles and accidents.
3. Roads are subjected to severe wear and tear due to rain, floods and
cyclones every year.
4. Construction and management of national and state highways are
inadequate.
5. Scarcity of the basic needs along the roadside in seen all over the
ED
country.
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
Amritsar
TO
Palanpur
T
O
Porbandar
N
Bay of Bengal
Thoothukudi
100
2. Railway Transport : Railways are the lifeline of the nation is an
important mode of land transport. They are very useful to carry heavy
goods and large number of passengers over a long distance.
The first railway line was laid between Mumbai and Thane of
Maharastra on April 16th, 1853. The Indian railways occupies the
largest in Asia and fourth largest position in the world. For the efficient
administration the railway network of India has been divided into 18
railway zones throughout the country.
Importance of Railways :
1. They play a vital role in the economic development of the country.
2. They are very useful to carry heavy goods and large number of passengers.
3. They are useful to travel at a lowcost.
4. They are useful to transport agricultural and horticultural products at
ED
a rapid speed.
H
3. Water Transport : Water ways in India exists from ancient times. India
IS
BL
EP S
has a costline of three sides with ports. The important ports are as follows.
R TB
U
Major Ports
BE @K
Kandla : This is in the Gulf of Kachchh.

Mumbai : It is in the state of Maharastra. Mumbai port is called the “Gate
way of India”.
TO
Navasheva : It is located in the state of Maharashtra. Navasheva port

has been built with state of the art facilities to relieve the high pressure
T
O
of mumbai port.
N
Marmagoa : It is located at the entrance of Zuari estuary in a state.

New Mangalore Port : It is the most important port of Karnataka.
Kochi : It is in Kerala.
Tuticorin : It is in Tamilnadu.
Chennai : It is the oldest port of India. It has an artificial harbour. It is
also in Tamilnadu.
Vishakhapatnam : It is a natural port and Located in Andhra Pradesh.
Paradeep : It is in Oddisha state. It is a recently developed port.
101
Kolkata : It is in west Bengal. It is a natural harbour. This port is called
the “Tea port of India”.
Haldia : It is a newly developed port on the coast of Bay of Bengal to
overcome the problems of congestion at Kolkata port. It is in West Bengal.
4. Air Transport : Air transport is the quickest means of transport for the
economic development of the country. The Golden Quadrilateral highway
and its corridor roads link Indian International and Domestic airports.
Airports Authority of India (AAI)
Airports Authority of India (AAI) was establish by the Indian government in
the year 1955 and its head quaters is at New Delhi. This is an important
organization to provide basic facilities for civilians fly. In India, a total of
24 international and 103 domestic airports are being managed by AAI.
Sl. Name of the Airports Place
ED
No.
H
1. Indira Gandhi International Airport New Delhi
IS
2. Chatrapathi Shivaji Maharaj International Air-
BL Mumbai
EP S
port
R TB
U
3. Netaji Subhash Chandra Bose International Air- Kolkotta

BE @K
port
4. Chennai International Airport Chennai
Bengaluru
5. Kempegowda International Airport
(Devanahalli)
TO
6. Mangaluru International Airport Mangaluru

T
O
7. Sardar Vallababai Patel International Airport Ahmedabad

N
8. Lokapriya Gopinatha Bardoli International Air- Guwahati

port
9. Chowdary Charan Singh International Airport Lucknow
10. Rajeev Gandhi International Airport Hyderabad
11. Manohar International Airport Mopa (Goa)
12. Maharshi Valmiki International Airport Ayodhya
Communication :
Today there are different means of communication. We can contact people
in different places. The method of reaching a large number of people at the
102
same time is called Mass Communication. Besides the traditional newspaper
and radio, as a result of advanced electronic technology, communication
network is widely spread in India and is rendering a great service.
Media of Communication: Discuss:
With the development of electronic technology Mobile phones are
today, many communication media have come into inevitable nowdays.
use. In addition to traditional mediums like posts,
newspaper and radio, television, satellites, computer network, internet,
e-mail, mobile telephones etc. are the main types of communication
important.
Importance of Communication:
• With the help of communication media, people of the country can
learn about the various incidents of different places.
ED
• The people can aware of the policies of the government.
• By educating people through mass media about agriculture and
H
industry, a speedy developmental process is possible.
IS
•
BL
Mass communication media have become the fundamental
EP S
R TB
requirement of trade and commerce.

U
• Mass media can be effectively utilized to strengthen the unity,

BE @K
integration and stability in the country.

1. Geographical Information System (GIS): The system which can collect
the information, accumulate and enable use when required, modify and
show the data of the earth’s surface is called Geographical Information
TO
System (GIS). It was first established in Canada in the year 1960. Today
T
it is widely used all over the world.

O
The earth’s surface has various types of natural and cultural features.
N
In this, districts, land structure, rivers, distribution of shelter, land use,

soil and crop distribution etc. are can be overlapped one above the other
and easily analysis can be made. Thus GIS is a computer-based system
which can accumulate and interpret the data on the earth’s surface.
Uses :
• GIS technology-based maps are more attractive and give accurate
information.
• Various types of geographical, social and economic information
can be easily analysed and models can be constructed.
103
• In recent years, GIS technology is being used to give advance
intimation regarding weather phenomena.
• Since this is a computer-based analysis, maps can be created very
fast without the need of a cartographer in a very short time and
even maps can be modified.
Of present-available GIS softwares are map-constructing technology,
Arc info, Autocad, Map info etc. are prominent.
2. Global Positioning System (GPS):
The main objective of this system is to indicate the location of a
stationary or moving object or person through pointing out the latitude,
longitude and height above the sea level.
Today this system is very useful in many areas. GPS technology works
ED
based on the information sent by the satellites and through the use of any
individual’s receiver set on the earth’s surface.
H
IS
Method of Working: BL
EP S
GPS system involves more than 20 artificial satellites launched and

R TB
U
managed by the U.S.A. They revolve around the earth constantly. Each
BE @K
satellite is equipped with powerful cameras, an accurate clock powered

by solar heat and information-transmitting antenna. The information
sent by these satellites can be received by a receiver of any individual,
and analysed to indicate the actual position of that person. Based on the
TO
information obtained from satellites, the distance between the individual

and satellites is accurately calculated and the location of the person to
T
the exact latitude, longitude, and height above sea level is given. Because
O
N
of this, the GPS is also called Path finder. Today, GPS is important from
the point of view of national security. Because of this feature, India has
launched its own seven satellites to have its own local GPS. The regional
and independent GPS system of India is named as, Navik (Navigation with
Indian Constellation).
Uses:
• They are useful in assessing the geographical position of natural
calamities. So that suitable safety measures are taken.
• It is helpful for trekkers to know the exact location and routes.
104
• Soldiers, pilots, fishermen and sailors use GPS to follow correct
path and direction. Today transport authorities also use this to
manage the movement.
• GPS is the lifeline for many services at their door in the cities.
• GPS shows path to google maps.
3. Remote Sensing Technology: In the modern technology Remote
sensing is very important. To collect information regarding the earth
surface. It gathers information about distance without physically touching
the objects. This is called Remote sensing. Aerial and Satellite photos are
from the Remote sensing.
Uses:
• From these pictures, true, accurate and reliable information
ED
pertaining to that period can be obtained.
• This is a fast, low-cost information collection system compared to
H
IS
geographical survey.
BL
EP S
• The information gathered by these can be easily analysed using
R TB
computers.
U
BE @K
• Remote sensing images can be obtained from satellites regarding

the extremes of climate and disturbances in the geographical
features.
• Studies related to natural calamities like typhoons, cyclonic
TO
storms, floods etc. can be taken up with the help of remote sensing
pictures.
T
• The role of satellite images is significant in analysing

O
N
the natural resources like land use, forest area, water bodies,
residential areas, distribution of crops, land erosion, coast etc.
EXERCISES
1. The name of the international airport of Bengaluru is_______.
2. ___________ is necessary for the development of villages and
agriculture.
105
3. __________ port is called Gateway of India.
4. The tea port of India is __________.

5. What are the importance of roads in India?
6. What are the four types of major Roads?
7. What is meant by Golden Quadrilateral Project?
8. Make a list of major ports in India.
9. List out the problems of road transport in India?
10. What do you mean by Communication Media?
11. What are the types of communication? Mention the importance
ED
of Communication.
H
12. How is GPS different from GIS?
IS
13. Write about Remote Sensing Technology.
BL
EP S
R TB
III. Activities :
U
BE @K
1. Mark and name the Golden Quadrilateral, Corridors and National

Highways in the out line map of India.
2. Collect the satellite launching photos of India.
TO
IV Projects :
1. Discuss on the transport system in your region with your friends
T
O
in class.
N
2. Discuss about the necessity of the maintenance of village roads.

3. Collect the informaiton of work and activities of ISRO in Karnataka.
4. Discuss the role of transport in the economic development of the
country.

106
CHAPTER – 28
INDIA - MAJOR INDUSTRIES

• Importance of Indian industries and major industrial areas.
• Factors influencing the location of industries
• Introduction of different Industries.
• Knowledge-based industries; Information Technology,
Bio-technology and Advanced Technology
Industries are very important in the Do you know this?

Types of Industries:
ED
modern economic activities of man. The state
of economic development of any country is Industries are classified into
H
decided mainly by the industrial development different types based on capital
IS
investment.
of that country. Industries are the main
BL
EP S
features of modern civilization and they 1. Large-scale industries

R TB
U
provide us the necessary materials and 2. Medium-scale industries
BE @K
employment opportunities. Generally, any 3. Small-scale industries

human activity engaged in the conversion of Based on the raw materials,
raw materials or finished goods into readily industries are classified
usable materials is called an industry. into different kinds:
TO
1. Agriculture-based industries
Ex: Sugarcane in to sugar, Cotton to 2. Mineral-based industries
T
cloth, Bauxite in to Aluminium, Conversion

3. Forest-based industries
O
of wood pulp into paper etc.

N
4. Chemical industries
Industrial Regions of India:
During all the five-year plans after post-independence period. India
priority was also given to industries. The progress in industry and
technology in the last five decades is very significant. Industries provide
35% of the total national income besides providing employment to 16%
of the population. Industries are second only to agriculture in providing
national income and employment opportunities.
Certain areas of the country have more concentration of industries.
These areas are called “Industrial Zones”.
107
There are 8 main industrial zones in the country. They are: 1.Hoogly
Region 2.Mumbai-Pune Region 3. Ahmedabad-Vadodar Region 4.Damodar
Valley Industrial Region 5.Southern Industrial Region 6.National Capital
Region 7.Vishakapatnam – Guntur Region 8.Kollam – Thiruvananthapuram
Region.
Factors influencing location of industries :
Industries are concentrated mainly in the areas of advantages.
Availability of raw materials, energy resources, market, transport facility,
availability of labour, port facility etc, are influenced on the location of
industries. Besides, the location of industries is also influenced by the land
availability at low cost, technology and government policies. In addition,
factors influencing the location of industries vary from one type of industry
to another.
ED
IMPORTANT INDUSTRIES OF INDIA :
1. Iron and Steel Industry:
H
IS
This is called a basic industry, because the region of this industry
BL
EP S
provides the raw materials to machinery, railways, ship building, power
R TB
projects, irrigation projects, building construction, house construction etc.

U
BE @K
Distribution:
Total 9 big iron and steel industries are in India. The first steel industry
of the country was established in the year 1870 at Kulti in West Bengal
known as Bengal Iron Company Ltd. Subsequently in the year 1907 Tata
TO
Iron and Steel Industry near Jamshedpur and in 1919 the Iron and Steel
Company, Burnpur in West Bengal were established. In 1923, Mysore state
T
O
established the Mysore Iron and Steel Works at Bhadravathi.

N
The major iron and steel industries in India are:

1. Tata Iron and Steel Plant- TISCO – at Jamshedpur of Jharkhand.
2. Indian Iron and Steel Company – IISCO – Burnpur, West Bengal
3. Visweswarayya Iron and Steel Company – VISCO – at Bhadravathi,
Karnataka
4. Iron and Steel Company at Bhilai, Chattisgarh
5. Iron and Steel Company at Rourkela, Odisha
6. Iron and Steel Company at Durgapur, West Bengal
7. Iron and Steel Company at Bokaro, Jharkhand
108
8. Iron and Steel Company at Salem, Tamil Nadu
9. Iron and Steel Company at Vishakapatnam, Andhra Pradesh.
Recently, many private steel industries have been established.
Since India has the potential for steel production and export. Therefore,
increasing the export.
2. Cotton Textile Industry:
Production of cloth from various types of fibres is called ‘Textile Industry’.
It includes, cotton textile industry, jute industry, silk industry, Wollen
industry and production of cloth from synthetic fibres. History of cotton
textile industry was long period than other industries. In India the first
cotton textile industry was established in 1854 at Mumbai and Baruch. In
the year 1951, there were 378 cotton textile industries and their number
increased to a great extent. They are distributed in morethan 175 towns
ED
and cities across the country.
H
Distribution: Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Uttar
IS
Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh have maximum number of cotton textiles
BL
EP S
industries. Mumbai of Maharashtra has highest cotton mills and hence,

R TB
U
it is called the ‘Manchester of India’ (Manchester is Britain’s main textile
BE @K
industry centre), ‘Cottonopolis’ of India. In addition, Nagpur, Sholapur,

Kolkata of West Bengal, Kanpur of Uttar Pradesh, Indore of Madhya
Pradesh, Surat of Gujarat, Coimbatore, Salem and Chennai of Tamil Nadu,
Bengaluru and Davangere of Karnataka have cotton textile industries.
TO
3. Sugar Industry:
Do you know this?
India ranks first in the production of sugar
T
Gorakhpur district of Uttar

O
and second in its export. Sugar production Pradesh has the maximum
N
was known to Indians since ancient times. number of sugar mills and it is
This industry is located in sugarcane- called ‘Java of India’.
growing areas. Maximum number of sugar The word sugar is derived
industries are located in the Ganga river from Sanskrit word, Sharkara
plain region. The sugar industries are found this is only called Sakkare in
in Maharashtra, Uttar Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, Kannada
Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh etc. There are more than
700 sugar mills in India producing about 359 lakh metric tons of sugar.
Sugar is being exported to the U.S.A., Britain, Iran, Canada and Malaysia.
109
4. Aluminium Industry :
Aluminium was discovered recently in the year 1886. It is the most
important non-ferrous metal produced in India. Aluminium industries are
concentrated in a few places in the country. This industry depends mainly
on three factors: supply of electricity, availability of bauxite, availability
of other metals and supply of capital. The aluminium industries are in
Odisha, Jharkhand, Chattisgarh, Madhya Pradesh, Gujarat, Maharashtra,
Karnataka and Tamil Nadu.
5. Paper Industry :
The first paper industry in India
was established in Serampur of
West Bengal in 1840 on the
banks of the river Hoogly. Later,
in 1867, another factory was
ED
started in Bally near Kolkata.
The raw materials for the paper
H
industry are bamboo obtained
IS
from the forests, wood pulp and BL Bokaro
ur
EP S
dp
he
grass. Majority of the paper ms Kolkata
R TB
Ahamedabad a
J Rourkela
U
industries of the country are
BE @K
found in West Bengal. In

addition to these, paper
factories are also established in
Mumbai, Pune, Chindwara,
Amaravathi, Nagpur, Nasik,
TO
Karad, Raja Mahendra Varam,

Raigadh, Tirupati, Meerut,
T
O
Varanasi, Ghaziabad and

N
Lucknow. Paper factories are

located many places of Gujarat,
Odisha, Madhya Pradesh and Tamil Nadu. There are many paper mills in
various places in the country. News print paper is being imported from
Norway, Sweden, Canada and the U.S.A.
6. Knowledge-based Industry:
At present, the industry progressing very rapidly in India is Information
Technology. This is called ‘Knowledge-based industry’. It is based on human
knowledge therefore called in this name. It has a great influence on the
country’s economy and the lifestyle of the people. The growth rate in this
industry is first among the other industries.
110
a. Information Technology (IT):
In order to encourage development of the software industry and its
export, the Indian government established Software Technology Parks
(STP) in 1991 itself. Today, Karnataka, Maharashtra, Tamil Nadu and
Andhra Pradesh are very much advanced having developed information
technology training centres and universities. Software forms a major part
of our exports and has enabled us to earn foreign exchange. Bengaluru is
the center of Information Technology and it is called Silicon Valley of India.
b. Biotechnology (BT):
Indian Government was established separate corporation in 1986 about
the development of Bio-technology, due to this the great revolution was
started in agriculture.
ED
Through the procedure of grafting in plants
Activity :
H
and animals and by the use of new seeds,
IS
You know about the
medicines, fertilizers, organic fertilizers, usefulnes of information
BL
EP S
R TB
developed hybrid seeds soya beans, maize, technology in your school.

U
cotton etc. have been developed. In recent

BE @K
times, plant biotechnology, environment,

bio-diversity and medical biotechnology are also being used. Many states
in India have developed biotechnology. Among them, Uttar Pradesh,
TO
Arunachal Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, Kerala, West Bengal, Jammu and

Kashmir, Haryana, Punjab, Gujarat and Karnataka are prominent.
T
O
c. Advanced Technology (AT):

N
With the development of human knowledge and increased use of

advanced technology, the Central Government formally set the Advanced
Technology Attachment in 1990. As a result of this, advanced technology is
used in telephone, internet communication, defence department, weapons
and nuclear bombs, satellite launching, Lunar projects like Chandrayana,
transparent in city administration in government offices (eg: Nemmadi,
Sakala, Janaspandana etc.), development of global economic system,
educational, social and economic affairs and elections.
111
ISRO (Indian Space Research Organization) : The organization is involved
in science engineering and technology to harvest the benefits of outer
space for India and the mankind. This organization came into existence on
August 15th, 1969. Its head quarters is at Bengaluru. The first Chairman
of ISRO was Dr. Vikram Sarabai.
Outstanding achievements of ISRO :
1) The Indian National Satellite System (INSAT). was introduced
by Indian space organization (ISRO) for enhancing better
experience in search - rescue operation.
2) India was the first country to reach MARS for the first time
through ISRO.
ED
3) India was the first country to land on the South - pole through
H
the satellite launched by ISRO.
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
EXERCISES
BE @K

1. Bengal iron company of West Bengal was located in ________.
2. Manufacturing of cloth from various kinds of fibres is
TO
called _______ industry.

T
3. The first paper industry of India was located on banks of _________

O
N
river.
4. ISRO was established in the year _________ .
II. Answer the following questions in brief :

5. Make a list of industrial zones.
6. Which are the places of Iron and steel industry?
7. What are the factors influencing the location of an industry?
8. What are the raw materials used in paper industry?
112
9. Explain the distribution of cotton textile industries in India.
10. What are the effects of biotechnology on agriculture?
11. What are the changes resulting from the use of advanced
technology?
12. What are the main achivements of ISRO?
III. Match the following:

A B
i. Mumbai a. Silicon Valley

ii. Bengaluru b. Sugar industries
ED
iii. Bhadravathi c. Manchester of India
H
iv. Belagavi district d. Vishveshwarayya Iron and Steel Industry
IS
IV. Activity :
BL
EP S
R TB
U
1. Draw a map of India and mark the various industrial regions.
BE @K
V. Project :
1. Visit a factory near your town/village, and collect information

about how a particular product is manufactured using the raw
TO
material there.
T
O
N

113
CHAPTER – 29
INDIA - NATURAL DISASTERS

• To know about Natural disasters such as earth quakes, floods,
cyclones, land slides, costal erosion.
• Natural disasters - causes, effects and preventive measures
• Natural disasters – affected areas
Natural Disasters :
Many incidents occurring in Nature are beyond human control.
Preventing these and predicting their occurrence at a certain place is
beyond science too. Naturally-occurring destructive incidents resulting
ED
in loss of human life and property are called natural disasters. Of these
natural disasters, earthquakes, floods, droughts, cyclones, landslides,
H
coastal erosion, Avalanche, cloud burst are destructive.
IS
1. Cyclones: Do you know this?
BL
EP S
R TB
Among the natural disasters occuring According to an inter national

U
on the surface of the earth, cyclonics winds treaty of 2004, cyclones are
BE @K
are the most dangerous and destructive. given certain names. As per this
These winds are called cyclones. agreement, countries having the
Causes of cyclones: Cyclone originate northern Indian oceanic coast
in the Bay of Bengal. It is surrounded like Bangladesh, India, Maldives,
by three sides of land, the Bay of Bengal Myanmar, Oman, Pakistan, Sri
TO
is subject to intense heating, giving rise Lanka and Thailand communicate

to humid and unstable air masses that the names to a committee working
T
O
causes cyclones. under IMD from which the

N
names are selected one after the

• Usually, they originate in the Bay other at Delhi. The cyclone that
o f B e n g a l a n d b l o w w e s t w a r d s occurred recently was named
reaching Tamil Nadu or Andhra coast. Laila by Pakistan. Later names
Sometimes, they change their direction of cyclones were, respectively:
to the northwest, hitting Odisha or west Sri Lanka’s Bandoo, Thailand’s
Bengal coast. The occurance of cyclone Phet, Bangladesh’s Giri, India’s
in India two periods in India. They are Tej, Maldives’ Kaila, Myanmar’s
more frequently in October-November Thane, Oman’s Mujan.etc.,
and also occur in May-June. Recently
to the increase in global warming cyclones also occur in the Arabian
sea. Eg. Gonu-2007, Nilofer-2014, Nisarga-2020, Tawkthe-2021.
114
Effects of cyclones:
• Cyclones are very destructive. Sometimes, the life of the people of
cyclone-hit areas gets totally changed.
• They cause large scale deaths.
• Ocean tides inundate the inland water-bodies and make them salty.
• Crops get totally destroyed.
• Transport links, electricity supply and the daily life of the of people
get affected badly.
• Cyclone-hit areas suffer from infectious diseases, leading to huge
casualties.
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
U
BE @K
Dhubri
TO
Porbandar
Balasore
Latur
T
O
N
Nellore
Puducherry
115
Preventive measures:
• Evacuation of people from low-lying areas.
• Ready to keeping generators, boats, helicopters and other transport
facilities.
• Re-routing trains and buses from the cyclone-prone areas.
• Keeping people constantly informed about the movement of the
cyclone.
• Keeping the army battalions ready.
• Ready to keeping food, potable water and clothes ready.
• Ready to keeping medicines and medical facilities ready.
2. Floods :
Among the natural calamities faced by
ED
India every year, floods are the most Do you know this?
H
dangerous. When there is heavy rainfall The recent floods of Mandakini
IS
and excessive melting of ice, the volume river in Uttarkhand state at
BL Kedarnath on July 17, 2013,
EP S
of water increases in the river leading it
R TB
were the most destructive.

U
to overflow. This is called “floods”. The
BE @K
river water, not being able to flow in the

river course, overflows and occupies low-lying areas on either side.
Sometimes, due to more rainfall in a particular area, the rivers swell.
Causes of floods:
TO
• The uncertainty of monsoon rainfall sometimes gets heavy rainfall

causes floods.
T
O
• Accumulation of silt in the rivers leads to overflowing of water on

N
either side of the river, causing floods.

• Breach of dams or retention walls leads to sudden release of large
quantity of water resulting in floods.
• Rivers changing their course can also cause floods.
• Heavy rainfall during cyclones can also lead to floods.
• Earthquakes in the sea are also causes floods.
Apart from the natural causes mentioned above, man-made causes
like deforestation, improperly built dams, weak retention walls, illegal
encroachment of land are also important causes.
116
Flood-prone regions:
Flood-prone regions are found all over the country.
• The Ganges and its tributaries Yamuna, Gandak, Kosi and Ghagra
rivers cause floods in Uttar Pradesh and Bihar.
• Damodar and Suvarnarekha rivers cause floods in Chattisgarh and
West Bengal states.
• Brahmaputra and its tributaries Dibang, Dihang, Subansiri and
Lohit rivers cause floods in Assam.
• Cloudburst often causes abrupt floods in the Himalayas.
• Narmada, Tapti, Sabaramathi and Mahi rivers cause floods for some
days in a year in the state of Gujarat.
• Krishna, Tungabhadra, Ghataprabha, Malaprabha, Dhoni,
Bennehalla etc. cause floods during rainy season in Karnataka.
Effects of floods:
ED
• Floods are causes, loss of shelter, property, land and crops of the
H
people.
IS
• Telecommunication, electricity supply and transport facilities get
BL
EP S
affected.
R TB
U
• Besides washing away the fertile upper layers of soil, a lot of trees
BE @K
are destroyed.
• Stagnant water in the low lands leads to dangerous diseases.
Flood control measures:
• To control floods, bunds should be constructed on either side of
TO
rivers.
T
• Constructing dams across rivers, collecting water in reservoirs and

O
directing the water to other places.

N
• Establishing centers to issue flood warnings.

• Afforestation in the river basins will prevent soil erosion, and also
reduce accumulation of silt in the rivers there by reducing the
chances of floods.
3. Landslide:
Land mass sliding down the slopes from mountains or hills are called
land slide. Among the things that come down along with the sliding land
mass, stones, mud and debris are important. Landslides occurring in the
steep mountainous regions are more destructive. In the Himalayan region
along with landslide and snowfall it causes destruction to human life also.
117
Causes for Landslides:
• In the mountainous areas and coasts, constantly flowing water and
tides remove soil creating slopes leading to landslides.
• When railways, roads and canals are constructed in the steep
mountainous areas, the slopes become steeper leading to landslides.
• Collection of loose soil on clay soil layer can enhance steep slope
formation leading to landslide.
• Landslides are common in the mining areas. Excavation of earth to
reach the ore deposits deep down can cause landslides.
• Deforestation and deep tilling of the slopes can cause landslides.
Effects of Landslides:
• Flowing small rivers are checked by landslides.
• Transportation is affected.
ED
• Streams and many plants get submerged.
H
• Landslides can cause loss of life and damage to property.
IS
4. Coastal Erosion:
BL
EP S
R TB
U
Sea waves continuously hit the coast. Because of this, the coastal land
BE @K
is eroded. The erosion of land by the waves in the coastal areas is called
coastal erosion.
Coastal erosion is more during south-west monsoon season because
of high tides. During this period, very high waves from the Arabian Sea
TO
bash the coast engulfing a huge land mass. Because of this, the coastal
erosion is more severe along the west coast of Kerala, Karnataka and
T
Goa. In addition, Kanyakumari region of Tamil Nadu, Maharashtra and

O
Gujarat also affected from coastal erosion. Coastal erosion is very less on
N
the east coast.

Effects:
• Large amount of land mass submerg into the sea due to coastal
erosion by waves.
• Many houses and also property get loss and damaged.
Prevention:
• Prohibiting sand mining in coastal areas.
• Constructing retention walls along the length of coast wherever waves
are strong.
118
• Stocking of large rocky boulders along the coast to reduce the impact.
• The most effective method of preventing coastal erosion is by growing
mangrove forests along the coast.
5. Earthquakes:
Earthquakes are one of the most important natural calamities occuring
on the land surface. Vibration or movement of the upper layers of the earth
due to the pressure created inside is called Earthquake.
Reasons of the Earthquakes:
1. Pressure increases in the interior of the earth.
2. Change in the Magma from one part to another.
3. Urbanisation.
ED
4. Deforestation, Construction of Dams, Mining activities etc.,
H
IS
Distribution in India : BL
EP S
The occurrence of earthquakes is fairly widespread. The northern

R TB
U
Himalayas, East Assam, Gujarat in the West have witnessed most of

BE @K
the earthquakes. In South India, Koyna, Latur and other places have
experienced some earthquakes.
Effects of Earthquakes:
TO
1. The loss of life and destruction of property, 2. Obstruction to

transport, 3. Spread of infectious diseases, 4. Increased tidal activity,
T
O
5. Tsunamis, 6. Change in river’s direction.

N
Precautionary measures to be taken:

• Restricting construction of multi-storied building in earthquake-
prone areas.
• Using very light material for construction of houses in these areas.
• Constructing houses to ensure stability.
• Providing basic amenities to the quake-affected areas.
• Disconnecting power supply in the event of an earthquake. Remedies
during natural disasters
119
Measure to the taken in the case of Natural disasters
• Distribution of food, drinking water, distribution of medicine,
temporary shelter facilities, necessary basic emenities, essential
services to be provided.
EXERCISES
I. Answer the following questions in brief:

1. What are natural disasters?
2. What are the effects of cyclones?
3. What are floods?
4. What is Landslide?
ED
5. What is Earthquake.
H
6. What are the causes of floods? Describe flood-prone areas in
IS
India. BL
EP S
7. What is Coastal Erosion? Mention its management.

R TB
U
8. Write about the effects of earthquake and precautions to be taken.

BE @K
II. Activities :
1. Mark the earthquake-prone and flood-affected regions on the
Indian map.
TO
2. Discuss in the class about the uses of naming floods.

T
O
III. Project :
N
1. With the help of your teacher, make a list the flood affected places
in India.

120
ECONOMICS
CHAPTER – 30
RURAL DEVELOPMENT
In this chapter, you learn about the following :

• The meaning and significance of rural development.
• Rural development and decentralization.
• Rural development and Panchayat Raj Institutions.
• Rural development and women.
India is a land of villages. In 2011 censes report 68.84% of the

population lives in villages. The Father of the Nation, Mahatma Gandhi
said, long ago, that development of its villages is the true development of
ED
India.
The development techniques that the Indian government adopted after
H
IS
Independence enabled only urban development. Industries developed in
the cities and the cities expanded. However, rural industries started getting
BL
EP S
R TB
extinct and the rural people began to migrate to cities. Due to liberalization
U
and globalization, the industry and service sector which made use of the
BE @K
latest technology, expanded very rapidly. The job opportunities in these

sectors are available mainly to the urban people. The cities are enjoying
ultra-modern lifestyles.
Poverty has increased among the rural people who depend primarily
TO
on agriculture. One third of them live below subsistence level. Under the
onslaught of modernization, rural cottage industries are vanishing unable
T
to withstand the competition. Though most of the people work in the

O
primary sector, the contribution from this sector to the national income
N
is very less, and is reducing year by year. Due to this, the gap between
urban and rural areas is increasing gradually. If this imbalance has to
be get rid of and over-all development of the country has to be achieved,
there is a dire necessity of developing the rural areas first.
1. Meaning and Importance
Meaning of Rural Development : The phrase ‘Rural Development’ has a
broad meaning. In addition to development of agriculture and agriculture-
related activities, it encompasses extended development of housing,
education, health, hygiene, transport, communication and other essential
social and economic amenities, creation of employment opportunities,
social welfare etc.
121
The rural development very ambitiously envisages improving the
standard of living of farmers, agricultural labourers, people belonging to
scheduled caste, scheduled tribe and other backward classes. To put it
briefly, ‘Rural Development is an improvement of the social and economic
status of the rural people by proper utilization of the locally available
natural and human resources’.
Importance of Rural Development : Rural development occupies a very
important place in the development of the Indian economy. The majority of
the population lives in the villages, and is plagued by problems of poverty,
unemployment, illiteracy, ill-health, lack of basic amenities etc. These
problems should be tackled through rural development, and rural India
should be empowered.
Various basic facilities like education, training, health, hygiene etc.
ED
should be provided to the rural people, and their knowledge, skills and
capability to work should be enhanced. In addition to agriculture, cattle-
H
rearing, fishery, silk industry, poultry and other agriculture-related
IS
activities should be promoted, through which agriculture can become
BL
EP S
a profitable and attractive occupation. Through such measures, the

R TB
U
migration of rural people to cities can be avoided.
BE @K
A deplorable lack of basic amenities can be noticed in rural areas. The

rural people should be provided with essential facilities like electricity,
irrigation, transport, communication, market-yards etc., and their
productivity should be augmented. Instead of sending the raw agricultural
TO
produce to the cities and selling them, they can be processed in the village
itself and transformed into ready goods, thereby enhancing their value. As a
T
O
result of this, not only will the villagers get more employment opportunities,
N
but their income will also increase. Small-scale and cottage industries can
be improved, thereby strengthening the rural economy.
A system wherein agricultural labourers, poor people, people belonging
to scheduled castes and scheduled tribes and other backward classes are
assured of continued employment opportunities has to be created in the
rural areas.
The facilities and opportunities that are available to people in urban
areas should be available to people in rural areas too. The villagers
should be able to participate in the process of development. The benefits
122
of development should be available equally to them too. This has to be
achieved through rural development.
2. De-centralisation of Power
Providing the administrative
power, and the responsibility of
developing the village to its own Zilla
Panchayat
people is called administrative
decentralization. Through Taluk
decentralization, self-reliant, self- Panchayat
sufficient and prosperous villages
can be developed. This process was Grama
called ‘Grama Swarajya’ by Mahatma Panchayat
Gandhi. Decentralization puts a THREE TIER PANCHAYAT RAJ
ED
stop to all kinds of exploitation, SYSTEM
H
upholds human independence and
IS
dignity, and nurtures humane values like compassion and co-operation.
BL
EP S
To enable decentralization, the Panchayat Raj system has been

R TB
U
brought into practice. The Indian Government in 1993, through the 73rd
BE @K
Amendment to the Constitution, brought into existence a uniform system

of Panchayat Raj institutions throughout the country. Due to this, the
Panchayat institutions got Constitutional status. As per the Amendment,
three-tier system of panchayats came into existence. They were Grama
TO
Panchayat, Taluk Panchayat and Zilla Panchayat. Panchayat institutions

operate according to principles of democracy.
T
O
3. Role of Panchayat Raj Institutions in Rural Development

N
Panchayat Raj institutions play a major role in enabling the rural

people to participate in rural development. They can help to provide the
rural community with basic facilities of roads, drains, drinking water,
street lights, toilets, school and hospital buildings, market-yards etc.
Through encouragement of primary and middle school education, adult
education, technical and vocational training, and expansion of health and
hygiene facilities, panchayat institutions have striven to develop human
resources too.
123
More employment opportunities Do you know this?
can be provided to the people through
PURA : (PURA = Providing Urban
nurturing the rural productive activities Amenities in Rural Areas)
of agriculture, cattle-rearing, poultry,
Providing Urban Amenities in
fishery, social forestry etc. Agricultural Rural Areas is an excellent project
irrigation can be expanded by conceptualized for rural development
undertaking construction of ponds and by the former President of India, Dr.
tanks, de-silting them regularly, A.P.J. Abdul Kalam. In this model,
maintenance of minor irrigation works four ways of linking villages is
planned:
etc. Rural and cottage industries can
be improved. Establishment of food 1. Under physical link, a group of
processing units can be encouraged. 15-25 villages will get mutual road
links. Around these villages, there
Through the Panchayats, seminars,
will be a ring road. In addition, they
conferences and training programmes
ED
will get electricity link. 2. Knowledge
can be organized for all the above link involves establishing a school,
H
activities. a higher education institution and a
IS
hospital at a distance of every 5 – 7
Various programmes like ‘MahatmaBL
EP S
kilometers. 3. Electronic link involves
R TB
Gandhi National Rural Employment providing modern telephone and

U
Guarantee Project’, (MGNREGP) telecommunication services to the

BE @K
‘Swarnajayanti Grama Swarojgar villages. 4.Economic link involves

Yojana’ (SGSY)’ etc. for generation establishing a proper market-yard
within the group of villages. This
of employment and alleviation of
yard should enable the villagers to
poverty can be implemented effectively
TO
sell all of their products and buy

through panchayat institutions. With their daily necessities.
T
the success of such programmes,

O
rural poverty and unemployment can be eliminated. Various housing

N
programmes like ‘Indira Awas Yojana’, ‘Ambedkar-Valmiki Housing

Programme’, ‘Ashraya Yojana’, ‘Basava Yojana’ etc. can be implemented,
and all shelterless people provided shelter. Through ‘Suvarna Gramodaya
Yojana’, basic facilities can be enhanced. The public distribution system
in villages can be strengthened and poor people can be provided with the
essential food grains adequately.
By identifying the old people, the disabled, widows, mentally retarded
people etc., it can be ensured that all the facilities from the social welfare
programmes of the government reach them promptly. All the self-help
groups of women can be brought together, and proper encouragement
124
can be given to their productive activities. In this way, women too can be
made to participate in the development of the nation.
Social and cultural activities can be encouraged through celebration of
village fairs and festivals. Through such activities, village arts and crafts
will get an impetus and the rural culture will get enriched.
Thus, panchayat raj institutions play a significant role in the over-
all development of rural areas, in alleviating poverty and unemployment
there, in making the life of the villagers independent and prosperous, and
thereby, strengthening the democratic fabric of the country. We can see the
panchayat raj institutions engaging themselves in all the above-mentioned
activities and taking the villages further on the path of development.
4. Women in Development
ED
In her lifetime, a woman performs a variety of duties as a mother,
wife, daughter-in-law and a daughter. Every man’s life is shaped by a
H
IS
woman. She works not only in the house but also outside as a farmer,
BL
worker, employee, officer, businesswoman and lawmaker at an equal level
EP S
R TB
with men. Hence her role is decisive in the development of the country,
U
especially rural development.

BE @K
There are more women working in the areas of farming, cattle-rearing,

fisheries, silkworm rearing, horticulture, floriculture and poultry. Women
form the majority among agricultural workers too. Educated women are
TO
successfully handling a variety of jobs in various fields in the economy.

Women are rendering exceptional service in government offices, commercial
T
establishments, educational institutions, hospitals, old age homes etc. In

O
N
addition, educated women are playing a prominent role in controlling the

rise in population.
Women in Agriculture Women in Industry Woman as Pilot
125
Women are establishing themselves in the political field too. Starting
from the gram panchayat to the position of a President, they are
handling various responsibilities as political leaders at various levels
of the government. As there is reservation for women in panchayat raj
institutions, an ordinary village woman has the opportunity to handle
political power and work towards rural development. A notable feature in
Karnataka at present is that there are more than 50% women among the
elected members of panchayat institutions.
‘Women Self-Help Groups’ have
been created in all villages in the rural Activity :
sector. These have been playing a very Visit a Women’s Self-Help Group
significant role in organizing poor rural in your village and know about its
activities.
ED
women and making them financially
independent. Members of these groups
H
IS
can avail of loans easily and engage in productive activities. These
BL
EP S
associations have been very successful in mobilizing savings and in
R TB
U
obtaining repayment of loans. Bad habits like alcoholism, gambling and
BE @K
others are spreading widely in the rural areas. Social evils like child
marriage, dowry, caste system, superstitions, exploitation of women and
children are still rampant. Through the self-help groups, alert women are
able to get rid of such evils. They are able to contribute towards building
TO
a clean and progressive society.

T
The chores that women perform at home are not considered labour
O
N
and so are not paid any wages. When the work done both at home and
outside is taken into account, women work for a greater duration than
men. Still, a major part of that work is not paid, and does not fetch any
direct income to the women. This kind of wageless labour is not taken into
account in the national income also.
All in all, both men and women share the same responsibility in making
the country economically developed. They are like the two wheels of the
chariot of progress.
126
EXERCISES
1. The true development of India is the development of its villages’. This
was said by _________ .
2. After the 73rd Amendment to the Constitution, _________ levels of
panchayat institutions have came into existence.
3. Panchayat institutions operate under __________ principles.
4. ______________have been brought into existence in order to bring
together poor rural women and make them financially independent.
II. Answer in one sentence each :
5. Explain the meaning of ‘Rural Development’.
ED
6. What is meant by ‘Decentralisation of Power’?
H
7. Name the three levels of Panchayat Raj institutions.
IS
8. Mention any two housing programmes.
BL
EP S
R TB
9. Which work of women is not considered labour?

U
BE @K
III. Answer the following questions in five to six sentences each:

10. How is the economic situation in the rural areas of India?
11. Explain briefly the significance of rural development.
12. Explain Gandhiji’s concept of ‘grama swarajya’ in the light of
TO
decentralization.
T
13. What is the role of panchayat raj institutions in rural development?

O
IV. Activities :
N
1. Visit the nearest gram panchayat and list the work being done by it
towards rural development.
2. Visit the nearest women’s self-help group. Learn about their role in
making women self-dependent, and discuss with classmates in the
class.

127
Chapter - 31
PUBLIC FINANCE AND BUDGET

• The meaning of public finance and its importance
• Budget • Public expenditure and public income
• Deficit finance and fiscal deficit
Do you know how your family gets its income, how much, and from
what sources? Generally, income is calculated per year. Each family
earns its income by working in jobs in the agricultural, industrial or
service sector. This income is used for the purposes of consumption and
ED
development. Balancing the income and expenditure by an individual or a
family, and thereby achieving progress, is an art. When the expenditure is
H
more than the income, it leads to debt. ‘Personal Finance’ deals with this
IS
kind of income, expenditure and debt management of an individual. In
BL
EP S
the same manner, the government manages its finance. It is called ‘Public
R TB
U
Finance’. In this chapter, let us know about how the government manages
BE @K
its finance.
1. Meaning and Importance of Public Finance:
Public finance means the finances of the government. Public finance
TO
studies the way the government manages its income, expenditure and
debts. Public finance gives a complete picture of the government’s income,
T
expenditure and debt management.

O
N
There are certain fundamental differences between public and private

finance. They are:
Private Finance Public Finance

• Personal or private finance relates • Public finance relates to the
income and expenditure of one income and expenditure of the
person or one family. government.
• In private finance, individuals • In public finance, the government
calculate their income before calculates its expenditure first
hand and then spend it and then adjusts its income
accordingly. accordingly.
128
• Personal financial transactions • Public financial matters are
are kept confidential. discussed in the legislative
houses.
• When an individual or a
family saves money, it will • When the government saves
supplement their prosperity. money, growth is stunted.
Hence governments always try
to show more expenditure on
developmental works.
1. Importance of Public Finance : A government, with an intention to

establish economic progress and financial stability, announces the fiscal
policy related to its income, expenditure and debt.
1) The government manages public finance according to fiscal policy.
2) Public finance is managed keeping in mind the progress of the
ED
nation.
H
3) The government, through its fiscal policies, formulates methods to
IS
equitably distribute the country’s natural wealth, labour and capital
BL
EP S
R TB
investment, and tries to maximize the production.

U
BE @K
4) The government tries to ensure the equitable distribution of the income

generated amids all sections of the people, and tries to see that all
people live comfortably.
5) Nation’s progress can be achieved by achieving the welfare of
TO
the people.
T
6) The government, policies, enhances the public expenditure in priority

O
areas like agriculture, small scale industries and basic infrastructure.

N
7) The government takes steps to ensure a balanced growth in all spheres

of the economy.
8) Developing countries like India utilize public finance in order to
eradicate poverty and unemployment to regulate financial upheavals
and commodity prices.
9) To establish financial stability Government uses financial policy as a
weapon.
129
Budget
Every year, the government presents its budget for the financial year.
In India, the financial year starts from April 1st and ends on 31st March of
the successive year. Through this budget, the government tries to achieve
the objectives of its fiscal policies. So, what is a budget?
The statement of estimated income and expenditure of a year prepared
by the government is called Budget. It is a document showing the income
and expenditure of the government. The Central and State Governments
present their own budgets.
In India, the Central budget is prepared by the finance minister in
consultation with the finance department. Normally, the finance minister
presents the Central budget in the Lok Sabha in February or March. In
both the Houses of the Parliament, there will be a detailed discussion on
the budget and the government has to obtain the approval of both the
ED
Houses before March 31st.
H
Budgets are of three types: Surplus Budget, Deficit Budget and
IS
Balanced Budget. If the budget shows excess income as compared to
BL
expenditure, it is called Surplus budget. If the expenditure is more than
EP S
R TB
the income, it is called Deficit budget. If both income and expenditure

U
are the same, it is called Balanced budget. In developing countries like

BE @K
India, the governments normally present deficit budget and try to achieve
economic progress.
2. Public Expenditure
The government spends money for various purposes like defence,
TO
administration, economic development and welfare of the people. This is

called Public Expenditure. In other words, the expenditure incurred by
T
O
the government in the interest of public is called public expenditure. In

N
the 20th century, with the advent of welfare states, the role and scope of
the modern governments has expanded. Hence public expenditure has
also increased.
In India, Central and State governments have their own expenditures.
The expenditure of the Central government is of two types: Revenue
Expenditure and Capital Expenditure.
I. Revenue Expenditure: The expenditure incurred by the Central
government from the sources of revenue income is called Revenue
Expenditure. This expenditure is used for various financial and social
services, defence, administration, interest payment, grants to states
130
and other purposes. Revenue expenditure is classified into two groups
called Planned Expenditure and Non-planned Expenditure.
A : Planned Expenditure : The expenditure incurred by the government
towards financial and social services, nation-building exercises and
developmental works is called Planned Expenditure. This is the expenditure
incurred by the government towards developmental activities under various
plans. Besides these, this expenditure covers the plans of states as well
as centrally-administered territories.
Under the Central Planned Expenditure, the government spends money
on three types of services and development. They are:
1. Financial services – Agriculture and agriculture-related activities,
industry, communication, fuel, science and technology, rural development
etc.
ED
2. Social services – Education, health, hygiene, family welfare, drinking
H
water supply, housing, social welfare etc.
IS
3. General services – The expenditure incurred on maintenance of peace,
BL
EP S
R TB
law and order.

U
B : Non-planned Expenditure : With the exception of developmental

BE @K
activities, expenditure incurred on administration, defence, interest

payment and other heads is called Non-planned expenditure. The major
heads of non-plan expenditure are civil administration, defence, interest
payment, allocations to states and various subsides etc,.
TO
Public Expenditure
T
O
N
Compensation to
people affected
by development
projects.
131
II. Capital Expenditure : The money spent by the government on
agriculture, industry, transport, electricity, irrigation projects and other
developmental activities along with creation of new assets is called Capital
Expenditure. The government spends this amount from the income
generated by the capital receipts.
In Capital Expenditure also, there are two types. They are: Planned
Expenditure and Non-planned Expenditure. The expenditure incurred
on long-term developmental projects in agriculture, industry, transport,
irrigation etc. is called Planned Capital Expenditure. The expenditure
incurred by the government on paying compensation to people affected by
the developmental activities is called Non-planned Expenditure.
In this manner, the government spends money on administration,
national economic development and citizens’ welfare. To meet this
expenditure, the government tries to generate income.
ED
The percentage of estimated expenditure of the Central government
H
in 2013-14
IS
1. Grants given to States and Union Territories: 4%
BL
EP S
2. Planned expenditure in States and Union

R TB
U
Territories : 7%
BE @K
3. Subsidies : 12%
4. Non-planned expenditure : 11%
5. Defence expenditure : 10%
6. Proportioned tax income to States : 17%
TO
7. Interest payment : 18%

8. Central planned expenditure : 21%
T
O
3. Public Revenue
N
The government collects income from varied sources to meet its

expenditure. This is called Public Revenue. Governments are ever ready to
create facilities for the welfare of people and speedy economic development.
Due to this, the role of governments has expanded. As a result of this,
public expenditure is ever increasing and necessary revenue sources have
to be identified and added. In India, Central and State governments have
their own sources of revenue. Now we will learn about the revenue sources
of the Central Government.
132
The Central government collects its income from various sources.
These sources can be classified under two heads as Revenue Receipts and
Capital Receipts.
Revenue Receipts : The income generated by the government through
taxes and non-tax sources is called Revenue Receipts. This is the actual
revenue of the government. Revenue Receipts are of two types: 1.Tax
revenue 2.Non-tax revenue.
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
2.GST
U
(Goods & Service Tax)
BE @K
3. Other Taxes
1. Tax Revenue : The money paid by the citizens without any expectation
in return is called Tax. The Central government imposes various types of
TO
taxes to collect revenue. Taxes are the major sources of revenue for the
government.
T
The government imposes higher rate of taxes on high-income group

O
and lower rate of taxes on low-income group. The poor are exempted from
N
income tax. Similarly, a higher rate of taxes is imposed on luxury goods and
services used by the rich, and a lower rate of taxes on goods and services
used by the common people. This principle used by the government in the
imposition of taxes is called Principle of Progressive Taxation.
The taxes imposed by the Central government are of two types:
a. Direct Taxes – When the tax is paid by an individual on whom it is
imposed, it is called Direct Tax. The burden of this tax is not transferable
to others. Normally, the tax paid by individuals and organizations on their
income is called Direct Tax. The main types of direct taxes are : Personal
Income Tax, Corporate Tax, Wealth Tax, Stamp Duty etc.
133
b. Indirect Taxes : If the burden of tax imposed by the government is
transferable to others, it is called Indirect Tax. Generally, indirect taxes
are imposed on goods and services. For ex. the government imposes tax
on the manufacturer of goods and services at the time of producing such
goods and services. The manufacturer transfers this burden to the trader.
The trader transfers this burden to the consumer. This means that if
the government imposes tax on the producer, the burden of the tax is
ultimately borne by the consumer. The main forms of indirect taxes are
Import-Export Taxes, Goods and Service Tax and Foreign Travel Tax etc.
In this way, the government imposes various types of direct and indirect
taxes to collect its revenue. Through taxation, the government aims at
increased revenue collection.
2. Non-Tax Revenue : Apart from taxes, the government generates
revenue from other sources. This is called Non-tax revenue. The main
types of Non-tax revenue are
ED
1. The net profit earned by the Reserve Bank of India.
H
2. The net profit generated by the Indian Railways.
IS
3. The revenue generated by the Departments of Post and
BL
EP S
Telecommunications.
R TB
4. The revenue generated by the Public Sector Industries.

U
BE @K
5. The revenue generated by the Coins and Mints.

6. Various types of fees and penalties etc.
Capital Receipts :
The revenue generated by the government which is intended to be used
TO
to create new assets in various fields of the economy, is called Capital

Receipts. This revenue is generated to meet the expenses required for
T
the development of agriculture, industries, irrigation, electricity, basic

O
N
amenities etc.
The government generates the capital revenue mainly through loans
from internal and external sources. The loan obtained from citizens of the
country, banks, financial institutions and industries is called internal debt.
The loan obtained from foreign governments, foreign financial institutions
and international financial institutions is called foreign debt.
Apart from taking loans, the government generates capital revenue
through other sources too. It withdraws its investment in public
industries. This is called disinvestment. From time to time, the state
governments repay the loans and financial help they have taken from the
134
central government. The money obtained through disinvestment and
repayment of loans is called Non-debt capital receipts.
In this manner, the central government generates revenue from
various sources. Utilising that revenue, it attempts to provide funds for
administration and development in different areas of the economy.
The percentage of estimated revenue of the Central Government
in 2013-14
1. Non-debt capital receipt – 3%
2. Service tax and other taxes – 9% 27%
3. Non-tax revenue – 9%
4. Customs duty– 9%
5. Central excise tax – 10%
ED
6. Income tax – 12%
H
7. Corporate tax – 21%
IS
8. Debt and other liabilities – 27%
BL
EP S
R TB
U
4. Deficit Financing :
BE @K
The government first estimates its expenditure and then generates

revenue accordingly. When doing so, it usually plans more expenditure
than revenue. This is good for the development of the country. To fill any
gaps between its income and expenditure, the government raises loans
TO
in the Reserve Bank of India, withdraws its cash reserves in the Reserve
Bank of India, obtains loans from internal and external sources etc.
T
In developing countries, the expenditure of the governments is

O
N
increasing more than the revenue. Hence, situations of deficit financing

are cropping up. According to the definition of the Indian Planning
Commission, deficit financing is “Improving the net purchasing power of
the economy through the budgetary operation of the government.” To put
it briefly, deficit financing is when the government’s expenditure is more
than its revenue. As a result, the developmental activities in the country
increase and the amount of money in circulation increases. Due to this,
the purchasing power of the people improves. Deficit is indicated by the
nagetive sign (-).
There are four kinds of deficit financing: Budget Deficit, Revenue
Deficit, Fiscal Deficit and Primary Deficit.
135
Fiscal Deficit : In the budget, if the government’s expenditure is more than
its revenue receipts and non-debt capital receipts, it is called fiscal deficit.
Here non-debt capital revenue refers to the revenue generated through
repayment of loans the government had given to the states and the revenue
generated through disinvestment. The total expenditure of the government
includes its revenue expenditure and capital expenditure. Fiscal deficit
indicates the actual burden that will be imposed on the government
treasury. In other words, it indicates how much loan the government has
to take from internal and external sources. When the government is not
able to overcome the fiscal deficit even after taking loans, the Reserve Bank
of India gives a loan to the government in the form of printing notes and
putting them into circulation. Fiscal deficit can be shown in the form of
a formula in this manner:
Fiscal deficit = (Revenue receipts + Non-debt Capital Receipts) – Total
ED
Expenditure
H
IS
Other Deficits in the Budget BL
EP S
· Budget Deficit = Total Revenue – Total Expenditure

R TB
U
· Revenue Deficit = Revenue receipt – Revenue Expenditure

BE @K
· Primary Deficit = Fiscal Deficit – Interest Payment
EXERCISES
TO
I. Fill in the blanks :

T
1. The government manages the public finance through ______________.

O
N
2. In the budget, when the government’s revenue is more than its

expenditure, it is called ___________.
3. The person who presents the Central Government Budget in the
Lok Sabha is _____________.
4. The revenue generated by the government through internal and
external loans is ______________.
5. GST Stands for ______________.
136
II. Answer the following in one sentence each :
6. What is Public Finance?
7. What do you mean by Budget?
8. Give the meaning of Deficit Budget.
9. What are Direct Taxes?
10. Express fiscal deficit in the form of a formula.
III. Answer the following in five-six sentences each :
11. Explain the differences between personal finance and public
finance.
12. Explain briefly the significance of public finance.
ED
13. List the plan expenditure of the Central Government.
H
14. Explain the aspects of non-tax revenue of the Central government.
IS
15. What is fiscal deficit? Mention the four kinds of fiscal deficit.
BL
EP S
R TB
U
IV. Activities :
BE @K
1. Visit a Grama Panchayat or Taluk Panchayat office nearby, and

collect information about its budget.
2. Watch the presentation of the Central and State Budgets on T.V.,
TO
and discuss them in your class.

T
3. Collect the reports from newspapers about the presentation of the

O
budgets, and display them in your classroom.

N
V. Project :
1. Discuss with the elders of your family and prepare budget relating
to sources of income and expenditure of your family.

137
BUSINESS STUDIES
CHAPTER - 32
ENTREPRENEURSHIP

• Meaning of Entrepreneurship
• Role and importance of entrepreneurship.
• Self-employment opportunities
• Self employment schemes
Entrepreneurship constitute the driving force of to-day’s market

economy. It is one of the four main economic factors namely land, labour,
capital and organisation. It is a very powerful factor in changing the
ED
business environment of a country and its entire industrial sector.
H
Meaning of Entrepreneur
IS
BL
EP S
The word entrepreneur is derived from the French word ‘Entreprende’,
R TB
which means to undertake some activity. Entrepreneur is an innovator of

U
new ideas and business processes. He possesses management skills and

BE @K
strong team building abilities and essential leadership qualities to manage

the business. He exercises initiative by organising a venture to take the
benefit of an opportunity. In business, the entrepreneur decides what,
how and how much of goods and services to be produced. He comesup
TO
with new ideas for product’s market or techniques. To put it in simple

words an entrepreneur is someone who perceives opportunity, organises
T
resources needed for exploiting the opportunity and exploits it. Comput-
O
N
ers, mobile phones, washing machines. ATM’s, courier service and instant
foods are some of the examples of entrepreneurs ideas that got converted
into products or services.
Entrepreneurship : Entrepreneurship is a process of a action of an en-
trepreneur who undertakes to establish his entreprise. Entrepreneurship
is a creative activity. It is the ability to create and build something. It is a
knack of sensing the opportunity where others see chaos, contradiction
and confusion.
Entreprenurship is the attitude of mind to seek opportunities, take
calculated risks and derive benefits by settingup a venture which comprises
138
of numerous activities involved in it. Entrepreneurship is a process. It is
not a combination of some stray incidents. It is purposeful and organised
search for change. Entrepreneurship is a philosophy. It is the way one
thinks, one acts and therefore in can exist in many situations, let it be
business or government or in the field of edcuation, science and technology
or poverty alleviation or any others.
Characateristics of an Entrepreneur / Entrepreneurships :
• Creativity • Innovation
• Dynamism • Leadership
• Team building • Achievement motivation
• Problem solving • Goal orientation
• Risk taking • Decision making
• Commitment
ED
Functions of Entrepreneur: An entrepreneur has to perceive opportunities,
plan, organise resources and oversee production, marketing. He infuses
H
motivation among his assistants. Most importantly he has to innovate and
IS
bear risk. The main functions of an entrepreneur are:
BL
EP S
R TB
• Entrepreneur starts business activity by preparing various plans

U
relating to business
BE @K
• He organises factors of production.

• He takes decisions about product, technology, marketing,
employment etc.,
• He co-ordinates things effectively.
TO
• He innovates new methods.

T
• He handles budget of his concern

O
• He bears risk and uncertainty.

N
• He gives directions to the business firm and ensures its effective

operation.
Role and importance of an entrepreneur
Entrepreneurs are the business leaders, They look for ideas and put
them into practice in nurturing economic growth and development. They
play the most important role in the economic growth and development
of a country’s economy. Entrepreneurs play a pivotal role not only in the
development of industrial sector of a country but also in the development
of agriculture and service sector. The major role played by the entrepre-
neurs in the economic development is as follows:
139
1. Entrepreneurs promote capital formation by mobilizing the idle
savings of the citizens. They employ resources for setting up their
enterprises.
2. Entrepreneurs provide large scale employment to artisans, technically
qualified persons and professionals.
3. Entrepreneurs help the country to increase the Gross Domestic
product (GDP) and per capital income.
4. Entrepreneurs encourage effective mobilization of skill, bring in
new products and services and develop market for the growth of the
economy
5. Entrepreneurs enable the people to avail better quality goods at lower
prices which results in the improvement of their standard of living.
6. Entrepreneurs promote development of Industries. They help to remove
regional disparities by industrialising rural and backward areas.
ED
7. Entrepreneurs contribute towards the development of society by
H
reducing concentration of income and wealth.
IS
8. Entrepreneurs promote country’s export trade.
BL
EP S
R TB
9. Entrepreneurs work in an environment of changing technology and

U
try to maximise profits by innovations.

BE @K
Importance of Entrepreneurs
Entrepreneurs occupy a central position in a market economy.
They serve as the “Spark plug” in the economy’s engine, activating and
TO
stimulating all dynamic activities.

For the economic progress of a nation and to spread its activities
T
world wide. So they must be encouraged and rewarded. A society becomes

O
N
prosperous only when it rewards and encourages the entrepreneurial

activities because it is they and their activities. Which are the critical
detriminents for success, prosperity, growth and opportunity in the
economy. The most dynamic societies in the world are those that have
more entrepreneurs. Entrepreneurs promote capital formation by moblising
the idle savings of the public. They employ their own as well as borrowed
resources for setting up their entreprises. Such type of entrepreneurial
activities tends to value addition and creation of wealth, which is very
essential for the industrial and economic development of a country. It
is the entrepreneurial energy, creativity and innovation that trigger the
production and sale of new products and services. It is the entrepreneur,
140
who undertakes the risk of the enterprise in search of profit and seeks
opportunities to earn profit and strives hard to satisfy the needs.
Self employment opportunities for entrepreneurship
The self-employed are a backbone of a nation. The corner tea shop,
mom-and-pop grocery, scrap dealer and the internet ciber shops are some
of the examples of self employed entrepreneurship. Encouragement and
help to compete in the global economy is very essential. The Government
of India has been at the forefront to promote private entrepreneurship
by providing the right socio- economic eco - system for innovation and
development. The key to transforming an individual from being “self
employed” to become an “entrepreneur” is the establishment of a business
organisation. The Ministry of Micro, small and Medium entreprises is the
off-beat of this change. As majority of new business enteties are launched
ED
with minimum capital and maximum vision.
H
Any individual interested in setting up an unit has a vast opportunity
IS
to select any form of business which he/she thinks feasible. For example
BL
EP S
they can select business such as :

R TB
U
1) Advertising agencies
BE @K
2) Marketing consultancy.
3) Industrial consultancy.
4) Equipment rental and leasing.
TO
5) Photocopying centres
T
6) Industrial Research and Development.

O
N
7) Industrial testing labs.

8) Intrenet browsing/setting up of cyber cafe.
9) Installation and operation of cable and T.V network.
10) Beauty parlours.
Self employment Schemes:

Finance is one of the essential requirement to start an entreprise.
Without adequate funds, no business can be started or developed. To meet
this requirement, the governments both at the Central and State level have
141
set-up several financial institutions. These financial institutions help even
small scale industries by providing loans.
Some of the important financial institutions are:
1) Industrial Development Bank of India (IDBI)
2) National Bank for Agriculture & Rural Development (NABARD)
3) Export and Import Bank (EXIM BANK)
4) Small Industries Development Bank of India (SIDBI)
5) Industrial Finance Corporation of India (IFCI)
6) Industrial Credit & Government Corporation of India(ICGCI)
7) Industrial Re-construction Bank of India (IRBI)
8) Commercial & other Banks
ED
9) State Finace corporations.
H
10) Life Insurance Corporation of India (LIC)
IS
11) Unit Trust of India (UTI) BL
EP S
R TB
Promotional organisations:
U
BE @K
Government at State and Central level have introduced many measures

to support the growth and development of entrepreneurs. A number of
promoting agencies and institutions have been setup to help emerging
entrepreneur to start especialy small & medium scale enterprises. These
TO
institutions support the entrepreneus in respect of training, financing and

marketing. Some such institutions are:
T
O
1) District Industrial Centres (DIC’s)

N
2) Small Industries Development Corporation Ltd (SIDC)

3) National Small Industries Corporation (NSIC)
4) Small Scale Industries Board
5) Small Industries Service Institutions (SISI)
6) Industrial Estates.
7) Khadi & Village Industries Corporation
8) Technical Consultancy Organisation.
142
District Industrial Centres (DIC’s)
These centres were established in the year 1978 with a focus
to provide integrated administrative support for promotion of
small scale industries in rural areas. These centres act as a chief
co-ordinators in respect of various government and other agencies. DIC’s
provide a single window interacting agency to the budding entrepreneurs
at district levels. They provide:
1) Technical support for preparation of project report.
2) Promotion of new Industrial Estates.
3) Approval of Project reports of special types.
4) Training through Entrepreneurship development programmes.
5) Allotment of raw materials .
ED
6) Financial assistance under self-employment schemes.
H
7) Assistance in marketing linkage with central government.
IS
8) Marketing assistance through participation in exhibitions/trade
BL
EP S
R TB
fairs/buyers-sellers meet.
U
BE @K
9) Attending problems related to SSI registration/Bank loan/

marketing production.
10) Financial assistance for modernisation of units.
11) Export assistance.
TO
12) Promoting entrepreneurship through National level awards for

innovative products.
T
O
13) Promotion of products under non-conventional energy source.

N
14) Assistance in design and product development for handicrafts.

EXERCISES

1. The word entrepreneur has come from the French word ________ .
2. The process of action an entrepreneur undertakes to establish an
entreprise is called ____________ .
3. District Industrial Centres were started in the year _________
143
II. Discuss the following questions in group and then answer.
4. Who is an entrepreneur?
5. “Entrepreneurship is a creative activity”. How?
6. What are the characteristics of Entrepreneurship?
7. Explain the importance of an entrepreneur.
8. What is the part played by the District centres in the development
of Entreprises?
III. Activities :
1. Visit an entreprise near your place and collect information about
the workers.
ED
2. Collect information about various entreprises through internet.
H
IS
3. Collect the photographs of famous entrepreneurs of India.
BL
EP S
IV. Project :
R TB
U
BE @K
1. Arrange for an interview with your nearby entrepreneur and collect

detailed information about how he/she has built up that entreprise
and prepare a report.
TO
T

O
N
144
Chapter – 33
CONSUMER EDUCATION
AND PROTECTION

• Consumer, consumer rights, exploitation and consumer
awareness.
• The major objectives of the consumer protection and its
importance.
• To follow certain precautionary measures while buying goods
and services.
ED
• The significance of the Consumer Education and information with
regard to the methods of filing cases with the consumer court.
H
IS
BL
EP S
The User and the Provider
R TB
U
The Service Organisations have used the term ‘User’ to those who use
BE @K
the goods and services. The person who supplies goods or services is called
‘Provider’. The Government in its consumer protection Act has used the
word ‘Consumer’ in place of user. It is the duty of the traders and producers
to provide quality goods and services for the price paid by the consumer.
TO
It is the right of every consumer to get quality goods and services. The
traders or the producers cheat the consumers in many ways. To stop this
T
O
hindrance some social organisations started some movements. The history

N
of consumer movement began in U.S. In India the planning commission

backed the idea of foundation of ‘Indian Association of consumers’ in 1956,
for various reasons it was not effective. The real beginning of the movement
was started in India in 1965. During that year, some women of Mumbai
started a movement called ‘AWARE’ (The Association of Women Against
Rising Expenses). This movement gave rise to start some movments at the
National level in some parts of the country. The important associations
are the Federation of Consumer Organisation, The National Consumer
Protection Council etc.
145
The Reasons for Consumer Exploitation:
During the past, the Producers were supplying goods directly to the
consumers. e.g - milk, fruits, vegetables etc., without any hindrance of
middlemen. When agricultural occupations developed, it changed the
marketing methods. The direct transaction between the producer and
the consumer has almost stopped. The Price Fixation of the goods and
services was done mainly by the middlemen. It led to many hindrances.
Consumers had to face various difficulties and problems. They incurred
many losses. The development of information technology has led to
Teleshopping. Through Teleshopping the consumer can sit at home and
directly buy the goods from the traders.
What is teleshopping?
The consumers instead of going to traders can place order for the
ED
goods which are advertised over Television and other media. Through
Internet, SMS or Telephone consumers can place the order for the goods
H
selected. Payment can be made after receiving the goods at door. This
IS
transaction is called Teleshopping. BL
EP S
R TB
U
Consumer: Consumer is a person who buys goods or hires or avails
BE @K
services for a consideration called Price or Wages. The goods purchased may
be for self consumption or meant for resale or for a commercial purpose
(Any activity or transaction carried on with the motive of making profit is a
commercial purpose). Every consumer has certain wants. He buys goods to
TO
satisfy his wants. It is the duty of every producer to satisfy the needs of the
consumers. Ours is a free enterprise economy and consumer is regarded
T
as the king and occupies a prime place. But, unfortunately many a times
O
consumers are neglected, exploited and cheated. They suffer heavily.

N
World Consumers’ Day

In the history of World Consumers’ Movement, March 15, 1962 is
an important day. On that day, the president John F.Kennedy gave the
American consumers four basic rights: the right to safety, the right to
choose, the right to information, and the right to be heard. For this reason,
March 15 of every year is celebrated as the World Consumers’ Day.
Consumer Protection: It refers to protection to consumers against
exploitation by the producers and traders. There is a great need for
consumer protection. To safeguard the interests of consumers, consumer
rights are assured.
146
Consumer Protection Act: The Consumer Movements were started
by a few people who suffered on account of regular exploitation by traders
(a few are mentioned in the first paragraph of this chapter). Such movements
brought pressure on the government and alerted it to formulate new Acts
to safeguard the interests of the consumers. In the last five decades, more
than 30 Acts have been implemented. E.g. Essential Commodities Act,
Weights and Measures Act, Act against Adulteration of Food Articles etc.
The Consumer protection Act 1986 is a significant step in this direction.
Major Objectives of the Act:
• The Act accords importance for safety and quality.
• Avoiding production and sale of dangerous goods.
• Prevention of Trade Malpractices in the market.
• Supervision on Quality, Weights, Measures and Price.
ED
• Compensating the Consumers in case of any problem arising as
a result of trade.
H
IS
• Creating awareness to the consumers through Consumer
Education.
BL
EP S
R TB
In total, the major objective of the Act is to ensure quality goods and
U
services at reasonable prices through healthy competition.

BE @K
The Consumer Protection Act extends to the whole of India. It applies to

all goods and services. The Act promotes the rights of consumers such as:
• The Right to Protect against the marketing of goods which are
TO
hazardous to life and property of the consumers.

• The Right to Information- information about the quality, quantity,
T
purity, standard etc, to protect the consumer against unfair trade

O
practices.
N
• Right to Choice: Wherever possible access to variety of goods at

competitive prices.
• Right to be Heard: The interests of the consumers to be heard
with due consideration.
• Right to seek Redressal against the unfair trade practices or
unscrupulous exploitation.
• Right to Consumer Education: The Consumers are to be educated
about their rights.
• Right to stop exploitation.
147
• Right to healthy environment that is good physical environment
to enhance the quality of their life.
The Consumer Protection Act provides for the establishment of Central
Protection Council at National Level, State Consumer Protection Council at
State Level and District Consumer Protection Council at district level. These
councils are formed in accordance with the jurisdiction and the Minister
in charge of Consumer Affairs at Central Government is the Chairman
at the National Council. The Minister is In charge of Consumer Affairs at
the State Level. The District Commissioner/Collector is the chairman at
the district level.
Consumer disputes redressal Agencies:
The Consumer Protection Act provides for the establishment of
consumer disputes redressal agencies such as:
1. District Commission. 2. State Commission. 3. National Commission.
ED
1) District Commission : There shall be a forum in each district. A
H
qualified district judge nominated by the state government presides over
IS
the deliberations. It entertains the complaints where the value of goods
BL
EP S
and services is less than Rs. One Crore. There shall be two members of
R TB
whom one shall be a woman.

U
BE @K
2) The State Commission : A person who is or has been a High Court

Judge is its president. There shall be two other eminent members, who
have adequate knowledge relating to consumer affairs of the two members
one shall be a woman. It entertains complaints of more than One crore
TO
and less then Ten crores.

3) The National Commission : It is headed by a Judge of Supreme
T
Court to be appointed by the Central Government as President. There shall

O
be four other members of eminence, integrity and standing. Of them one

N
shall be a woman. National Commission shall dispose of any complaints

where the claim shall exceed Ten crores.
The methods to be followed to file a case in a consumer court
• There is no prescribed proforma to file a case.
• The complaint may be a typed one or hand written.
• The complaint should include the name of the person
(complainant), Full address and Telephone Number.
• The person or organisation against whom the complaint is made
should be, mentioned clearly with address.
148
• The particulars of the goods by which the loss has incurred and
the amount of loss should be specified clearly. The bill or receipt
should be enclosed.
• There is no fees or stamp duty for the complaint
• No advocate or lawyer is required. The consumer himself/herself
can argue.
EXERCISES
I. Fill in the blanks with suitable answers:
1. The other name of the Consumer is

2. Person giving goods or services for money is called
3. The Consumer Day is observed on every year.
ED
4. In the case of compensation less then one crore the complaint
H
has to be submitted to the .
IS
BL
II. Answer the following questions in one word or sentence each:
EP S
R TB
U
5. Who is called a consumer?
BE @K
6. What is the main aim of Consumer Movement?

7. What is the Right of every Consumer?
8. When did Consumer Protection Act come into force in India?
9. Who appoints the President of the District Consumer Forum?
TO
III. Answer the following questions in two or three sentences each:

T
O
10. What are the problems faced by consumers?

N
11. What are the causes for consumer exploitation?

12. Mention the four important aims of the Consumer Protection
Council.
13. What are the major functions of the Consumer Protection
Council?
14. Mention three stages of Consumer Courts.
15. What are the methods to follow to file a complaint in consumer
court?
149
IV. Observe the picture given below and answer the questions
that fallow:
ED
H
IS
BL
EP S
R TB
1. What is the Company’s name printed on the packet?

U
BE @K
2. What is the maximum price printed?

3. What is the date of manufacturing of this item?
4. What is the date within which this item is to be used?
TO
V. Activities:
1. Visit your district Consumer Forum with your teacher.
T
Observe the functions of the forum and collect information.

O
N
2. Prepare four slogans to create consumer awareness.

3. Plan a Jatha on the World Consumer Day and engage yourself
in creating consumer awareness.
4. Collect different types of bills/receipts of awareness.
VI. Project:
Imagine an instance of being cheated by the trader and prepare an
application of complaint. Prepare your own supporting documents.

150

10 Social Textbook Combo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

10 Social Textbook Combo

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

10 Social Textbook Combo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Government of Karnataka

Karnataka Textbook Society (R.)

Constructive approach, Spiral Approach and Integrated approach. The learner

is encouraged to think, engage in activities, master skills and competencies. The

the guidelines of NCF-2005. A lot of additional information is given through box

items. Learners are encouraged to work towards construction of knowledge through

Prof. G. S. Mudambadithaya Nagendra Kumar

A demand for the change of curriculum, syllabi and textbooks has

The textbook has been prepared keeping in mind the changing

We express our grateful thanks to all those who gave us concrete

to the writers, the scrutiny committee members and translators.

We are especially grateful to the chief coordinator

C.N.Shankar Rao, Retd. Lecturer, Canara P.U college, Mangalore.

Dr. M. V. Srinivas, Retd. Professor, Department of History, Mysore University, Mysore.

Dr. Eshwarappa, Professor, Department of Geography, Bangalore University, Bangalore-56.

There were already many complaints, and analyses about the

to the responsible committees to examine and review to text and

the completely revised textbooks could be put to force from 2017-18

Many self inspired individuals and institutions, listing out the

the aspirations of the constitution are incorporated carefully. Further,

the reviews of the committees were once given to higher expert

Finally, we express our grateful thanks to those who strived in all

served in higher committees and experts of revised textbooks also. At

Society who sincerely worked hard in forming the committees and

Veeranna S. Jatti Prof. Baraguru Ramachandrappa

Sri A.S. Dikshit, Principal (Retd.), Vani Education Centre, Basaveswaranagar,

Karnatak Univesity, Dharwad.

Dr. Dhasharath Naik, Professor, Department of Economics, Gulbarga University,

On review of text books

gion, philosophy, community or individual

At every stage of revision, we were cautious that social science textbooks

Veeranna S. Jatti Rohith Chakrathirtha

Karnataka Textbook Society (R) Karnataka textbooks review committee

Sri K.R. Manjunath, Asst. Teacher, National High School, Bengaluru.

Smt P. Radha, Senior Asst. Director, DSERT, Banashankari 3rd stage,

Sri Kodandaramaiah. N, Deputy Director, Karnataka Text Book Society,

5. ¤¢ðμÀÖ ¥ÀoÀåUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¨ÉÆÃ¢ü¸ÀÄªÀ ²PÀëPÀjAzÀ ¥ÀqÉzÀÄPÉÆAqÀ C©ü¥ÁæAiÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÀºÀ ¥Àæ¸ÀÄÛvÀ ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÉAiÀÄ°è

PÀ°PÁA±ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ/¥ÁoÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÀgÀ¼ÀvÉ¬ÄAzÀ ¸ÀAQÃtðvÉAiÉÄqÉUÉ ¸ÁUÀÄªÀAvÉ ªÀåªÀ¹ÜvÀªÁV C¼ÀªÀr¸À¯ÁVzÉ.

F ¥ÀjμÀÌgÀuÁ PÁAiÀÄðzÀ°è vÀªÀÄä£ÀÄß vÉÆqÀV¹PÉÆAqÀÄ PÀÄè¥ÀÛªÁV PÁAiÀÄð¤ªÀð»¹zÀ LzÀÆ ¸À«ÄwUÀ¼À

J£ï. ªÀÄAdÄ²æÃ . ¨sÁD¸ÉÃ qÁ JA. f. ºÉUÀqÉ

Bangalore Rural Dist.

1 THE ADVENT OF EUROPEANS TO INDIA 1

2 THE EXTENSION OF THE BRITISH RULE 13

3 THE IMPACT OF THE BRITISH RULE IN INDIA 19

9 WORK AND ECONOMIC LIFE 83

12 INDIA - SOILS 102

13 INDIA - FOREST RESOURCES 106

14 INDIA - WATER RESOURCES 112

We learn the following in this chapter.

to Constantinople of Eastern Roman (Byzantium) Empire. The Italian

and was considered as the ‘Gateway of European Trade’. While Arab

Asia brought good profits to Italian merchants.

da Gama, Francisco de Almeida arrived in India as the Viceroy of the

The Dutch : The Dutch belongs to Holland or Netherlands. In order to

back. The Dutch suffered huge losses.

Cochin was recognised as a centre of spice trade during the period

of Marthanda Varma Travancore became the richest province. Finally on

Varma has been recognised as an important phase in the history of India.

The English : On 31st December 1600, Queen Elizabeth issued a

in the year 1668. Later they established its factories in Machalipatnam,